Samsung | NP-R65 | Samsung NP-R65 Vartotojo vadovas

Notices
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical photocopying, recording or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the manufacturer.
The information within this manual is subject to change without notice.
The manufacturer shall not be held liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained in herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the
furnishing, performance or use of this material.
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
Product names mentioned herein are for identification purposes only, and may be
trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Macrovision Statement
If your computer has a DVD drive and an analog TV Out port, the following
paragraph applies:
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method
claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Copyright 2003 All rights are reserved
Notices i
Important Safety Information
Safety Instructions
Your system is designed and tested to meet the latest standards for safety of
information technology equipment. However, to ensure safe use of this product, it is
important that the safety instructions marked on the product and in the documentation
are followed.
Always follow these instructions to help guard against personal injury and
damage to your system.
i
Setting Up your System
• Read and follow all instructions marked on the product and in the
documentation before you operate your system. Retain all safety and operating
instructions for future use.
• Do not use this product near water or a heat source such as a radiator.
• Set up the system on a stable work surface.
• The product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on
the rating label.
• Ensure that the electrical outlet you are using to power your equipment is easily
accessible in case of fire or short circuit.
• If your computer has a voltage selector switch, make sure that the switch is in
the proper position for your area.
• Openings in the computer case are provided for ventilation. Do not block or
cover these openings. Make sure you provide adequate space, at least 6 inches
(15 cm), around the system for ventilation when you set up your work area.
Never insert objects of any kind into the computer ventilation openings.
• Ensure that the fan vents on the bottom of the casing are clear at all times. Do
not place the computer on a soft surface, doing so will block the bottom vents.
• If you use an extension cord with this system, make sure that the total ampere
rating on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the
extension cord ampere rating.
ii Users Manual
Care During Use
• Do not walk on the power cord or allow anything to rest on it.
• Do not spill anything on the system. The best way to avoid spills is to not eat or
drink near your system.
• Some products have a replaceable CMOS battery on the system board. There is
•
•
a danger of explosion if the CMOS battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the
battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the CMOS
battery requires replacement insure that a qualified technician performs the task
When the computer is turned off, a small amount of electrical current still flows
through the computer. To avoid electrical shock, always unplug all power
cables, remove the battery and modem cables from the wall outlets before
cleaning the system.
Unplug the system from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified
personnel if:
– The power cord or plug is damaged.
– Liquid has been spilled into the system.
– The system does not operate properly when the operating instructions are
followed.
– The system was dropped or the casing is damaged.
– The system performance changes.
The Instruction On Safety Operation of NotePC
1. At installation and operation of devices it is necessary to carry out requirements of
the user's guide.
2. Devices can be used only with the equipment specified in the technical
specifications of the devices.
3. At operation of devices it is necessary to carry out the basic requirements
4. At occurrence of malfunctions in the device (a smell of burnt isolation, a smoke,
etc.), it is necessary to disconnect the equipment from the power supply and to not
to inserted back before reparation.
5. Service and reparation of devices should be carried out by experts of the
manufacturer.
Technical director of the service center
Replacement Parts and Accessories
Use only replacement parts and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
Important Safety Information iii
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications
line cord.
Written by: Daryl L. Osden
Do not use this product in areas classified as hazardous. Such areas include
patient care areas of medical and dental facilities, oxygen rich environments,
or industrial areas.
Battery Disposal
Do not put rechargeable batteries or products powered by non-removable
rechargeable batteries in the garbage.
Contact the Samsung Helpline for information on how to dispose of batteries that you
cannot use or recharge any longer.
Follow all local regulations when disposing of old batteries.
Laser Safety
All systems equipped with CD or DVD drives comply with the appropriate safety
standards, including IEC 825. The laser devices in these components are classified as
“Class 1 Laser Products” under a US Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard. Should the unit ever need servicing, contact
an authorized service location.
Laser Safety Note:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To
prevent exposure to laser beams, do not try to open the enclosure of a CD or
DVD drive.
Power Cord Requirements
The power cord set (wall plug, cable and AC adapter plug) you received with your
computer meets the requirements for use in the country where you purchased your
equipment.
iv Users Manual
Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country
where you use the computer. For more information on power cord set requirements,
contact your authorized dealer, reseller, or service provider.
General Requirements
The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:
• The length of the power cord set must be at least 6.00 feet (1.8m) and a
maximum of 9.75 feet (3.0m).
• All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency
responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be used.
• The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 7 A and a
nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each country’s
power system.
• The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical configuration of an EN 60
320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C7 connector, for mating with appliance inlet on
the computer.
Important Safety Information v
Regulatory Compliance Statements
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook
system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating
a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the
specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your
system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval
Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device
in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements.
Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your
notebook is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the
wireless devices (which may be embedded into your notebook) emit less energy than
is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer
believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be
taken to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device
and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include
extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the
body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common
restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on
commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be
turned off while traveling in an airplane. 802.11B (also known as wireless
Ethernet or Wifi) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of
devices that provide wireless communication.
vi Users Manual
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is
harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be
restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas
laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may
be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of
the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for
authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since
your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between
countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities
prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in
the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do
not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and
the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Please
contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See
the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical
Support for additional information.
Regulatory Compliance Statements vii
United States of America
USA and Canada Safety Requirements and Notices
Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving.
Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or
touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting.
Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if
not, the radio may be damaged.
Use in specific environments:
The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed
by the safety directors of such environments.
The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA).
The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each
hospital.
Antenna use:
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure limits, low gain integrated antennas should
be located at a minimum distance of 20 cm (8 inches) or more from the body of all
persons.
High-gain, wall-mount, or mast-mount antennas are designed to be professionally
installed and should be located at a minimum distance of 30 cm (12 inches) or more
from the body of all persons. Please contact your professional installer, VAR, or
antenna manufacturer for proper installation requirements.
Explosive Device Proximity Warning
Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near
unshielded
blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been
modified to be qualified for such use.
Antenna Warning
To comply with the FCC and ANSI C95.1 RF exposure limits, it is
recommended for Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connections installed in a
desktop or portable computer, that the antenna for this device be installed
so as to provide a separation distance of al least 20 cm (8 inches) from
all persons and that the antenna must not be co-located or operating
in conjunction with any other antenna or radio transmitter. It is
viii Users Manual
recommended that the user limit exposure time if the antenna is
positioned closer than 20cm (8 inches).
Use On Aircraft Caution
Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radiofrequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical
aircraft instruments.
Other Wireless Devices
Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the
documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the
wireless network.
The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other
devices operating at this frequency. Any changes or modification to said
product not expressly approved by Intel could void the user's authority to
operate this device.
Unintentional Emitter per FCC Part 15
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Written by: Daryl L. Osden
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generate uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions may cause harmful interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
•
to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Regulatory Compliance Statements ix
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the following booklet helpful:
“Something About Interference.” This is available at FCC local regional offices. Our
company is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of
connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by our company. The
correction will be the responsibility of the user. Use only shielded data cables with this
system.
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook
system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system
label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United
States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device
and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include
extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body
when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices),
which may be embedded in your notebook, is well below the RF exposure limits as set
by the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact
manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
“While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the
radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be exceeded at distances
close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum
distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device can not be
colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.”
x Users Manual
FCC Part 68
This equipment compiles with part of the FCC rules. On the back of this equipment is
a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer
equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be
provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks : RJ11C
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or promises
wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See Installation
Instructions for details.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs
should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by total RENs, contact the local telephone company
to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If the terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone
Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be
required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the
customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the
telephone company will provide advanced notice in order for you to make necessary
modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment (Modem) for repair or warranty
information, please contact your local distributor. If the equipment is causing harm to
the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
The user must use the accessories and cables supplied by the manufacturer to get
optimum performance from the product.
No repairs may be done by the customer.
This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone
company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to
use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message
unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each
transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
Regulatory Compliance Statements xi
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message
and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or
individual. (The telephone number provided may not be any number for which charges
exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your fax machine, refer to your
communications software user manual.
xii Users Manual
Canada
Unintentional Emitter per ICES-003
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from
digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada.
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limitesapplicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le règlement
sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par Industrie Canada.
Intentional Emitter per RSS 210
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook
system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system
label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in Canada if an
Industry Canada ID number is on the system label.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device
and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include
extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the
body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your
notebook, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by Industry Canada.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to licensed service, this device is intended to be
operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding.
Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact
manufacturer for service.
Regulatory Compliance Statements xiii
Telecommunications per DOC notice
(for products fitted with an IC-compliant modem)
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation, and
safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to
the users’ satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should make sure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the
inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended by
means of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that
compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some
situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should make sure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections
of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present,
are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
To avoid electrical shock or equipment malfunction do not attempt to make
electrical ground connections by yourself. Contact the appropriate inspection
authority or an electrician, as appropriate.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a
telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
xiv Users Manual
European Union
European Union CE Marking and Compliance Notices
Products intended for sale within the European Union are marked with the Conformité
Européene (CE) Marking, which indicates compliance with the applicable Directives
and European standards and amendments identified below. This equipment also carries
the Class 2 identifier.
The following information is only applicable to systems labeled with the CE mark
.
European Directives
This Information Technology Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
following European directives:
• EMC Directive 89/336/EEC with amending directives 92/31/EEC & 93/68/
EEC as per
– EN 55022 Class B
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
• Low Voltage Directive (Safety) 73/23/EEC as per EN 60950(A1/A2/A3/A4/
A11)
• Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 199/5/EC as per
– CTR21 (if fitted with a modem device)
– ETS 300 328 (if fitted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device)
– ETS 301 489-1 (if fitted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device)
– ETS 301 489-17 (if fitted with a 2.4 GHz band embedded wireless device)
European Radio Approval Information
(for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
This Product is a Notebook computer; low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio
frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz band, may
be present (embedded) in your notebook system which is intended for home or office
use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system
label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Regulatory Compliance Statements xv
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European
Union or associated areas if a CE mark
with a Notified Body Registration Number
and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you
notebook is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission
through the R&TTE directive.
See 802.11b and 802.11g restrictions for specific countries or regions within
countries under the heading “European Economic Area Restrictions” below.
Translated Statements of Compliance
This product follows the provisions of the European Directive 1999/5/EC.
European Economic Area Restrictions
Local Restriction of 802.11b/802.11g Radio Usage
[Note to integrator: The following statements on local restrictions must be published in
all end-user documentation provided with the system or product incorporating the Intel
PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection product.]
Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11b/802.11g wireless LAN
devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11b/802.11g products
are designed for use only in specific countries or regions, and are not allowed
to be operated in countries or regions other than those of designated use.
As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products
are used only in the countries or regions for which they were intended and for
verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and
channel for the country or region of use. Any deviation from permissible
settings and restrictions in the country or region of use could be an
infringement of local law and may be punished as such.
The European variant is intended for use throughout the European Economic Area.
However, authorization for use is further restricted in particular countries or regions
within countries, as follows:
General
European standards dictate maximum radiated transmit power of 100 mW effective
isotropic radiated power (EIRP) and the frequency range 2400 – 2483.5 MHz.
Belgium
xvi Users Manual
The product may be used outdoors, but for outdoor transmissions over a distance of
300m or more, a license from the BIPT is required.
This restriction should be indicated in the manual as follows:
Dans le cas d'une utilisation privée, à l'extérieur d'un bâtiment, au-dessus d'un espace
public, aucun enregistrement n'est nécessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m.
Pour une distance supérieure à 300m un enregistrement auprès de l'IBPT est requise.
Pour une utilisation publique à l'extérieur de bâtiments, une licence de l'IBPT est
requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT.
France
For Metropolitan departments:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use.
2.400 -2.454 GHz (channels 1 to 7) for outdoor use.
For Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor and outdoor use.
For Reunion, Guyane:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use.
2.420 - 2.4835 GHz for outdoor use (channels 5 to 13)
European Telecommunication Information
(for products fitted with EU-approved modems)
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this equipment to the Radio and
Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC. Such marking is indicative that
this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards:
CTR 21 – Attachment requirements for pan-European approval for connection to the
analogue Public Switched Telephone Networks (PSTNs) of TE (excluding TE
supporting voice telephony services) in which network addressing, if provided, is by
means of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signaling.
Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect (pulse) or DTMF
(tone) signaling, only the performance of the DTMF signaling is subject to
regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly
recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signaling for access to
Regulatory Compliance Statements xvii
public or private emergency services. DTMF signaling also provides faster call
setup.
This equipment has been approved to Council Decision 98/482/EEC—“CTR 21” for
Pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN).
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different
countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of
successful operation on every PSTN termination point. In the event of problems, you
should contact manufacturer Technical Support.
xviii Users Manual
WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION
Correct Disposal of This Product
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate
collection systems)
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be
disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible
harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please
separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product,
or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item
for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the
purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION xix
Using Your Documentation
Congratulations on your purchase of a notebook computer with the Windows® XP
operating system. Whether you are new to using a portable computer or are an
experienced user, this user’s manual can help you get the most from your computer.
Manual Documentation Conventions
Information Icons
Three icons and their associated messages appear in this manual. The information
icons are placed before the step/information they apply to:
Warning:
Indicates the possibility of personal injury.
Caution:
Warns you of possible damage to equipment or data.
Note:
Informs you of special circumstances.
Technical Information:
Informs you of special requirements or limitations for use of item(s).
Keyboard Conventions
Keys that you need to press to perform certain functions are displayed in the manual in
brackets. For example:
<Ctrl> indicates the control key (Ctrl on the keyboard).
If you need to press two keys at the same time, the key names are shown joined by a
plus sign. For example:
<Fn+F8> means that you should press the Fn key and hold it and then press the F8 key.
Using Your Documentation 1
CD-ROM Device Naming Convention
In many installation programs you will have to get a program from the CD-ROM
device. The program installation sequence assumes that the CD is drive d:\, however
this is not always the case. The name of the CD-ROM drive is the letter following the
letter assigned to your last HDD. For instance, if you have one HDD with two
partitions, the HDD is drives C: and D: and the CD-ROM drive is then drive E.
Touchpad Conventions
You may be asked to click or double-click on items on the display screen. As a general
note the touchpad actions act much in the same way as a wheel mouse, any differences
are explained fully.
The object that needs to be clicked upon will be displayed in Bold text or shown in a
small figure such as the “Start Button” shown on the right =>.
Table 1. Touchpad Click Conventions
Action
Process
Click
Depress the touchpad left button and release
Double-click
Quickly click the left touchpad button two times
Windows Conventions:
Almost all “Windows” programs will display the name/function of a button or
icon if you place the touchpad pointer on the item you want information about.
Software User Documentation
Your computer is shipped from the factory with several software programs installed.
The software may include its own online or printed documentation. Refer to the
documentation or the Help options in the software for more information.
The figures and illustrations in this manual may not be identical to those on
your system.
General Icon Note:
Some of the Icons used in Windows XP may be placed on the taskbar by
selecting (ex: Place the volume icon in the taskbar) in the properties dialog
box.
2 Users Manual
Getting Started
Introducing Your Computer
Front View
LCD Latch
Status Indicators (p15)
LCD Panel
Power Button
AVS Button or Internet
Button (Optional)
Speaker
Keyboard (p8)
Fingerprint Sensor (Optional)
Microphone
(Optional)
Touchpad/Touchpad Button (p12)
Status Indicators (p15)
Multi Card Slot (Optional, p30)
AVS Button or Internet Button(Optional)
For models with the AVS button (
(p51)
For models with the Internet button (
), it operates as an AVStation function.
), it operates as an Internet button.
Fingerprint Sensor(Optional)
You can turn the computer on with your fingerprint or login to Windows. For
more information, refer to the additionally supplied manual. (Only for models
with the fingerprint identification system.)
Getting Started 3
Right View
USB Port(2.0)
Infrared Port (Optional)
1394 Port (4 Pin, Optional)
Serial Port (Optional)
Wireless LAN Latch
CD Drive (optional, p22)
Left View
TV Output Port
(S-Video)
Monitor Port
PC Card Slot (p33)
Fan Vent
LAN Port (p60)
Modem Port (Optional, p59)
4 Users Manual
Headphone Jack / S/PDIF Jack
Microphone Jack
Back View
Battery
USB Port (2.0)
Security Lock Port
(p116)
DC Jack
Bottom View
Battery Latches
Docking Connector
(Optional)
Memory Compartment
(p114)
HDD Compartment Cover
Removing or disassembling the hard disk drive will void your warranty. To
replace the hard disk drive, please contact your nearest Samsung Service
Centre.
Getting Started 5
Turning the Computer On and Off
To turn on the computer
1. Insert the battery and connect the AC adapter according to the Installation Guide.
2. Slide the LCD latch to the right and open the LCD panel.
3. Press the power button.
To turn off the computer
1. Click the start button (
2. Click Turn Off Computer.
6 Users Manual
) on the taskbar.
3. Click Turn Off.
If the computer has not turned off properly due to a system error, press
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete>. When [Windows Task Manager] dialog box appears,
click Shut Down > Turn Off to turn off the computer. Your unsaved work may
be lost/damaged.
If <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete> keys do not operate either, press the power button
for more than 4 seconds to turn off the computer. Your unsaved work may be
lost/damaged. The next time you turn on your computer, a hard disk check will
be performed, before Windows starts.
Getting Started 7
Using the Keyboard
Your computer has an 88-key keyboard. By pressing designated key combinations, you
can have access to all the key functions of a full-sized keyboard.
The keyboard is supplied according to the corresponding country. Refer to the
keyboard figure for the corresponding country.
<United Kingdom>
Function
Key
Windows
Key
Function & Special Purpose Keys
Embedded Numeric Keypad
Application Key
Screen Brightness and
Volume Adjustment /
Direction Keys
Although the layout of the keys on your computer’s keyboard is different from
that on a desktop computer’s keyboard, the keyboard feels like a full-sized
keyboard when you use it.
8 Users Manual
<United States>
Function
Key
Function & Special Purpose Keys
Windows
Key
Embedded Numeric Keypad
Application Key
Screen Brightness and
Volume Adjustment /
Direction Keys
The keys on the keyboard can be grouped into the following categories:
• Full-sized Alphanumeric typewriter keys are arranged like a standard
typewriter keyboard and are used for text entry. The Windows keys on either
side of the spacebar open Windows menus and perform other special functions.
• Function keys, when pressed together with the <Fn> key, enable special
functions.
• Cursor and Screen control keys move the cursor. They may perform other
functions, depending on your software.
To clean the computer keyboard, use slightly damp cotton swabs. Scrub the keys and
the surface around the keys.
Do not allow liquid to drip into the keyboard or you may damage the keyboard.
Getting Started 9
Using the Numeric Keypad
Your keyboard includes a numeric keypad, which is a group of keys that you can set to
type numbers and mathematical symbols, such as the plus sign. A number or symbol
on the corner of each keypad key shows its numeric function.
Num Lock LED
Press <Fn+Num Lock> to turn on the embedded numeric keypad. The numeric
functions of the keypad are enabled and the Num Lock LED turns on. ( "Reading the
Status Indicators" on page 15 for the location of the Num Lock LED.)
While the numeric functions are enabled, you can temporarily return a key to its normal
function by pressing the key and the <Fn> key. For example to type the letter m, press
<Fn+M>, this operation displays the letter m.
To turn the numeric keypad off, press <Fn+Num Lock> again. The Num Lock LED
turns off.
10 Users Manual
Using Special Function Keys
The function key activates special functions when it is pressed in combination with
another keys.
<Fn> Key
Combinations
Key Name
Key Function
<Esc/
Standby
Places the computer into standby mode. To resume from standby
mode, press the power button. (p104).
>
<F2/
>
Gauge
Shows the remaining battery charge.
Appears only when the Samsung Display Manager program is
installed.
<F4/
>
LCD/CRT
Switches the display between the LCD and external display device
when an external display device is connected. (p101)
<F5/Backlit>
Backlight
Turns the LCD on and off.
<F6/Mute>
Mute
Turns the audio output on and off.
<F7/ SRS>
SRS
This feature enables you to experience more stereophonic sound. You
can select one of the following modes by pressing the button.
Note. WOW XT ON Mode: Select to listen to music.
TRUSURROUND Mode: Select to watch a movie.
SRS OFF Mode: Switches off the SRS function.
The SRS function is only supported through the built-in speaker of the
computer and the headphones. It is not supported through the S/PDIF
port.
<F9/
>
Touchpad
Turns the touchpad function on and off.
Etiquette Mode
You can select Etiquette Mode when you need a tranquil work
environment.
<F11/Num Lock>
Number Lock
Enables the numeric keypad. (p10)
<F12/Scroll>
Scroll Lock
Scrolls the screen up and down while the cursor position does not
change in some applications.
<
/
>
Volume Down
Decreases the audio volume.
<
/
>
Volume Up
Increases the audio volume.
<
/
>
Brightness Up
Makes the LCD screen brighter.
<
/
>
Brightness Down
Makes the LCD screen dimmer.
<F10/
>
When you press a function key combination, the system sound may be
temporarily muted.
Getting Started 11
Using the Touchpad
In Windows, you always see a small graphical image on the screen that indicates the
location where you can take the next action. This image is called a pointer, and is
usually displayed in arrow shape ( ) or ‘I’ shape ( ).
Touchpad
Touchpad Buttons
The touchpad on your computer allows you to move the pointer on the LCD screen,
just like a mouse that is used with a desktop computer. The touchpad buttons allow you
to take actions with the pointer, such as selecting an item or executing a command.
Locking the touchpad
You can lock the touchpad and use only the keyboard and mouse. To lock the
touchpad function, press the <Fn>+<F9> key combination.
12 Users Manual
You can perform various actions with your touchpad as described below.
d
Action
Function
Process
Move
Move the pointer
Place your finger on the touchpad
and slide your finger to a
destination.
Click
Select an object, open a menu, or
execute a button
Place the pointer over an object,
then press left touchpad button
once.
Or, place the pointer over an
object, then tap the touchpad once
with your finger.
Double-Click
Launch a program or open a file
Place the pointer over an object,
then quickly press left touchpad
button twice.
Or, place the pointer over an
object, then quickly tap the
touchpad twice with your finger.
Right-Click
Display a short cut menu
Place the pointer over an object,
then press right touchpad button
once.
Drag
Move an object, or select an area
or multiple objects
Drag and drop a part to the
required place.
Getting Started 13
Action
Function
Process
Scroll
Display upper/lower/left/right part
of the content within a window
Place your finger on the right edge
or bottom edge of the touchpad
and move vertically or horizontally.
(Applicable to certain programs
only)
Please use the touchpad only with your finger. Using sharp devices may
damage the touchpad.
Operating the touchpad or touchpad button while starting your system may
increase the time required for starting Windows.
14 Users Manual
Reading the Status Indicators
Shows the operating status of the computer.
Num Lock
Turns on when the numeric keypad is activated.
Caps Lock
Turns on when all alphabet characters you type will be in upper case.
Scroll Lock
Turns on when it is set to scroll the screen up and down while the cursor
position does not change in some applications.
Hard Disk Drive /
CD-ROM Drive
Blinks when the hard disk drive or CD-ROM drive is in operation.
Wireless LAN
Turns on when the wireless LAN function is enabled. (This light does not
operate for models without a wireless LAN.)
Battery
Turns Light Green - when the battery is fully charged, or when the battery is
not installed.
Turns amber - when the battery is being charged.
Blinks - when the battery is not properly installed.
Power
Turned On - when the computer is turned on.
Blinks - when the computer is in Standby mode.
Getting Started 15
Adjusting LCD Brightness
There are 8 levels of LCD brightness (1: Dimmest ~ 8: Brightest).
To adjust using keyboard
Press <Fn>+<
> or <Fn>+<
> keys from the keyboard to adjust LCD brightness.
Whenever you turn the system on or change the power source the brightness level
changes according to the settings.
• when operating on AC power:
Brightness Level 8
• when operating on battery power: Brightness Level 1
Adjusting the brightness using the Battery Manager
You can adjust the screen brightness using the Battery Manager. (p112)
Maintaining your LCD brightness settings after turning the system off
and on
1. Turn the system on. When the Samsung Logo appears, press the <F2> key
to enter Setup.
2. In the Boot menu, change the Brightness Mode Control option to User
Control.
3. Save the settings and exit Setup.
- When using the Battery Manager, only the screen brightness set in
'Customized Mode' is maintained.
To save the battery charge
When your computer is operating on battery power, adjusting the LCD
brightness level to dimmer diminishes the battery power consumption.
Bad pixels in the LCD
The limits of the LCD manufacturing technology allow a maximum of 10
abnormal or bad pixels, which do not affect system performance. This system
may have the same level of abnormal or bad pixels as any other company’s
products.
Maintenance Instructions
When cleaning the LCD panel, use only computer specific cleaners on a soft
cloth, and lightly wipe in one direction.
16 Users Manual
Adjusting the Volume
To adjust using keyboard
Press <Fn>+<
> or <Fn>+<
> from the keyboard.
To adjust using volume adjustment program
Click the Volume icon(
level.
) on the taskbar, and move the Volume slider to a desired
For advanced volume control options, double-click the Volume icon(
the volume level in the volume control program.
), and adjust
When you turn the system on, a booting noise may occur.
Getting Started 17
Introducing Windows
Understanding the Desktop
The desktop is the working area on the computer. It consists of the large workspace and
a taskbar at the bottom.
Shortcut
Icons
Start Menu
Recycle Bin
Language Bar
Start Button
Taskbar
System Tray with Clock
Start Button
Opens the Start menu.
Taskbar
Displays programs that are currently running. Frequently used
icons can be placed here.
Recycle Bin
Deleted files or folders are sent here.
Language Bar
Switches text input language.
18 Users Manual
Understanding the Start Menu
The Start menu includes everything that is required to start Windows. From the Start
menu it is possible to run a program, open a file, assign system users with Control
Panel, receive support by clicking Help and Support, and search desired items from the
computer or Internet by clicking Search.
My Computer
Control Panel
Frequently used programs
Help and Support
All Programs
Start Button
My Computer
Displays the contents of the hard disk, the CD-ROM drive, the network
drive(s), and floppy disks. It can also be used to search and open files
and folders.
Control Panel
Enables users to configure settings on the computer.
Help and
Support
Provides on-line help, information on Windows and troubleshooting.
Search
Enables users to search for information in files or the Internet.
Run
Run programs or documents.
Introducing Windows 19
Understanding a Window
A window is the basic component in working with the computer. The My Computer
window, which is a window for the computer's hard drive, will be used as an example
here to show the basic composition of a window.
Click Start > My Computer.
Folder Icon
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Close Button
Maximize Button
Minimize Button
Quick Task
Window
Folders
Files
Double-click
Shared
Documents or
Local Disk.
You can see files
and folders.
Double-click the hard drive (local disk) to view internal folders and files stored in it. If
the contents do not appear, click Show the contents of this folder.
What is a drive?
A storage device in which files and folders are saved in, and read from.
What is a folder?
A folder is used to group and manage files systematically, and may include
files in sub-folders. It is similar to a bookshelf.
What is a file?
A file is a document or various kinds of material that is generated as a result
of program operation. It is also called data.
To view the entire structure of the drive
Click the Folder icon in the taskbar to view the entire structure. Click again to
return to the Quick Task Window.
20 Users Manual
Help and Support Center
Help and Support Center provides references and troubleshooting information
regarding computer use.
Click Start > Help and Support.
Please refer to help and support centre before calling the Samsung helpline.
Windows XP Tour
You can tour elementary functions provided by Windows XP.
Click Start > Tour Windows XP.
Or click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Tour Windows XP.
Click on the topics to find out about important functions of Windows XP.
Introducing Windows 21
Using the Computer
Using the CD Drive
You have one of following drives installed in your computer.
CD-ROM
Reads CDs.
DVD-ROM
Reads CDs/DVDs.
CD-RW/DVD-ROM Combo drive
Reads a CD/DVD and writes a CD.
DVD Super Multi Drive
Reads CD/DVDs and writes data to CD/DVDs. Supported DVD
types include DVD ± R, DVD ± RW and DVD-RAM.
A CD-ROM drive is optional. For more detailed product specifications, refer to
the product catalog.
To insert a CD
1. Press the eject button on right side of the CD drive.
2. When the tray slides out, place a CD onto the tray with the label facing up, and
push the CD down until it clicks.
Emergency Eject Hole
Eject Button
CD Access LED
3. Push the tray in gently until it clicks.
22 Users Manual
To eject a CD
1. Stop any process that accesses the CD drive and ensure the CD access LED is
turned off.
2. Press the eject button on right side of the CD drive.
3. When the tray slides out, remove the CD from the tray.
4. Push the tray in gently until it clicks.
If you remove the CD when the CD access LED is on, the disk and the data in
it may be damaged.
Emergency Eject Hole
To eject a CD when the CD drive is not working or the computer is turned off,
unfold a paperclip, and insert the unfolded end of the clip into the emergency
eject hole (located next to the eject button) and press until the CD tray opens.
To clean a CD or DVD title
Clean the disc with a soft clean cloth by wiping from the center outwards.
Using the Computer 23
To use the Windows Media Player
Window Media Player enables you to play and manage audio and video files.
To launch the Windows Media Player, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Entertainment > Windows Media Player.
Running the program the first time displays the set up screen. Define the settings
according to the instructions displayed on the screen.
When you complete the settings, the following screen appears.
Features
Playlist
Playback Control Area
To view detailed information on how to use Windows Media Player
Run Windows Media Player and right-click over the Function Taskbar and
select Help > Windows Media Player Help.
To play a video CD
If a video CD does not run automatically, follow these steps.
1. Insert a video CD into the CD drive.
2. When the CD drive window appears, double-click the MPEGAV folder.
3. Double-click the .dat file.
4. When the [Caution] dialog appears, click Open With.
5. Select “Select the program from a list” and click OK.
6. Select the Windows Media Player, and click OK. The video starts playing.
24 Users Manual
Above procedure applies only to the video CDs that has a .dat file as the
execution file. Playing procedure may be different according to video CDs.
To write data on a CD (Optional)
If your computer has CD-RW functionality, you can copy data to a blank CD or create
an audio CD.
You cannot write to a CD that already has data in it.
1. Insert a blank CD into the CD drive.
2. On the [CD Drive] dialog, select Open Writable CD Folder and click OK. The
CD drive window appears.
3. Click Start > My Computer.
4. In My Computer window, select files and folders to copy, then drag and drop them
onto the CD drive window.
My Computer window
CD drive window
4. Drag and drop folders or
files to copy.
5. Click Write these files to CD.
Using the Computer 25
5. Click Write these files to CD in the CD drive window.
6. When the CD Writing Wizard appears, enter the CD label, and click Next. The
data begins copying.
7. When copying is completed, a ‘completed’ message appears and the CD drive
window opens automatically.
For more information on writing CDs
Click Start > Help and Support. Type “CD copy” in the search field, and click
the Search icon (
).
To Burn an Audio CD
Run Windows Media Player and right-click over the Function Taskbar and
select Help > Windows Media Player Help.
Select Using the Player > Using CDs, DVDs and VCDs > Using CDs >
Burning your own CDs > To burn your own CD to see detailed information.
26 Users Manual
Enjoying Home Theater (S/PDIF Port)
Your computer supports 5.1 channel output, which is a basic function for home theater
systems, and DVD drives. It provides 3D surrounding sound and vivid screen.
What is a home theater system?
Home theater system usually consists of a TV, DVD, 5.1 channel speaker, and
digital amp and provides a high-resolution screen (MPEG2) and 3D
surrounding sound (Dolby 5.1 or DTS). With a home theater system, you can
enjoy a vivid screen and sound in your home as if you are in a movie theater.
The following devices are required to enjoy a home theater system.
5.1 channel speaker system (amplifier, speakers, connection cables)
Purchased separately
DVD drive and DVD playing program on the computer
Optional
DVD title that supports 5.1 channel
Purchased separately
To use home theater system, complete the following procedures:
• Step 1. Connect 5.1 channel speaker system to your computer.
• Step 2. Configure digital sound output on the computer.
• Step 3. Enable S/PDIF output on the DVD program.
Using the Computer 27
Step 1. Connect 5.1 channel speaker system to your computer
1. Connect the S/PDIF jack of the system and a 5.1 channel amplifier.
2. Connect speakers to the amplifier. (Refer to speaker’s manual.)
3. To view through a TV, connect the TV and change the current display device to
TV in the Display Properties. ( "Using External Display Devices" on page 101)
TV
Digital Amplifier
Sub
Woofer
Front Right Speaker
Front Left Speaker
Computer
Center
Speaker
Surround Left Speaker
Surround Right Speaker
Step 2. Setting the Sound to Digital Sound Output on the Computer
Since the sound of the computer is set to Digital Output by default when purchasing
the computer, additional settings are not required. You can confirm the setting as
follows.
1. Double-click the Volume Control ( ) icon in the notification area of the Taskbar
and select Options > Advanced Controls.
2. Click the Advanced button below the Master Volume and check if the 1 Disable
Digital Output item is unselected.
The option must be unselected for sound to be output in digital format.
28 Users Manual
Step 3. Enable S/PDIF output on the DVD program
To use 5.1 channel speakers, you need to install the CyberLink Power DVD program
from the CyberLink DVD Solution Installation CD (or System software Media)
provided with your computer, then change the settings as per the following.
The CyberLink PowerDVD program is optional and may not be provided depending
on the model.
1. Run CyberLink Power DVD program and click the Configuration icon (
).
2. On the Audio tab, set the Audio Output setting to “Use SPDIF” and click OK.
Now, you can enjoy home theater using DVD titles.
To control volume for your 5.1 channel speaker, use the control on the digital
amp. (Please refer to the speaker manual.)
Using the Computer 29
Using the Multi Card Slot (Optional)
Using the Multi Card Slot, you can use memory cards such as a Memory Stick,
Memory Stick Pro, SD Card, MMC, or xD Card. A memory card is used as a
removable disk and is useful for exchanging data between a computer and a digital
device such as a digital camera.
Memory Stick
Memory Stick Pro
SD Card
MMC
xD Card
A multi-card slot is optional and is not provided for some models.
Restrictions when Using Memory Cards
You can use memory cards for storing data only. Copyright protection function
is not supported.
To insert and use a memory card
Remove the Slot Protector first, before using the Multi Card Slot. Press the end
of the Slot Protector lightly, and remove the Slot Protector when it pops up.
You should insert the memory card with the writing on the card facing
downwards.
Inserting wrong side up may cause damage in the memory card and the
computer.
30 Users Manual
1. Insert a memory card into the Multi Card Slot.
2. Click Start > My Computer. The inserted memory card is displayed.
Example : Memory Stick
3. You can write data to the memory card. If the memory card is not formatted yet,
format the memory card before use.
Since the memory card may be easily mislaid when moving your computer,
keep the memory card separately.
To remove a memory card
1. Press the end of the memory card softly to pop it outward.
2. If the card pops out with a clicking sound, remove the card from the system.
Using the Computer 31
To format a memory card
You can use a memory card after the format operation. The procedures to format a
memory card are described below.
Since format operation deletes all data in the memory card, please make sure
that there is no important data in the memory card before formatting.
To protect the data in the memory card
Set the write protection tab of the Memory Stick or SD memory card to the
Lock position.
1. Click Start > My computer.
2. Press the right touchpad button on the memory card drive, and select Format from
the pop-up menu.
3. Click Start to start the format operation.
To use a memory card in both the computer and other digital device such as
digital camera, it is recommended to format the memory card in the digital
device. If you format the memory card in the computer, you may have to format
the memory card in other digital device again to use the memory card in the
digital device.
32 Users Manual
Using the PC Card Slot
You can use various hardware supporting PCMCIA and PCI Express interfaces via the
PC card slot. This computer provides 2 card slots and supports 16/32 bit, type I or II
PCMCIA cards and ExpressCard types.
You can insert a ExpressCard in the upper slot and a PCMCIA card in the lower slot.
The PC card slot does not support a ZV card or a PCMCIA III card.
To insert a PC card
Before using the PC card slot, remove the slot protector.
Push the eject button of the PC card slot once to pop it out. Push the button
again to eject the slot protector.
1. Insert a PC card into the PC card slot on the side of the computer.
Ensure that the PC card is inserted the correct way, as incorrect insertion will
damage the PC card slot.
Insert an ExpressCard here
Insert a PCMCIA card here
Eject Button
Example) PCMCIA Card
2. Windows automatically installs the necessary driver for the card. If there is no
available driver found by Windows, you have to install the driver using a disk
supplied with the card.
Using the Computer 33
To remove a PC card
1. Double-click Safely Remove Hardware icon (
) on the taskbar.
2. On the [Safely Remove Hardware] dialog box, select the appropriate PC card and
click Stop.
3. When [Stop a Hardware Device] dialog box appears, click OK.
4. Click Close to close the [Safely Remove Hardware] dialog box.
5. Push eject button of the PC card slot once, and the button pops out.
6. Push the button again to eject the PC card.
What is an ExpressCard?
An ExpressCard is a next generation PCMCIA card specification and supports
various cards such as LAN cards, TV cards, sound cards, etc. This computer's
slots support the ExpressCard/34 and ExpressCard/54.
34 Users Manual
Using EasyBox
Use EasyBox program to make use of Windows' complicated function easily and
conveniently.
Learn about EasyBox
Double-click the EasyBox( ) icon on the desktop.
(Or select Start > All Programs > Samsung > EasyBox > EasyBox.)
• System: System management features are available, including disk
defragmenter, disk cleanup, computer scheduling and system restore.
• BIOS: In windows-based mode, you can recover the BIOS defaults and change
the boot sequence.
• Desktop: Desktop management features include changing the font size,
executing a magnifier function, the start menu settings and managing the quick
launch icons on the taskbar.
• Security: Here you can configure the security settings supported by Windows
XP SP2. You can also change the configuration of the firewall settings,
Windows automatic updates and blocking pop-ups when connected to the
Internet.
• Plus Tip: This is a collection of additional Windows functions that are useful
for system management. (Offering shortcut descriptions of Windows,
configuring network sharing and opening local folder sharing, etc.)
Using the Computer 35
Using EasyBox
The Security management function will be used as an example here to show the
function of Easybox
Configuring Firewall
The Windows Firewall prevents unauthorized users from gaining access to your
system via the network or the Internet.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Samsung > EasyBox > EasyBox.
2. Click Security from the top menu bar.
3. Select Windows Firewall Settings from the Security menu on the left.
4. Select a firewall level.
5. Click Apply.
Click the User Setting button for advanced features, including exceptions and
permissions.
36 Users Manual
Using Samsung Update Plus
Samsung Update Plus is software that examines and updates Samsung software and
drivers installed on your Samsung computer to the latest version. To use Samsung
Update Plus, your computer has to be connected to the Internet.
To Update Samsung Software and Drivers
1. Select Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Update Plus > Samsung
Update Plus.
If this is the first time you are running the program, a window will appear asking
you if you agree to the agreement in the window.
Click Agree to use this software.
2. Click Search for and Install Updates and click the Search for New Updates
button.
3. If there are available software or driver updates for your computer, the available
updates will be listed. Select the required updates from the list and click Install
Update to start the update.
(The update list on the screen may differ depending on the computer model.)
Using the Computer 37
Updates that must be installed separately.
If you select Install as an update item that must be installed separately, a
message appears informing you of this. Follow the instruction message to
correctly install it.
Automatic update items display
By default, your computer is configured to automatically search for updates. If
there is a new update available, this is notified in the notification area. Click the
balloon help icon in the notification area. Here you will be able to find the latest
available updates.
To change the automatic update settings, click the Configuration button in
Figure 2 and change the settings.
Samsung Update Plus does not provide updates for additionally installed
software and device drivers.
38 Users Manual
Using AVStation premium
AVStation premium is an integrated multimedia program that enables users to enjoy
music, photographs, video, movies, etc. all with a single program.
Before You Start!
•
•
•
•
AVStation premium is optional and may not be provided depending on the
model.
The screens used in this manual may differ from actual screens according
to the program version.
TV Station is only available for systems supporting the TV function.
For detailed usage, refer to the program help.
Start and Screen Layout
To launch the program, select Start > All Programs > Samsung > AVStation
premium > AVStation premium.
Alternatively double-click the AVStation premium icon (
) on the Desktop.
v
x
z
c
z Station Bar
x Menu Bar
c Library
v Exit
Press the Exit button to exit
the program.
MUSIC
You can play a music file or an audio CD.
PHOTO
You can view or edit a photograph (image), and also view the photographs through a
SlideShow.
Using the Computer 39
MOVIE
You can play a video (movie) file or a DVD/VCD title.
MUSIC Station
Launch AVStation premium and click MUSIC on the Station Bar.
z
x
c
b
z MUSIC Menu Bar
x Station Bar
c MUSIC Library
v Register a File
b Playlist
n Playlist Control Buttons
m Play Control Buttons
, Volume Control
. Play Options
/ EDS Setting Button
n
v
m
,
.
/
What is EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound)?
EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound) is a sound quality enhancement technology
developed by Samsung Electronics. You can listen to clearer sound if you
enable the EDS function when playing music or video on AVStation premium.
Playing an Audio CD
The procedures to play an audio CD are described below.
1. Launch AVStation premium and insert an audio CD into the CD drive.
40 Users Manual
2. In the Audio CD window, select Play Audio CD using Samsung AVStation and
click the OK button.
3. The tracks on the audio CD are displayed in the Playlist and the first track is
automatically played.
If an audio CD is already in the CD drive, double-click the album title in the
Audio CD folder of the Library and add the tracks to the Playlist. The tracks
added to the Playlist are played.
Playing a Music File
If a music file is registered to the MUSIC Library, you can easily play the music file.
For the procedures to register tracks to the Library, refer to (p42).
Using the Computer 41
1. Move to MUSIC Station and double-click on All Music.
2. Double-click a music file. The file is added to the playlist and played.
Play a Track not registered to the Library
Click File > Open, select a music file to be played and click Open. The selected
track is registered to the Library and played.
Creating My Playlist
My Playlist is a personal album with which you can collect, manage and play
your favorite music files. For the procedures to create My Playlist, refer to the
descriptions of MUSIC Station in Help.
Adding Music Files to the Library
MUSIC Library is a library holding music files used by MUSIC Station. The
procedures to add music files saved on the computer to the Library are described
below.
You can add files, folders or search and add files. As an example, the procedures to add
a folder are described below.
42 Users Manual
1. Click on the Register a File (
Folders.
) button below the Library and click on Add by
2. Select a folder which included music files and click the OK button. The music files
in the folder are added to the Library.
The tracks used in AVStation are automatically added to the Library.
Using the Computer 43
PHOTO Station
Launch AVStation premium and click PHOTO on the Station Bar.
z
x
c
,
b n
m
z PHOTO Menu Bar
x Station Bar
c PHOTO Library
v Register a File
b Image Viewer Tab
n Image Editor Tab
m Move to a Higher-Level Folder
, Preview/Zoom-in
v
Viewing an Image
The procedures to view images registered to the PHOTO Library one by one and
through a SlideShow are described below.
For the procedures to register image files to the Library, refer to (p46).
1. Move to PHOTO Station and double-click on All Images.
2. Click on a folder which includes images, and the images in the folder are displayed
in the Image Viewer window.
Image Viewer Window
Image
44 Users Manual
3. Double-click on an image. The selected image is zoomed in on.
• Viewing an Image not registered to the Library
Click File > Open, select an image file to view and click Open.
The selected image file is registered to the Library and displayed in the Image
Viewer window.
• Viewing an Image in Full Screen or through a SlideShow.
Click the Full Screen (
Image Viewer window.
) button or SlideShow (
) button below the
To return to the Image Viewer window, press the <Esc> key or double-click on
the screen.
• Watching a SlideShow while Listening to Music
To watch a SlideShow while listening to music, play music from MUSIC Station
and run SlideShow.
• Setting an Image as the Background.
Click the Set as Background button below the Image Viewer window. The
selected image is set as the Desktop background.
Editing an Image
You can change the shape of an image, edit an image or apply special effects to an
image. The image editor functions are described below.
Using the Computer 45
1. Select an image to edit in the Image Viewer window, and select the Image Editor
tab. The Image Editor screen appears.
The Image Editor screen consists of an Image Workspace window and 3 Tool
tabs.
Image Workspace
Zoom In / Zoom Out
Tool Tabs
2. Edit the image using the Shape, Edit and Effect tools.
Shape tool: Change the shape of an image through cut, resize.
Edit tool: Draw a line, add some clip art or enter letters.
Effect tool: Apply various effects to an image.
3. When finishing editing an image, click the Save Edited Image (
below the Image Editor window. The edited image is saved.
) button
Adding Images to the Library
The PHOTO Library is a library holding image files to be used by PHOTO Station. The
procedures to add image files saved on the computer to the Library are described
below.
You can add files, add folders or search and add files. As an example, the procedures
to add folders are described below.
46 Users Manual
1. Click the Register a File (
Folders.
) button below the Library and click on Add by
2. Select a folder which includes image files and click the OK button. The image files
in the folder are added to the Library.
The image files used in AVStation are automatically added to the Library.
MOVIE Station
Launch AVStation premium and click on MOVIE on the Station Bar.
z
x
c
v
b
n
z MOVIE Menu Bar
x Station Bar
c MOVIE Library
v Register a File
b Video Play window
n Play Control Buttons
m Volume Control
, EDS Setting Button (p40)
. EDI Setting Button
/ Capture Button
m
,.
/
What is EDI (Enhanced Digital Image)?
EDI (Enhanced Digital Image) is a visual quality enhancement technology
developed by Samsung Electronics. You can view a clearer and sharper
picture by enabling the EDI function when watching TV or playing a video on
AVStation premium.
However, some TV tuners and graphics cards are not supported by EDI.
For information on EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound), refer to p40.
Using the Computer 47
Playing a DVD
The procedures to play a DVD title are described below.
To play a DVD title, DVD playing software (e.g. CyberLink PowerDVD) must
be installed. Install the DVD playing software first.
1. Launch AVStation premium and insert a DVD title into the DVD drive.
2. In the 'What do you want Windows to do?' window, select Play DVD Video
using Samsung AVStation and click the OK button.
3. The DVD title is played.
48 Users Manual
If a DVD title is already in the DVD drive, double-click the DVD title in the DVD
/ VCD folder of the Library. The DVD title is played.
Playing a Movie(Video) File
The procedures to play a video file registered to the MOVIE Library are described
below. For the procedures to register files to the Library, refer to p50.
1. Move to MOVIE Station and double-click All Movies.
2. Double-click a video file. The file is played.
• Playing a Video File not Registered to the Library
Click File > Open, select a video file to be played and click Open. The selected
file is registered to the Library and played.
• Playing a Video File in Full Screen
1) Double-click on the current playback screen.
2) The video is played in full screen. In full screen, move the mouse pointer to
the bottom of the screen to show the Play Control bar.
To play at the default screen size, press the <Esc> key or double-click on the
screen.
• Capturing the Video Screen
Using the Computer 49
Click on Capture Current Screen (
) below the Play window when the
desired image appears on the screen and click the OK button.
Captured images are saved in the C:\Program Files\Samsung\AVStation
Premium 3.7\Data\Captured Images folder.
In addition, you can view captured images in the PHOTO Station > Captured
Images folder.
Adding Videos to the Library
The MOVIE Library is a library holding video files to be used by MOVIE Station. The
procedures to add video files saved on the computer to the Library are described below.
You can add files, add folders or search and add files. As an example, the procedures
to add folders are described below.
1. Click the Register a File (
Folders.
) button below the Library and click Add by
2. Select a folder which includes video files and click the OK button. The video files
in the folder are added to the Library.
The video files used in AVStation are automatically added to the Library.
50 Users Manual
Using AVStation now / AVStation premium Viewer
Using these programs, you can play music, photographs, video and movies in full
screen. You can enjoy multimedia using AVStation now when the computer is off and
using AVStation premium Viewer when the computer is on.
Before You Start!
•
•
AVStation now and AVStation premium Viewer are optional and may not
be provided depending on the model.
AVStation now Restrictions
You can only use AVStation now when the computer is turned off.
Using AVStation now, you can play files registered to the AVStation premium
Library, saved to My Computer, and saved on the multi-card slot (optional).
(For the procedures to register files to the Library, refer to p42, p46 and p50.)
If you define a login password for a Windows user account or if the folder is
protected, you cannot play the files in the folder on AVStation now.
•
AVStation premium Viewer Restrictions
Using AVStation premium Viewer, you can only play files registered to the
AVStation premium Library. (For the procedures to register files to the Library,
refer to p42, p46 and p50.)
•
•
•
Since the screen layout and usage of the two programs are similar, the
manual describes the functions and screens on the basis of AVStation
now.
The screen figures may differ from actual ones depending on the program
version.
TV Station is only available for systems supporting the TV function.
Start / Exit AVStation now
Starting
Press the AVS button (
) of the computer when the computer is turned off.
Using the Computer 51
Exiting
Move the mouse pointer to the top screen and click the Exit (
) button.
Alternatively press the Power button of the computer.
Start / Exit AVStation premium Viewer
Starting
Select Start > All Programs > Samsung > AVStation premium > AVStation
premium Viewer from Windows.
Alternatively press the AVS button (
52 Users Manual
) of the computer from Windows.
Exiting
Move the mouse pointer to the top of the screen and click the Exit (
) button.
Screen Layout
MUSIC
You can play a music file or audio CD.
Using the Computer 53
PHOTO
You can view a photograph or image file one by one or in a SlideShow.
MOVIE
You can play a video, DVD or VCD title.
Settings
You can set the Music, Photo and Movie settings.
To move to the start screen while using the program, press the AVS (
button or <ESC> key.
)
Alternatively, move the mouse pointer to the top left in the current screen and
click the AVStation icon (
).
MUSIC Station
The procedures to play a music file or an audio CD are described below.
Playing a Music File
The procedures to play a music file registered to the MUSIC Library are described
below. (For the procedures to register files, refer to p42.)
1. Launch AVStation now and click on Music.
2. Click on All Music and double-click a file in the right pane.
54 Users Manual
The music file is played.
z My Computer
z
x
v
c
This only appears in
AVStation now. You can
manually find and play
files on My Computer or
the multi card slot.
x All Music
c Playlist Window
v Music File
Playing an Audio CD
1. Launch AVStation now and insert an audio CD into the CD drive.
2. In the AVStation now start screen, click on Music.
3. Double-click the Audio CD in the left pane and double-click on an album or music
file in the right pane. The selected music file is played.
Using the Computer 55
PHOTO Station
The procedures to view images registered to the PHOTO Library one by one and
through a SlideShow are described below.
(For the procedures to register image files to the Library, refer to p46.)
1. Launch AVStation now and click on Photo.
2. Click on All Images and double-click on an image file in the right pane.
z My Computer
z
x
3. The selected image is zoomed in on.
56 Users Manual
c
This only appears in
AVStation now. You can
manually find and play
files on My Computer or
the multi card slot.
x All Images
c Image File
To view an image in Full Sreen or through a SlideShow.
Click on the SlideShow or Full Screen button below the zoomed in image.
To return to the previous status in SlideShow or Full Screen, press the <Esc>
key or double-click on the screen.
In AVStation now, press the <Esc> key or double-click and click Back.
MOVIE Station
The procedures to play a video (movie) file or DVD/VCD title are described below.
Playing a Movie File
The procedures to play a video file registered to the MOVIE Library are described
below. (Refer to p50.)
1. Launch AVStation now and click the Movie.
2. Click on All Movies and double-click a movie file in the right pane.
The movie file is played.
z My Computer
z
x
c
This only appears in
AVStation now. You can
manually find and play
files on My Computer or
the multi card slot.
x All movies
c movie File
Using the Computer 57
Showing the Play Control window
Press the space bar or move the mouse pointer. The Play Control window
appears at the bottom.
Playing a DVD
1. Launch AVStation now and insert a DVD title into the DVD drive.
2. In the AVStation now start screen, click on Movie.
3. Click on DVD/VCD and double-click on the DVD title. The DVD title is played.
58 Users Manual
Connecting to the Internet
Connecting with a Modem (Optional)
Before You Start:
• Use a standard non-digital phone line to connect.
• Contact an internet service provider (ISP) for instructions on how to connect to
and disconnect from the Internet.
1. Connect a telephone line to the computer’s modem port.
2. Connect to the Internet according to the instructions provided by your ISP.
If the Internet connection is not disconnected properly, additional telephone
charges may be imposed.
Connecting to the Internet 59
Connecting Through a Wired LAN
1. Connect a LAN cable to the computer’s LAN port.
2. Click Start > Control Panel.
3. Click Network and Internet Connections in the [Control Panel] window.
4. Click Network Connections in the [Network and Internet Connections] window.
5. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and click Properties.
60 Users Manual
6. On the General tab, select “Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)” and click Properties.
7. To use DHCP:
On the General tab, select “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS
server address automatically”. Click OK.
To use a static IP:
On the General tab, select “Use the following IP address” and fill in the IP
address, Subnet mask, Default gateway, Preferred DNS server, and Alternative
DNS server fields. Click OK.
To use both DHCP and static IP simultaneously:
On the Alternate Configuration tab, click User configured and fill in the fields.
Click OK.
Connecting to the Internet 61
Connecting Through a Wireless LAN (Optional)
A wireless network (Wireless LAN) environment is a network environment that
enables communication between multiple computers at home or a small-size office
through wireless LAN devices.
Using the wireless network connections between the systems, you can use normal
network functions such as sharing of files, folders and printers. When a computer-to
computer network has been established, a computer that is not connected to the Internet
can share the Internet by accessing another computer connected to the Internet. For
details, see “Sharing Internet Access” on page 76.
The description in this section refers to the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG
Network Connection (hereafter referred to as an 802.11ABG card) device.
A wireless LAN card is optional. The model of the wireless LAN card is
determined by the relevant product.
To view the installed wireless LAN card, click Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System > Hardware tab > Device Manager.
The wireless LAN connection settings will be described on the basis of the
Windows XP Service Pack 2 installed computer.
It is recommended using the default settings provided by Windows XP for the
wireless LAN settings for Windows XP installed computers.
To setup using the software supplied by the wireless LAN card manufacturer,
refer to "Wireless Network Setup Using the Wireless LAN Setup Program"
(p70).
To use a wireless network, you have to turn the wireless LAN function on by
using the Wireless LAN latch.
Wireless network connections can be classified into two categories.
1) Access Point (AP)
You can connect to an AP to use the network. This is possible only in an environment
equipped with an AP. For details, see “Connecting to an Access Point (AP)” on page
63.
62 Users Manual
What is an Access Point (AP)?
An AP is a network device that bridges wired and wireless LANs, and
corresponds to a wireless hub in a wired network. You can connect multiple
wireless LAN installed computers to an AP.
2) Computer-to-computer (ad hoc)
This is also called a peer-to-peer network.
In computer-to-computer wireless networks, you can wirelessly connect 2 or more
computers that have wireless LAN modules. For details, see “Connecting to computerto-computer networks (peer-to-peer or ad hoc)” on page 65.
Connecting to an Access Point (AP)
This section describes how to connect to an AP. You can use the network when you are
connected to an AP.
For more detailed information such as the network key (encryption key), ask
your network administrator.
1. Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection (
select View Available Wireless Networks.
) icon on the taskbar, and
Connecting to the Internet 63
2. Select an AP (E.g. Test) to connect to and click Connect.
If there is a configured network key for the AP to connect to, the Enter Network
Key window appears.
Enter the Network Key in the window and then click the Connect button.
When a network key is not defined for a selected AP, click on Link to display
the warning message box. Then click Connect again in the box.
Now when Connected in AP is displayed, and you can access the network.
Checking the connection status
Move the mouse pointer over the Wireless Network Connection (
the taskbar, and the connection status is displayed.
64 Users Manual
) icon on
Connecting to computer-to-computer networks (peer-to-peer or
ad hoc)
In computer-to-computer wireless networks, you can wirelessly connect 2 or more
computers that have wireless LAN modules. Using this method, a computer that is not
connected to the Internet can share the Internet by accessing another computer
connected to the Internet. (Refer to "Sharing Internet Access" on page 76.)
You can connect by completing the following steps:
• Step 1. Set up a computer-to-computer network on a computer.
• Step 2. Connect to the configured computer from other computers.
Step 1. Setting up a computer-to-computer network
1. Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection (
select View Available Wireless Networks.
) icon on the taskbar, and
Connecting to the Internet 65
2.
Click Change the order of Preferred Networks.
3. On the Wireless Network tab, click Advanced.
4. Clear 'Automatically connect to non-default network' check box, if it is selected.
Select 'Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only', and click Close.
5. In the Wireless Networks tab, click Add.
66 Users Manual
6. Enter the network name (e.g. samsung), and unselect 'The key is provided for me
automatically'. Enter the encryption key in the Network key field, and click OK.
To prevent a network connection from an unauthorized user, it would be better
to configure a network key (encryption key). A network key consists of 5 ~ 13
alphanumeric characters (e.g. magic), or of 10 ~ 26 hexadecimal numbers (a
hexadecimal number is represented by numbers '0' to '9' or letters 'a' to 'f').
Connecting to the Internet 67
7. Check that the configured network name (e.g. samsung) is in the ’Preferred
networks’ item, and click OK.
Now your wireless network setup has been completed.
Step 2. Connecting to the configured computer
1. Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection (
select View Available Wireless Networks.
68 Users Manual
) icon on the taskbar, and
2. Select the wireless network name (e.g. samsung) specified in ”Connecting to
computer-to-computer networks (peer-to-peer or ad hoc)” on page 65, and click
Connect.
3. Enter a cryptographic key in the network key box and click Connect.
If the network key is not configured in ”Connecting to computer-to-computer
networks (peer-to-peer or ad hoc)” on page 65, just click Connect, without any
keystrokes.
When connected to the wireless network, the system displays Connected in the
selected network of the Network Connection window.
Connecting to the Internet 69
Checking the connection status
Move the mouse pointer over the Wireless Network Connection (
the taskbar, and the connection status is displayed.
) icon on
Wireless Network Setup Using the Wireless LAN Setup
Program
The procedures to connect to an access point using a wireless LAN configuration
program are described. Since the wireless LAN configuration program is included in
the system software media, the user has to install the program.
1. Insert the system software media into the CD drive and install the wireless LAN
configuration program (PROSet).
Select System Software Media > User Installation > Wireless LAN Driver
ReadMe, click ReadMe and install according to the instructions.
2. Double-click on the wireless LAN program (
) icon on the taskbar.
Alternatively, click Start > All Programs > Intel PROSet Wireless > Intel
PROSet Wireless.
3. In Available Networks, click on Refresh.
4. Select the name of an access point to connect to from the available network list and
click on Connect.
If a network does not appear, click on Refresh.
5. Enter a WEP key and click the OK button.
The Wireless Security Settings window may differ depending on the security
settings of the AP.
Click the Advanced button to set up network authentication, data encryption,
etc. For more security setting information, ask your wireless network
administrator.
70 Users Manual
Refer to setting up the advanced settings by clicking on the Advanced button.
Network authentication: The network authentication options include an Open
System and Shared Key. When selecting Open Systems, no authentication is
applied (however, encryption is supported). When selecting Shared Key, a WEP
key is used for authentication. The default setting is Open System.
Data encryption (WEP): The IEEE 802.11 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
standard defines two levels of encryption, a 64-bit key (this is sometimes
represented by 40bits) and a 128-bit key.
Key index: Select the current encryption key index used by the access point out of
1 to 4.
Using an encryption key: Click Use pass phrase to activate, and enter 5 (for 64bit) or 13 (for 128-bit) alphanumeric characters (represented by 0-9, a-z, or A-Z).
6. The Done window appears, click OK.
When a wireless connection to an access point is established, the connection icon
(
) appears in front of the name of the connected profile.
Connecting to the Internet 71
Using Samsung Network Manager
Samsung Network Manager is a program that has been developed to enable users to use
the network easily.
Samsung Network Manager provides the following features.
• You can easily set up the network and printer settings.
• You can immediately use the network without defining new network
settings again after moving locations.
By setting the network settings (IP address, printer settings, etc.) for each
location, you can immediately access the network without following network
setting procedures each time regardless of your location.
• You can easily share Internet Access.
You can share your Internet connection by setting up a computer with 2 LAN
interfaces (wired and wireless, or 2 wired LAN) as the sharing server. Then,
you can access the Internet on a sharing client by connecting to the sharing
server.
• You can diagnose the network status.
You can diagnose the network status when the network is not properly
connected.
Using the Network
This section describes the procedures to connect to the Internet by setting up a network.
The setting up procedures include the procedures to add a printer to the network.
The setting up procedures are different for wired and wireless LAN
connections.
To use a wireless LAN, there should be a wireless LAN AP available nearby.
Setting Up a Network
1. To use a wired LAN, connect the LAN cable to the LAN port.
To use a wireless LAN, slide the Wireless LAN Latch into the ON position, if the
wireless LAN is turned off.
When the wireless LAN is turned on, the Wireless LAN Operation LED (
lights up.
72 Users Manual
)
2. Run Samsung Network Manager.
Select Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Network Manager >
Samsung Network Manager or double click the Samsung Network
Manager( ) icon on the Desktop.
3. Click the Add button.
4. Select a network location icon and enter the name of the location (e.g. Home).
Click the Next button.
5. Select Internet direct connection and click the Next button.
6. Select the LAN device, setup the IP address and click the Next button.
Select Device
Setup IP Address
Select Device
Select a device to be connected to the Internet. Select either Wired LAN or
Wireless LAN.
Connecting to the Internet 73
Setting up the IP Address
To allocate an IP address automatically (DHCP), select Get IP Automatically.
To use a static IP address, unselect Get IP Automatically and enter an IP
address. For IP address information, ask your network administrator.
7. When the Printer Setting window appears, click Finish.
To add a printer, click Add Printer. The Add Printer Wizard appears. Set up the
printer according to the instructions displayed on the screen.
When the printer has been added, click the Show printer button, select the newly
added printer and then click the Finish button.
To not add a printer, select No Default Printer and then click the Finish
button.
When the network setting is complete, the ’Do you want to move to newly
added location now?’ message appears. If you select ’Yes’, the network
settings for the added location are applied.
When the network settings for the added location are applied, the added place
and the corresponding network connection information is displayed in The
detailed Information for window.
When the network setting is complete, an icon for the added location is created within
the Saved Locations window. Now you can use the Internet or add a new network
location.
Menu
Current Place
Information
Saved Locations
74 Users Manual
Wireless LAN AP Connection Procedures
To use a wireless LAN, first connect to a wireless LAN AP and then you can
access the network even when moving location. Or moving location and then
you can access the network even when connecting to a wireless LAN AP
1. Right-click over the Wireless Network Connection (
Taskbar and click View Available Wireless Networks.
) icon on the
2. Click Search AP from the Wireless menu to search for wireless LAN APs.
Select an available wireless network (e.g. SAMSUNG) and click the Connect
button. For information on available wireless LAN APs, ask your network
administrator.
Available AP
Connect
3. The network key (security key) input window appears.
- If a network key has been set for the wireless LAN AP, enter the network key
and click the Connect button. For the network key information, ask your
network administrator.
- If no network key has been set for the wireless LAN AP, click the Connect
button without entering the network key.
4. When the computer is connected to the wireless LAN AP, the Connected
message will appear on the Wireless Network icon in the Taskbar.
Using the network after moving location
By setting the network settings (IP address, printer setting, etc.) for each location, you
can immediately access the network without performing the network setting
procedures regardless of your location.
1. Run Samsung Network Manager when connected to the Internet.
Connecting to the Internet 75
2. Select an icon that represents the corresponding location from the Saved Locations
window and then click Move.
3. When the network settings of the selected location are applied, the new location
and the network connection information are displayed in The detailed
Information for window.
Sharing Internet Access
This section describes the procedures to share Internet Access.
To share Internet Access, you first have to set a sharing server and a sharing client.
When the setup is complete, you can access the Internet from the sharing client by
connecting to the sharing server.
Sharing Server : A computer with a direct connection to the internet and a
local network connection.
Sharing Client : A computer that uses the Internet by connecting to a sharing
server without itself having a direct connection to the Internet.
You can connect a sharing server and a sharing client as follows.(See Figure
5 on page (p73))
Sharing Server
Sharing Client
External Internet Device
Client Device
Connection 1
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Connection 2
Wireless LAN
Wired LAN
device that is the same as the
Connection 3
Wired LAN
Wired LAN
client device of the sharing server.
Connect a sharing client with the
For Connection 3, you have to connect a LAN card in advance.
To connect a sharing server and a sharing client using a wired LAN, connect
the computers with a crossover LAN cable or network hub first.
To use a wireless LAN, slide the Wireless LAN Latch into the ON position, if
the wireless LAN is turned off.
When the wireless LAN is turned on, the Wireless LAN Operation LED (
lights up.
)
As an example, Internet sharing procedures for [Connection 1], which connect the
sharing server and the Internet through a wired LAN and connect the sharing server and
the sharing client through a wireless LAN, are described below.
76 Users Manual
Setting Up a Sharing Server
1. Run Samsung Network Manager on the computer to be used as the sharing
server.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Select a network location icon and enter the name of the location (e.g. Home).
Click the Next button.
4. Select Internet direct Connection for sharing and click the Next button.
5. Set up the network device to be connected to the external Internet. Determine
whether to use a firewall and select a network device to be connected to the
external Internet (e.g. Wired LAN). Set the IP address and then click the Next
button.
Determine whether
to use a firewall
Select a device
Set an IP address
- To protect against external intrusion attempts, using a firewall is
recommended.
- For more information on selecting a device and setting the IP address, refer
to the description of item 6 of "Setting Up a Network" on page 72.
6. Select a network device to connect to the sharing client (e.g. wireless LAN) and
click the Next button.
Connecting to the Internet 77
To Share Internet Access through a Wireless LAN
- In the Select Device field, select Wireless.
- In the Wireless Connection Name (e.g. Samsung) field, enter the network
name.
- To use the network key (security key), select the "Use Password ,,," option
and enter a network key. Remember the network key because you have to reenter the key on the sharing client to connect to the sharing server.
7. The setup information is displayed. Confirm the settings and click the Next button.
8. When the Printer Setting window appears, click Finish.
For the printer setup procedures, refer to the description of item 7 of "Setting Up
a Network" on page 72.
When the Shared Server setting is completed, set up the shared client.
Setting Up the Sharing Client
1. Run Samsung Network Manager on the computer to be used as a sharing client.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Select a network location icon and enter the name of the location. Click the Next
button.
4. Select Internet Sharing and click the Next button.
- To connect through a wireless LAN, select Internet Sharing - Wireless.
- To connect through a wired LAN, select Internet Sharing - Wired.
5. Confirm the network device to be connected to the server and click the Next
button.
- To connect through a wireless LAN, enter the wireless connection name
(e.g. Samsung) you entered in the sharing server. If you have set a network
key (security key) for the sharing server, enter the network key.
6. The setup information appears. Confirm the information and click the Next button.
7. When the Printer Setting window appears, click Finish.
For the printer setup procedures, refer to the description of item 7 of "Setting Up
a Network" on page 72.
When the settings are completed, you can use the Internet on the shared client.
78 Users Manual
- To access the Internet from the sharing client, the sharing server has to be
on.
- To use the Internet on the sharing client, select a sharing client icon from the
Location List window and then click the Move button.
- If the connection is broken while using the Internet on the sharing client, click
the Ap Active from the Wireless menu to reestablish the connection.
Network Status Diagnosis
You can diagnose the network status when the network is not properly connected.
1. Run Samsung Network Manager.
2. Select Auto Diagnosis from the Manage menu.
3. The Network Connections figure window appears. Click the Start button to start
the network diagnosis.
4. When the diagnosis is complete, out of order devices are marked by the
exclamation mark icon. For detailed device status, read the description in the lower
part of the window.
Reconnect and set up the device according to the diagnosis result.
Connecting to the Internet 79
Using Network Services
While the computer is connected to the network, you can use network services to share
files, folders, and printers.
Network services are provided for the computers that are connected to the
network through wired or wireless network connections. For details, see
“Connecting Through a Wired LAN” on page 60 and see “Connecting Through
a Wireless LAN (Optional)” on page 62.
Sharing files or folders
This section describes how to share files and folders between computers connected to
the network.
To share files, complete the following procedures:
• Step 1. Configuring the sharing of files and folders on a computer.
• Step 2. Accessing shared files and folders from another computer.
When a file or folder is shared, anyone connected to the network can open and
delete the shared file or folder.
Configure a file sharing network only when the network is secure, and do not
share important data.
80 Users Manual
Step 1. Configuring Sharing
1. Right-click the target file or folder to share in My Computer, and select Sharing
and Security.
2. Click 'IF you understand the security risks but want to share files without running
the wizard, click here'.
It has the same security effect as that of the 'Network Setup Wizard'.
This screen does not appear if Internet Sharing Network Wizard has been
installed in the computer-to-computer wireless network environment.
3. Select 'Just enable file sharing', and click OK.
4. In the 'Network sharing and security' field, select 'Share this folder on the network',
enter the share name, and click OK.
Be cautious when selecting 'Allow network users to change my files' since
other network users can change the files in the shared folder.
The file and folder sharing configuration has been completed.
Connecting to the Internet 81
Step 2. Using Shared Files or Folders
This section describes how to access shared files or folders if your computer is a
member of the same workgroup.
1. Double-Click My Network Places of desktop under Other Places.
2. Click 'View workgroup computers', and click the desired computer to access the
shared file.
If your computer is a member of another workgroup:
1. Click Other Places > Microsoft Windows Network.
2. Click the desired workgroup.
3. Click the desired computer to display the shared files or folders.
Sharing Printers
This section describes how to share a printer between computers connected to a
network.
To share a printer, complete the following procedures:
• Step 1. Configure printer sharing in the computer connected to the printer.
• Step 2. Add and use the shared printer in other computers on the network.
82 Users Manual
Step 1. Configuring Printer Sharing
1. From the computer connected to the printer, click Start > Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer you want to share, and click Sharing.
3. Select 'Share this printer', enter a share name for the shared printer, and click OK.
4. In the Printers and Faxes window, you will find the printer icon has been changed
to another icon on a hand.
Step 2. Adding and Using a Shared Printer.
1. From a different computer that wants to use the shared printer, click Start >
Printers and Faxes.
2. Click Add a printer.
3. In the Add Printer Wizard, click Next.
4. Select 'A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer', and click
Next.
5. Select 'Browse for a printer', and click Next.
Connecting to the Internet 83
6. Select the workgroup or computer, select the desired printer, and click Next.
If you cannot find the desired printer, try again after a while.
7. Read the warning about a shared printer, and click Yes to install the shared printer.
8. Select Yes for 'Do you want to use this printer as a default printer?', and click Next.
9. Click Finish.
10. When the printer sharing configuration has been completed, the shared printer
appears in the Printers and Faxes window.
Now you can print using the shared printer even if your computer is not directly
connected to a printer.
84 Users Manual
Using Bluetooth Devices (Optional)
Bluetooth is a wireless communication technology that allows access to devices nearby
such as a computer, mobile phone, printer, keyboard or mouse without a cable
connection. Bluetooth enables file transmissions, Internet access, a private area
network function, and access to a keyboard, mouse and printer between devices
supporting the Bluetooth function without a cable connection.
The Bluetooth function is only available between devices supporting Bluetooth
(computers, mobile phones, PDAs, printers, etc.), and the function may be
restricted depending on the device profile.
The Bluetooth function is optional and may not be supported depending on
your model.
Bluetooth Functions
• File Transmission (
)
You can exchange files between 2 Bluetooth devices. You can exchange files
with other computers, mobile phones, PDAs, etc.
• Network Access (
)
You can connect to another computer with the Bluetooth function as you access
a wireless LAN in Ad-Hoc mode or connect to the Internet through an AP or
Internet Connecting Sharing Server.
• Network Access through a Phone Connection (
)
You can connect to the Internet through a Bluetooth mobile phone.
• Data Sync (Synchronization) (
)
You can synchronize the PIMS data (Outlook E-mail address data) with mobile
phones, PDAs, notebook computers, etc. supporting Bluetooth.
• Electronic Business Card (Vcard) Exchange (
)
You can exchange electronic business cards with mobile phones, PDAs,
notebook computers, etc. supporting Bluetooth.
• Sound Output (
)
You can listen to audio from the computer through another Bluetooth device or
listen to audio of another Bluetooth device through the computer.
Connecting to the Internet 85
• HID Connections (
)
You can connect a keyboard, mouse, joystick, etc. supporting Bluetooth.
For more information about using the Bluetooth function, refer to the online
help of the Bluetooth Device.
Bluetooth Software Setup
Bluetooth software is installed on some models. To use the Bluetooth function, you
have to setup the Bluetooth software first. Set the software up as follows when using
the function for the first time.
1. Right-click the Bluetooth icon( ) on the bottom right Taskbar using the
mouse(or touchpad) and select Start Using Bluetooth from the pop-up menu.
2. Click the Next button to start setting up.
In the setting up steps, enter a device name to be displayed in the Bluetooth
Manager program. Enter a Name in the Computer Name field and select
Laptop for the Computer Type field.
Also, a step appears for selecting the services to be provided by your
Bluetooth device for other Bluetooth devices. At this point, the program
automatically detects available services and displays them as selected. It is
recommended not to change the default selection.
86 Users Manual
If you change the service settings, the driver necessary for the additionally
selected services are installed.
At this point, a warning message may appear informing you that there is no
Microsoft logo. Since it does not affect the operation, continue the installation.
3. If the driver installation is complete, the next step proceeds which searches for
nearby Bluetooth devices. Since you do not have to search while setting up, click
the Skip button and finish the settings.
Connecting to the Internet 87
4. When the settings are complete, the Bluetooth icon menu of the notification area
changes as shown in the figure.
Using Bluetooth
Describes how to exchange files between computers supporting Bluetooth and how to
use other Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth Help
Bluetooth Help provides detailed procedures on using Bluetooth functions.
Click on My Bluetooth Settings on the Desktop and press the F1 key (Help).
Select Start > Help and Support > Networking and the Web > Networking >
Wireless networking > Bluetooth devices (wireless) to view Windows Help.
88 Users Manual
Exchanging Files between Bluetooth computers
The procedures to exchange files and folders between Bluetooth computers are
described below.
1. On the computer that is sending a file (hereafter Computer A), right-click the
Bluetooth icon ( ) in the notification area and select Quick Connection > File
Transmission > Search for Device.
2. In the Select Device window, click on a computer to be connected (hereafter
Computer B).
Connecting to the Internet 89
3. If the Bluetooth PIN code requested notification window appears on the bottom
right taskbar, click on the window, enter the Bluetooth PIN code and click the OK
button.
The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two
Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code (E.g. same
numbers) on both Bluetooth devices to make a connection.
4. After a short while, the Bluetooth PIN Code required dialog box appears on
Computer B, enter the code that you have entered in Step 3 above.
5. If the FTP File Access Privilege Request window appears on Computer B, click on
the window. If the Select Access Permission window appears, click the OK button.
6. The file transmission window appears on computer A. Drag files or folders to send
onto the window, and the files or folders are automatically transmitted.
90 Users Manual
7. If the file transmission is complete, close the File Transmission window.
The received files are saved in the C:\Documents and Settings\[user name]\My
Documents\Bluetooth Exchange folder.
Connecting Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick and Headset devices
The procedures to use Bluetooth HID devices (keyboard, mouse, joystick, etc.) or a
headset, etc. on the computer are described below.
The Bluetooth PIN Code is a password used for the connection between two
Bluetooth devices, the user just enter the same PIN Code on both Bluetooth
devices to make a connection.
1. Turn on the Bluetooth function on the device to connect to (mouse, keyboard,
joystick or headset).
Some devices have a button to turn on the Bluetooth function, so refer to the
corresponding device manual.
2. Double-click on the My Bluetooth Settings icon (
) on the Desktop.
3. If the My Bluetooth Settings window appears, click on View Devices within
Coverage.
If the device to connect to appears, click on the device. (E.g. mouse)
If the device does not appear, click the View Devices within Coverage. If the
device has not appeared yet, since this menu changes to Search Devices
within Coverage, click the Search Devices within Coverage to show the
device.
Connecting to the Internet 91
4. If the Bluetooth PIN Code input window appears, enter a PIN code referring to
the manual of the corresponding device. The PIN code for an HID device is
generally printed in the manual of the corresponding device.
5. If you enter the PIN code, you can immediately use the device.
A Bluetooth keyboard and mouse work only in Windows. They will not work in
MS-DOS mode or in Hibernation mode.
Stopping a Bluetooth device
Right-click the Bluetooth icon (
device.
) on the taskbar and select Stop the Bluetooth
To use a Bluetooth device after stopping it, select Start Bluetooth device as above.
Use Instructions
• Bluetooth devices must be within a 3m distance.
• For a better communications environment, use the devices in an open space
where no wall or obstacle exists.
• For a telephone connection, data synchronization, electronics business card
exchange, fax transmission/reception, sound related functions, and serial port
function, you can connect with only one Bluetooth device.
• Using the network connection or file transmission function, multiple Bluetooth
devices can be connected. However, since connecting with multiple devices
may slow down the data rate or make the connection unstable, connecting with
one device at a time is recommended.
• The Bluetooth function of a Bluetooth PDA, mobile phone, mouse or keyboard
may be turned off. To use them in connection with a Samsung computer
supporting Bluetooth, you must check if the Bluetooth function of the device to
connect to is turned on.
For the procedures on turning on the Bluetooth function of a device, refer to the
manual of the device.
• The services provided by Bluetooth devices may vary depending on their
capability. For the services provided by Bluetooth devices, refer to the manual
of the device.
92 Users Manual
Infrared Communication (Optional)
Using the infrared port, you can exchange data with a computer, printer, camera and
other devices supporting infrared communication.
Precautions
To use an infrared communication, both devices have to support infrared
communication. The devices must be aligned so that the infrared transceivers
are within one meter of each other and there must be no obstacles between
the infrared transceivers.
Establishing an infrared connection
The procedures to establish an infrared connection with another computer are
described below.
1. Turn the computers on and place them so that the infrared transceivers are pointing
at each other.
2. When an infrared connection is established, a sound occurs and the Transmit file
to another computer icon (
) appears on the desktop. Now you can transmit
data through the infrared connection.
Transmitting data through the infrared link
The procedures to transmit files between two computers are described below.
1. Establish an infrared connection.
2. The Transmit file to another computer icon (
Double-click the icon.
) appears on the desktop.
3. Select a file or folder to be sent and click the Send button.
4. On the screen of the other computer, the [Wireless Connection] window appears.
Click the Yes button.
5. When file transmission is complete, click the Close button to close the [Wireless
Connection] window.
Connecting to the Internet 93
Changing Settings
To change the folder to receive files or to transmit image files from a digital
camera to the computer, click on Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other
Hardware > Wireless Connect and change the settings.
When unable to establish an infrared communication:
1. Check your BIOS Setup.
1) Turn the computer on and press the F2 key to enter the BIOS Setup.
2) Select I/O Device Configuration in the Advanced menu and press the Enter
key.
3) Select IRDA Device, and press the F5 or F6 key to set it to Enabled.
4) Save the settings and exit Setup.
2. Check the Windows settings
1) Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System >
Hardware tab > Device Manger.
2) Double-click on the 'SMC IrCC - Fast Infrared Port' item below the 'IrDA
Device' item.
3) In the Properties field in the Advanced tab, select 'Infrared' and select 'HP' in
the Value field.
4) Click the OK button.
94 Users Manual
Customizing Your Computer
Using System Setup
The System Setup (BIOS) program enables you to configure your computer hardware
and set security and power-savings options. The settings you choose are stored in
battery-maintained CMOS memory that saves the information even when the
computer’s power is turned off. When your computer is turned back on, it is configured
with the values found in this memory.
Run System Setup if you get a message prompting you to run the program. You may
also want to run System Setup, particularly the first time you use your computer, to set
the time and date, use security or power-management features, or alter the settings of
other features.
BIOS Caution:
If you are not familiar with BIOS setup and what the parameters mean, seek
help from a person who is knowledgeable. Incorrect settings may cause your
system to malfunction or "Crash”.
Your computer’s version of System Setup may not include all the fields listed
here or may include additional fields. Field names and order of appearance
can vary according to the version of the BIOS (basic input/output system) on
your computer.
Customizing Your Computer 95
Starting System Setup
To start System Setup, turn on your computer and then press <F2> and hold until the
System Setup screen appears.
Table 2. System Setup Menus
Menu
Function
Main
Changes the basic system.
Advanced
Configures advanced features on your computer.
Security
Enables security features, including passwords.
Boot
Specifies the order of boot devices and configures boot
features.
Exit
Specifies how to exit System Setup.
To open the menu you need to use, use the left or right arrow keys to select the menu
name.
Table 3. System Setup Navigation Keys
Navigation Key
Function
<F1>
Displays the General Help window.
<Esc>
96 Users Manual
Exits the current menu.
<
> or <
>
Moves the cursor up and down between fields.
<
> or <
>
Selects different menus. Pressing the <Esc>key at the Main
menu brings you to the Exit menu.
<F5>
Scrolls backwards through the options for the highlighted field.
<F6>
Scrolls forward through the options for the highlighted field.
<F9>
Sets the parameters for the current menu to their default values.
<F10>
Save changes and exit system setup.
<Enter>
Executes commands or opens a submenu.
Changing Booting Priority
You can select the booting priority among the devices such as the hard drive, CD-ROM
drive, etc. The following example describes how to configure the hard drive as the first
booting device when the CD-ROM drive is configured as the first booting device by
default.
1. Select the Boot menu in System Setup.
2. Press <Enter> on Boot Device Priority item.
3. Use < > key to move to the Hard Drive item, and press <F6> until it is at the
very top.
4. Press <F10> to save the changed configuration, and exit System Setup.
Now you can boot the system with the hard disk drive as the first booting device.
Customizing Your Computer 97
Configuring the Password
Setting the Supervisor Password
By configuring a supervisor password, you can restrict system access to authorized
users only.
Do not lose or forget your password. If you have forgotten your password,
contact the Samsung service center.
1. Select the Security menu in the System Setup. To enter System Setup, see “Starting
System Setup” on page 96.
2. On the Set Supervisor Password item, press <Enter>.
3. Enter a password, press <Enter>, re-enter the password for confirmation, and
press <Enter> again.
4. When a message confirming the password configuration appears in the [Setup
Notice] window, press <Enter>.
Setting the User Password
You can configure user passwords so that other users can use the system.
Before configuring a user password, a supervisor password must have been
configured.
Users can start the system with their user password, but cannot enter into the
System Setup.
Deactivating the supervisor password also deactivates the user password.
On the Set User Password item, press <Enter>, and complete step 3-4 of "Setting the
Supervisor Password".
98 Users Manual
Activating the Booting Password
Before activating the booting password, the supervisor password must have
been configured.
Set the Password on boot option to [Enabled].
From now on, system booting will not proceed without the password.
Deactivating the Password
1. On the password to delete, press <Enter>. (e.g. supervisor password)
2. Enter the current configured password, and press <Enter>.
3. Leave the 'Enter New Password' and 'Confirm New Password' field empty, and
press <Enter> to deactivate the password.
Customizing Your Computer 99
Configuring Resolution and Color Depth
Screen resolution is the number of pixels displayed on the screen. High resolution
makes the overall screen area large, although individual items appear small. Color
quality is determined by the number of bits used to represent a pixel on the screen. High
color quality displays more number of colours on your screen.
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Change the screen
resolution.
2. Make changes on the Settings tab of the [Display Properties] dialog box.
You can view the graphics
chipset.
To change your screen
resolution, move the slider
to select an appropriate
resolution.
To change the number of
colors displayed on a
monitor, select an
appropriate colour quality.
Graphics Chipset Information
You can view the installed graphics chipset in the Display Properties window.
- NVIDIA Geforce Go 7300/7400/7600
- Intel 945GM Graphics (DVMT)
3. When you have completed configuration, click Apply.
The following resolution and color quality settings are recommended
depending on the LCD screen of the system.
- XGA: Screen resolution: 1024 x 768, Color quality: Very high (32bit)
- SXGA+: Screen resolution: 1400 x 1050, Color quality: Very high (32bit)
100 Users Manual
Using External Display Devices
Using external display devices such as monitors, projectors, TVs, etc allows you to
view screen images alternatively or simultaneously on each device. Additionally, you
can extend the screen onto two display devices to use a larger workspace. Using
external display devices is especially useful when you are giving a presentation or
watching a movie through your TV.
Switching Display Devices Using the Shortcut Key
You can watch the screen through either the LCD or an external display device, or you
can even watch the screen through both the LCD and an external display device
simultaneously.
1. Connect the external display device (e.g. a monitor or a projector) to the
corresponding port of the system. To connect a TV, connect the TV to the TV
output port of the system.
2. If you press the <Fn>+<F4> key combination once, the Samsung Display
Manager screen appears where you can select a screen.
Whenever you press the <F4> key while pressing the <Fn> key, selection moves
to the next item. Select a mode.
Example) Select LCD+CRT
LCD: Notebook Screen
CRT: External Monitor Screen
LCD+CRT: Notebook + External Monitor Screen
TV: TV Screen (connected to the TV OUT port)
In the MS-DOS environment, the picture is displayed to the LCD > CRT, in
turns, and output to a TV/DVI is not supported. In full screen MS-DOS mode
of Windows, you cannot change the display device by pressing the shortcut
key.
Customizing Your Computer 101
Using Dual View to View Extended Screen
You can expand the screen into two display devices and work conveniently in separate
workspaces.
In Dual View mode, you can select the screen resolution and colour quality for each
display device, as if there were two separate graphics cards.
1. Connect the external display device (e.g. a monitor or a projector) to the
corresponding port of the system. To connect a TV, connect the TV to the TV
output port of the system.
2. Press touchpad right button on the desktop, click Properties, and then click the
Settings tab.
3. Click the monitor '2' icon, select the 'Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor' check box, and then click Apply.
4. When the configuration is complete, click Identify on the left side of
Troubleshoot. The primary display device(the LCD) is indicated as '1', and the
102 Users Manual
secondary display device is indicated as '2'. Now you can view the screen through
two monitors.
1 : Primary
2 : Secondary
When you use Dual View, configuring the LCD as the 'Primary' monitor is
recommended.
If the screen of the secondary display device is displayed at 640x480 pixels,
with 256 colours, change the settings to the desired screen resolution and
colour quality in the [Display Properties] dialog box.
When Dual view is not properly set up, refer to Q&A. (p123)
Deactivating Dual View Mode
Click the monitor '2' icon, clear the 'Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor'
check box, and then click Apply.
To move a window between display devices in Dual View mode
Click the title bar of the window in the primary display device (1, the LCD), and
drag it to the secondary display device (2). The window is moved to the
secondary display device.
Customizing Your Computer 103
System Management
Using Power Management Options
Your computer includes Power Management options that can help the battery charge
last longer and extend the life of the battery. Power-management options will slow
down or shut off system components when the components are not being used.
Power management may slow down system performance. Your computer runs fastest
with the power cord attached, whereby power management is disabled.
In the next sections, basic and advanced methods of power management will be
discussed.
Basic Power Management Schemes
This section discusses the basic schemes of power management when the computer is
operating on battery power or using AC power.
Standby vs. Hibernation
Hibernation is a state where the contents of memory are stored in a special file
on the hard disk, and Standby simply keeps a small holding current through
the memory to keep the data. You are more likely to sustain loss of data in
Standby mode so it is recommended to save all open files before entering
Standby.
Changing Devices:
Do not change PC Cards while in standby or hibernate modes.
To enter the power management window complete the following:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance.
2. Click
104 Users Manual
icon to display the Power Options Properties window.
3. Click the Power Schemes tab to display the basic power management options.
By default, the power scheme is configured to BatteryMgr-normal mode.
BatteryMgr-normal mode extends the battery life and optimizes the Intel
Speedstep function. Since the CPU power consumption is automatically
optimized to conserve power when the computer is operating on battery
power, an application may be executed slower than when it is operating on AC
power.To use BatteryMgr-normal mode after reinstalling Windows, install the
Battery Manager program using the system software Media.
4. Select the time that you wish each of the following actions to occur in Battery and
AC power mode.
•
•
•
•
Turn off monitor
Turn off hard disks
System standby
System hibernates
Turning off the monitor and HDDs will save a substantial amount of battery power,
therefore when in battery only mode select the shortest time practical.
You can also reserve Turning Computer Off, Hibernation state, Hold Mode,
etc. by selecting System > Computer Scheduling in the EasyBox program.
(see “Using EasyBox” on page 35.)
If you change the power settings in the Battery Manager program, the settings
of the 'Power Options Properties' window are automatically changed
accordingly ("Using the Battery Manager" (p112)).
System Management 105
Hibernate Mode (Power Management or Manual Method)
When hibernation is used, your computer turns off and when you power up again,
everything is restored exactly as you left it—including programs and documents
you may not have saved or closed. Everything in memory gets saved to the HDD,
and the monitor and hard disk get turned off.
If You Reinstall Windows:
You should re-establish hibernate in power options by opening Power
Options Properties window and click on the Hibernate tab then click
“Enable Hibernation”.
Hibernate Tab
Frequent Interruptions:
If you experience frequent interruptions, you might also consider putting your
computer into automatic hibernation after a specified number of minutes using
the power management options.
Standby Mode (Power Management or Manual Method)
Standby is used mainly for conserving battery power in your notebook computer. It
also gives you the benefit of getting right back to your work without waiting for the
computer to restart. Standby turns off your monitor and hard disks, placing your entire
system in a low-power state. When you return to your computer, restores your desktop
exactly as you left it. It is recommended that you do not enter standby mode with less
than 20% battery power.
5. Click OK to set your power management options and close the window.
106 Users Manual
Rest Key:
The manual <Fn+Esc/
> key combination will not activate Standby or
Hibernate modes while you are playing a multimedia program or have an
active USB device connected.
Advanced Power Management Schemes
This section discusses the advanced power management schemes. There are two
buttons that you can use to manually conserve power.
To enter the power management window complete the following:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance.
2. Click
icon to display the Power Options Properties window.
3. Click the Advanced tab to display the advanced power management options.
Advanced Tab
Power & Sleep Button
Programming Windows
4. Select the mode (Do nothing/Ask me what to do/Standby/Hibernate/Shut
down) assigned to the Power button and/or Rest <Esc/ > key. Also select the
action (Do nothing/Standby/Hibernate) associated with closing the computer
lid.
System Management 107
The “Rest” key is assigned to the <Fn+Esc/
> key combination. "Basic
Power Management Schemes" on page 104 for a better understanding of
Standby and Hibernate modes.
5. Click OK to set your power management options and close the window.
You can return to normal operation after you have used one of the “Power
Management” buttons by quickly pushing and releasing the Power button.
108 Users Manual
Using the Battery
Please refer to the following instructions when running the computer on battery power
without connecting the AC power.
Precautions
•
•
•
•
Use only chargers specified in the User Manual.
Never heat the battery pack, put it near or in a fire or use at a temperature
higher than 60°C, as this may cause fire.
Never cause a short circuit between the battery pack terminals or
disassemble the battery pack.
Carefully read and follow the precautions printed on the battery and the
safety instructions in the User Manual before using the battery.
Please read the instructions on the battery before use.
Please refer to the system operation environment (p150) of this manual and
operate and store the battery at room temperature.
Ejecting and Attaching Battery
1. Shutdown the system and close LCD.
2. Put the computer upside down on a flat surface.
3. Pull the two battery latches outward.(
), then remove the battery.
System Management 109
4. To install the battery again, slide the battery into the system as below. The battery
latches move inward, and fix the battery automatically.
Monitoring the Battery Charge
You can view the battery charge status by completing the following procedures.
To use the shortcut key to view
If you press the <Fn>+<F2/ > key combination on the keyboard, the remaining
battery charge appears on the screen for a while. It appears only when the Samsung
Display Manager program is installed on your computer.
To view on the battery
Click the PUSH button on the battery. The remaining battery charge (%) will be
displayed.
Push button
110 Users Manual
To view through the Control Panel
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Option >
Power Measure tab.Then you can view the current power source and the current
remaining battery charge.
Power Supply Status
Remaining Battery Charge
Using the battery
Battery is an expendable supply, so when you use it for a long time, the
capacity/battery life is shortened. If the battery life is reduced to under half of
the initial time, we recommend that you purchase a new battery to use.
Battery Warning
You will hear an alarm when the remaining battery charge is under 10%.
Connect the power cable or turn off the computer and install a fully charged
battery.
When the remaining battery charge is under 3%, the computer automatically
saves current work and turns off. This may be different according to the
settings in Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power
Options > Alarms tab.
System Management 111
Extending the battery use time
Decreasing the LCD Brightness
Decreasing the LCD brightness by pressing the <Fn>+< > key combination on the
keyboard or adjusting the brightness in the Battery Manager program extends the
battery use time.
Decreasing the LCD brightness by one level extends the battery use time by 3~5%
(10~20 minutes). (The battery use time is determined by the corresponding model.)
Using the Battery Manager
Battery Manager is a power management program that enables using battery power
efficiently.
You can easily change the power mode by selecting an optimized power mode and
manually optimizing the battery use time by setting each option.
Click on Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Battery Manager >
Samsung Battery Manager.
Change Power
Mode
Power Saving
Effects
You can only change the
detailed configuration in
Custom Mode.
• Maximum Battery Saving Mode : This mode is appropriate for conditions
which require the maximum battery use time. This may degrade the
performance of the system.
• Normal Mode : This mode is appropriate for normal conditions. Both system
performance and battery use time are optimized.
112 Users Manual
• Maximum Performance Mode : This mode is appropriate for conditions that
require maximum system performance.Therefore, the battery usage time may
be reduced in this mode.
• Custom Mode : In this mode, a user can configure a detailed configuration to
save the battery usage time. You can adjust the LCD brightness, the system
standby time, the screen color quality, and the graphic mode values.
Power Saving Effect
This shows the relative battery use time for each power mode. The more
effective the power saving, the longer the graph will appear.
When Running a Game or Multimedia Application
A game or multimedia application may not work smoothly in Maximum Battery
Saving Mode. Using this is recommended when the AC adapter is connected
or in Normal or higher modes.
Turning Off Unnecessary Devices
Turning off unnecessary devices extends the battery use time.
Select the Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System >
Hardware tab and click Device Manager. Right-click a device you are not using, and
select 'Disable' (e.g. wireless LAN, 1394 , etc.)
Battery Calibration
If you charge/discharge the battery repeatedly for only a short time, the battery use
time may be reduced by the difference between the actual battery charge and the
remaining charge display. In this case, the actual battery charge and the remaining
charge display will be same by discharging the battery completely using the Battery
Calibration function, and then recharging it again.
1. Disconnect the AC power adapter after turning off the system.
2. Restart your computer and press <F2> to enter BIOS setup.
3. Using the arrow keys, highlight Smart Battery Calibration in the Boot menu. The
Battery Calibration function is activated and the battery is discharged forcibly.
This operation requires 3~5 hours depending on the battery capacity and the
remaining battery charge.
4. When the calibration process is complete, recharge the battery fully.
System Management 113
Upgrading Memory
This computer has one or more 256 MB or 512 MB memory module(s). Two memory
module sockets are provided so that you can replace memory or install an additional
memory module.
Removing the memory module
Before removing/replacing the memory module, turn the system off completely
and remove the battery. Do not replace the memory module when the system
is in Standby/Hibernate mode.
When using memory in dual channel, using memory of the same specification
(the same capacity and manufacturer) is recommended.
1. Using a screwdriver, open the memory module compartment cover on the bottom
of the computer.
screw
2. Push the memory module tabs outward to pop the memory module upwards.
Carefully pull the module out at an angle of about 30°.
114 Users Manual
Adding a memory module
1. Align the new memory module connectors accordingly and slide it into the slot at
a 30° angle.
Ensure the notch on the memory module corresponds with the notch on the
socket.
2. Push the memory module in until the module clicks into place. If the memory
module is not fixed completely, gently push the memory down while pressing the
memory module tabs outward.
3. Close and fix the memory module compartment cover using a screwdriver.
System Management 115
Using the Security Lock Port
The security lock is a device used to physically 'fix' the system when using it in a public
place. The locking device needs to be purchased separately. The shape and methods of
use may differ depending on the manufacturer. Please refer to the manual provided
with the security lock for proper use.
1. Connect a security lock cable to a fixed object.
2. While holding the security lock port lever to the left, connect the cable to the
security lock port.
Any damage to the machine caused by using a locking / security device is not
covered under warranty.
116 Users Manual
Tips for Using Your Computer
The following information helps you avoid potential problems as you use your
computer:
Do not try to disassemble your computer. Opening the system chassis voids
your warranty. Only an authorised manufacturer service center can replace or
add any parts inside the chassis.
• Follow all the instructions and cautions in your computer user documentation.
• The LCD has a polarized surface and can be damaged easily. To prevent
damage, avoid touching the screen.
• Use only approved AC adapters, auto adapters, memory modules and other
options.
• Because a notebook computer is small and has restricted air flow around
components, it is more likely to overheat than a desktop computer. A fan inside
your computer runs when needed to help eliminate heat. Make sure the fan vent
on the left side of your computer is not blocked when you use the computer.
Occasionally check the vents and remove any accumulated dust on the outside.
• Avoid using or storing the computer in extremely hot or cold areas, such as a
car on a hot day. Keep the computer away from heaters and out of direct
sunlight. Exposure to excessive heat may damage computer components. If you
have left your computer in a hot place, let it cool down slowly to room
temperature (with the LCD panel open) before using it.
• Do not remove the memory-module compartment door, or try to install a
memory module when the computer is on.
• Set up your computer work area to avoid physical strain. Sit with your back
straight and supported by your chair. Adjust your chair or work table so that
your arms and wrists can remain in a relaxed position, parallel with the floor.
Avoid bending or twisting your wrists as you work. Your hands should “float”
slightly above the keyboard. Refer to a book on office ergonomics for more
information on setting up your work area.
• Take frequent breaks from working at the computer to rest your eyes and
stretch your muscles.
• Remember to save your data files frequently and to make backup copies of your
files.
System Management 117
• A walkie-talkie must be kept more than 1 meter away from the device.
Since a walkie-talkie transmits a very strong signal, it may cause a computer
malfunction.
Travelling with Your Computer
Air Travel
If you are travelling by air, follow these tips:
• Take the computer with you as carry-on luggage. Do not check the computer
with your baggage.
• Allow the computer and disks to go through the X-ray security devices. Do not
hand-carry disks through the walk-through metal detectors, which can cause
loss of data.
• Be prepared to turn off the computer during take off and landing.
Please follow the instruction of the corresponding facilities regarding the use
of wireless devices (wireless LAN, Bluetooth , etc.) when in a wireless
communication restricted area (e.g. airplane, hospital , etc.).
Handling Spills
Do not spill anything on your computer. The best way to avoid spills is to avoid eating
and drinking around your computer. If you do spill something on your computer, turn
off your computer, unplug it immediately, and do the following:
• If you spill liquid on the keyboard, drain as much of the liquid from the
keyboard as possible. Be careful not to let the liquid drip onto the LCD panel.
Allow the system to dry for several days before trying to use it.
• If you spill liquid on an external keyboard or keypad, unplug it and drain as
much of the liquid as possible. Allow the keyboard to sit at room temperature
for a full day before trying to use it.
118 Users Manual
Sweet liquids leave a sticky residue that may jam the keyboard despite your
efforts to dry it.
• If you spill liquid on the LCD panel, clean it immediately with a soft cloth and
denatured alcohol or a proprietary LCD screen cleaner. Do not use water,
window cleaner, acetone, aromatic solvent, or dry, rough towels to clean it.
Some liquids damage the polarized LCD screen. If your screen is damaged,
contact your authorized manufacturer’s service center for a replacement.
Storing the Computer for Long Periods
If you will not be using the computer for a long period of time (a month or more), you
should discharge the battery completely then remove the battery from the computer.
This extends the life of the battery.
System Management 119
Troubleshooting
Complete the following in the order presented until your system is functioning
properly. If all of the steps below fail then contact your local reseller for assistance.
Questions and Answers
Please see “Questions and Answers” on page 121 for assistance in correcting any
computer operational problems.
Check the Connections
Verify all of the power and peripheral cables are securely plugged into their sockets
and that your system and power supply is on.
Norton AntiVirus
Run Norton AntiVirus to ensure a virus is not affecting your computer.
To run Norton AntiVirus proceed as follows:
Click Start > All Programs > Norton AntiVirus > Norton AntiVirus 2005.
Windows Help and Support
Run Windows Help and Support to find problem that may be affecting your computer.
To run Windows Help and Support proceed as follows:
Click Start > Help and Support.
Frequently Asked Questions
To view FAQ’s on your computer, please visit www.samsungpc.com.
Reinstalling Software
If for some reason your system crashes you may corrupt your HDD, Windows
operating system and/or some of your device drivers. If this is the case, use System
Recovery CD to reinstall OS and System Software Media to reinstall the corrupt
device drivers.
System Recovery Precaution:
Before you start restoring your windows operating system insure you backup
all data on your hard drive.
Samsung is NOT responsible for any data loss.
120 Users Manual
Questions and Answers
This section provides information on possible problems, solutions and other references
for system use.
Windows Related
Q1 The system does not shutdown properly.
A
When the system does not shutdown normally, press and hold the Power button
until the system manually shuts off. If the Power-Saving Mode is configured into
the Power button, press and hold for more than 4 seconds to shut the system off.
When the system is turned on after such manual shutdown, Scandisk will run to
check errors in the system.
Q2 The system freezes during program operation
A1
There is an error with the program currently being used. Press the <Ctrl>, <Alt>,
and <Delete> keys simultaneously and click End Task in the [Windows Task
Manager] window.
A2
There is an error with the Windows OS. Reboot the system by using the Power
button.
Display Related
Q1 The LCD screen is too dark or too bright
A
Adjust the LCD screen brightness. Use the <Fn>+<
>, <Fn>+<
> keys.
Q2 The screen saver disturbs screen viewing during Media Player or video file
operation.
A
Unselect Tools > Options > Player > Allow screen saver during playback in the
Media Player.
Troubleshooting 121
Q3 In DOS mode, changing the full screen DOS mode by pressing
<ALT>+<Enter> key displays a broken image for a short period.
A
The DOS mode which supports 2 Byte characters such as Korean and Japanese
runs in graphic not in text mode. In this case, a broken image may be displayed
while changing the video mode settings.
Q4 In the following cases, the screen blinks or displays noise for a short time
(This only applies to nVidia graphics card.):
(Click the Graphics Related tab, Change Resolution, Change Display
Device, Remove the AC Adapter, Restart the System, Change PowerMizer
level.)
A
This may happen while the video driver is examining the connected device.
While detecting, any connected display devices may blink or some noise may
occur.
Q5 When I connect a projector, and change the setting to display screen image
on both the LCD and the projector by pressing <Fn>+<F4 /
> keys,
screen is not displayed properly.
A
Press <Fn>+<F4 /
> keys once again.
If the same problem continues, it means the projector cannot support the
resolution. Lower the resolution to 1024 x 768.
Q6 The playback screen of a DVD title or an MPEG file is only displayed on the
LCD. (This only applies to nVidia graphics card.)
A
Video is displayed on a single display device by default, when LCD and CRT are
selected simultaneously.
1.
Right-click over the Desktop and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the [Display Properties] window, select the Settings tab > Advanced >
GeForce Go xxxx tab.
3.
Select the Full Screen Video menu> Full Screen Video Control item, set the Full
Screen Device to 'Auxiliary Display' and then click the Apply button. Then you
can view video on both the LCD and CRT display devices.
122 Users Manual
Q7 After connecting to a TV, some programs such as Debug, Mem, etc. do not
run in full screen MS-DOS mode.
A
If a TV is used as the display device, some programs such as Debug, Mem, etc.
may not run properly in full screen MS-DOS mode. Run the programs in the MSDOS window.
Q8 The Taskbar on the bottom of the screen does not appear when a projector
is used as the display device.
A
A This may happen, even though SXGA+ LCD supports the 1400x1050 mode,
the projector does not support that mode. In this case change the resolution to
1024x768 (recommended) on your computer.
Q9 Switching the MS-DOS command prompt to full screen mode or Windows
mode by pressing the <Alt>+<Enter> keys does not operate properly.
A
Pressing the <Alt>+<Enter> keys using an USB keyboard, may cause the key
input to be recognized as multiple key inputs depending on the keyboard input
recognition time. In this case, the MS-DOS command prompt is repeatedly
switched to full screen and then to Windows several times. Please press the
<Alt>+<Enter> keys more quickly, or press the <Alt>+<Enter> keys using the
system keyboard.
Q10 When a TV is connected, the Turn off monitor power option is not
performed.
A
When connecting a TV after booting up your computer, the Turn off monitor
power option may not be performed. For it to operate properly, it is recommended
to connect a TV and then booting up the computer.
Q11 The shortcut icon does not appear on the screen.
A
The shortcut icon appears only when Magic Keyboard and the Samsung Display
Manager program are installed.
Q12 I cannot set up Dual View properly. (For Intel Graphics only.)
A
This may happen when Clone mode is selected for an external monitor.
Press the <Fn>+<F4> key combination to select LCD and try to set up Dual
View again.
Troubleshooting 123
Q13. The screen is rotated, but I cannot return it to the original orientation.
A
This may happen when you have used the screen pivot function or pressed a
wrong key while using the computer. For Intel Graphics, press the
Ctrl+Alt+Direction Key ( ↑ : rotate 0 degrees, → : rotate 270 degrees, ↓ : rotate
180 degrees, ← : rotate 90 degrees) to return to the original orientation. For other
graphics cards, use the rotation mode of the Advanced menu supported by the
corresponding graphics card company.
Sound Related
Q1 How to install and uninstall the sound driver
A
To install or uninstall the sound driver from this system, please follow the
procedures below.
• Sound Driver Components
The sound driver consists of the following 3 components and the 3 components
are automatically installed during the installation.
– High Definition Audio - KB888111: Microsoft UAA Bus Driver for High
Definition Audio
– SoundMAX: SoundMAX Integrated Digital HD Audio
– WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver: SRS
• Uninstalling the Sound Driver
To remove the sound driver due to a problem or for an update, follow the
procedures below.
If you do not follow the sequence below, the sound driver may not be removed
or the reinstalled driver, or may not work properly.
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. Remove WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver first.
3. Remove SoundMAX and restart the computer.
Do not remove the High Definition Audio item. Removing this item also
removes the modem device driver.
If you have removed this item, you need to install the modem device driver
again.
124 Users Manual
• Reinstalling the Sound Driver
If there is an already installed sound driver, uninstall the driver according to the
procedures above.
The sound driver is included on the System Software Media.
1. Insert the System Software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Select the Sound Driver on either Standard Installation or Custom Installation,
then the 3 components of the sound driver are automatically installed.
• Installing the Sound Driver after a Windows XP Reinstallation
If you install the sound driver after reinstalling Windows XP, the Add Hardware
Wizard (Modem Device) window may appear during the sound driver
installation. This happens because the High Definition Audio - KB888111
Hotfix, which has been installed on your system, has changed the settings to
search for both sound and modem devices. If you install the modem device, this
message will not appear. If necessary, install the modem device together.
The number of the High Definition Audio - KB888111 Hotfix may differ if you
have updated the Hotfix from the Microsoft web site.
Modem Related
Q1 I cannot hear the modem sound.
A1
Check that the telephone line is properly connected to the modem.
A2
Check that the modem driver is installed properly.
1.
Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System.
2.
Select Hardware tab > Device Manager > Modems in the System Properties
window, and check if there is a yellow exclamation mark on the installed modem
icon. If there is, delete the modem device driver and reinstall the driver, because
the yellow exclamation mark represents a not properly installed driver.
3.
If there is no yellow exclamation mark, double-click the installed modem, and
click Diagnostics tab > Query Modem in the Modem Properties window to
diagnose the modem.
No message in either of Command and Response in the Diagnostics tab means
that the modem is not operating properly.
Diagnose the modem again after restarting the system or reinstalling the driver.
Troubleshooting 125
(You have to exit all programs using modem in the advance of diagnostics of the
modem).
Q2 I cannot make a call using an extension line.
A
In general, the dial tone of a PBX or a digital phone switching system is not a
continuous one, unlike that of a trunk line.
Therefore, the modem may not make a call because the modem mistakes the dial
tone from a PBX or a digital phone switching system as a busy tone.
In this case, complete the following procedures.
- Using an AT command
As an initialization command, use the command, ATX3.
Otherwise, enter the ATX3 command manually before making a call.
It can correct this problem by skipping the dial tone check step.
- Configuring the Modem through the Control Panel
1.
Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections.
2.
Under See Also, click Phone and Modem Options.
3.
In the Modems tab, select the installed modem, and click Properties.
4.
In the Modem tab of the Modem Properties window, clear the 'Wait for dial tone
before dialing' check box.
5.
When the configuration is completed, click OK.
Q3 How do I use my modem when dialing from overseas?
A1
Check that the modem is correctly configured according to the current country.
Because the values for communication may differ according to the country, you
may not be able to connect via the modem due to an incorrect modem
configuration.
1.
Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections.
2.
Under See Also, click Phone and Modem Options.
3.
In the Dialing Rules tab, click Edit.
4.
In the General tab in the Edit Location window, select the current country from
the Country/region radio box, specify the Area code, and click OK.
A2 Because the shape of the telephone plug may differ according to the country, you
have to purchase and use the appropriate telephone plug for that particular
country.
126 Users Manual
Q4
How do I receive a fax while the system is in power saving mode (Rest mode) ?
A
To receive a fax in Standby Mode, you have to set it up as follows.
1.
The automatic fax reception function of the fax program needs to be activated.
(For more information, refer to the corresponding fax program manual.)
2.
Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections.
3.
Under See Also, click Phone and Modem Options.
4.
In the Modems tab, select the installed modem, and click Properties.
5.
In the Power Management tab of the Modem Properties window, select the “With
this device, exit the computer from stand-by mode” item and then click OK.
The above setting enables the modem to turn on the system and receive a fax
when in power saving mode.
Wired LAN Related
Q1 <Wake On LAN> function
A
<Wake On LAN> is a function that activates the system in rest mode when a
signal (such as ping or magic packet commands) arrives from network (wired
LAN).
To use <Wake On LAN> function:
1.
Select My Network Places > View network connections from the Desktop.
2.
Click the right button on the touchpad over Local Area Connection, and select
Properties.
3.
Click Configure, and select Power Management tab. Select ’Allow this device to
bring the computer out of standby’, then click OK. Restart the system.
- If the system in rest mode is activated when there is no received signal, use the
system after disabling <Wake On LAN> function.
- If you turn the power off when <Wake On LAN> is disabled, the LAN LED
continues to be lit up.
- Connecting wired LAN while using wireless LAN may not execute <Wake On
LAN> function. Configure wireless LAN to ’Disable’ to use <Wake On LAN>
function.
1. Click on My Network Place> View network connections on the Desktop.
2. Right-click over Wireless Network Connection and select Disable.
Troubleshooting 127
Q2 When I connected 100Mbps wired LAN and the computer exits standby/
hibernate mode, a message informing 10Mbps wired LAN connection
appears.
A
When the computer exits standby/hibernate mode, restoring the network takes
about 3 seconds. When the network is restored, it operates in 100Mbps.
Wireless LAN Related
Q1 The Wireless LAN device is operating properly, but I cannot connect to the
Internet or to another computer.
This is due to an incorrect configuration, or a configuration error. Check the
following check lists:
A1
If you are using a computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network connection, check
that the name of the configured network (SSID) is correct. The network name
(SSID) is case sensitive.
A2
If you are using a network key (encryption key), you have to use the same
network keys for an AP (Access Point) or a computer-to-computer network (Ad
Hoc). The network key of the AP is configured in the AP management program.
Ask your network administrator or AP manager for more detailed information.
A3
Check that the device driver is properly installed. If the driver is not properly
installed, you will find a yellow exclamation mark on the network icon by
clicking Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System >
Hardware tab > Device Manager > Network adapters > Wireless LAN adapter. If
there is a yellow exclamation mark, please reinstall the device driver with the
system software Media.
A4
Referring to A2 of Q3, Check that the network bridge configuration is correct.
Q2 The signal strength is excellent, but I cannot connect to the network.
Even if the signal strength is excellent, the network connection may not operate
properly if the TCP/IP properties are not properly configured, or the network key
(encryption key) is incorrect.
A1
Check that the TCP/IP properties are configured properly. When you connect to
an AP, click the Wireless Network Connection icon on the taskbar and select the
Support tab. If the IP is not allocated properly, the IP address will be displayed
as follows (e.g. 169.254.xxx.xxx).
If the network does not provide DHCP, you have to specify the correct IP address
by asking your network administrator.
128 Users Manual
Even if the network provides DHCP, the server may not allocate an IP address to
the client properly, and the client station cannot connect to the network.
A2
Referring to A2 of Q1, check that the network key is correct.
A3
Referring to Q4, check that AP is operating properly.
Q3 I cannot share an Internet connection.
A1
It may require some time to synchronize the computers to share an Internet
connection after the Internet connection sharing configuration is completed. If
you cannot share Internet connection even after a longer period, restart the
computer.
A2
Check if the connection between the network adapters is configured to bridge. If
there is a configured bridge connection between the network adapters through the
network configuration wizard, remove the network bridge, and reconfigure the
Internet connection sharing.
A bridge connection is created when you ran Network Setup Wizard from the
[Network Connections] window, and selected both the internal connection
adapter and another adapter in the wizard.
Q4 I cannot connect to the AP.
Check the Computer Settings
A1
Verify whether the wireless LAN function of the computer is on by doing the
following. If the wireless LAN function is off, turn it on.
- For Windows XP, verify that the wireless network connection has been set to
"Enable" in Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.
- Check if the wireless LAN is turned on.
A2
Verify whether the same network key (encryption key) has been entered in both
the AP and the computer.
The network key is an encryption key for encrypting data transmitted between the
AP and the computer. It is recommended setting the network key manually.
Check the AP Settings
For the AP settings, refer to the User's Guide provided by the AP manufacturer.
A3
Verify whether the environment is suitable for using a wireless LAN.
The use of a wireless LAN may be restricted according to the environment and
distance. Obstacles such as walls or doors affect the use of a wireless LAN.
Troubleshooting 129
Install the AP in a high and open space 50cm from the wall and far removed from
any other radio signal sources.
A4
Verify whether the AP is operating properly.
- When the AP is not operating normally, turn off the AP and after a short while
turn it on again.
- Verify whether the AP's firmware is the most recent version. (Contact the AP
manufacturer or the place where you purchased the AP for details of the AP
firmware.)
A5
Verify whether the AP has been properly connected to the network.
Verify whether the network is operating normally by connecting the wired
network cable, which has been connected to the AP, to your computer.
A6
Check the network key settings (encryption key).
When automatic code conversion (a passphrase function) has been selected and
data communication is not functioning even with a normal wireless connection,
it is recommended entering the network key (encryption key) manually.
A7
Check the AP settings as follows. (The following is recommended for a standard
environment and thus may differ according to the specific wireless network
environment.)
- When several APs are present simultaneously, check the channel setting for
each AP. When different APs are using nearby channels, interference may occur
between electronic waves. Set the APs' channels further apart from each other.
(Ex: Ch1, Ch5, Ch9, Ch13)
- When an AP's SSID (Service Set ID) option is set to "Hide", you cannot search
for that AP on the computer. We recommend canceling the "Hide" option for an
AP. The SSID is a name for distinguishing one wireless LAN from another
wireless LAN.
- It is recommended using Long Preamble. Preamble is a signal for data
transmission synchronization. Short Preamble may be supported by some types
of APs but may cause compatibility problems.
- It is recommended using a static IP.
- Since static channel selection is more reliable than auto channel selection, it is
recommended setting a static channel.
Q5 In the Windows XP 'Available wireless networks' window, the Wireless
Network Connection is displayed as 'Not Available'.
A1
130 Users Manual
Check if the wireless LAN is turned on.
A2
Check if there is additional program for a wireless LAN connection installed.
Windows XP supports wireless LAN connections through the Wireless Zero
Configuration (WZC) service. Therefore, an additional program for wireless
LAN connection is not required, unless the network requires a specific program.
However, installation of some wireless LAN related programs may sometimes
disable the [View Available Wireless Networks] window supported by WZC
service. Exit the wireless LAN related program then check whether the window
is enabled.
A3
Initialize the device driver.
Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System >
Hardware tab > Device Manager > Network adapters, and select the wireless
LAN adapter. Right-click the network adaptor and select 'Disable'. Then rightclick over the network adaptor and select 'Enable' after a short wait to check that
the device is operating properly.
A4
Right-click the My computer icon, and select Manage. When the Computer
Management window appears, double-click Services and Applications on the
left, and then click Services from the sub menu tree. Select the Standard tab in
the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Configuration and check that Startup
Type is configured to Automatic, and the Service status is Started.
A5
In the case of Windows XP, click Advanced in the [Wireless Network
Connection] dialog box (see "Connecting to an Access Point (AP)" (p63)) and
make sure that 'Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings' is
selected.
This may happen when a third-party wireless network setup program (e.g.
PROSet) other than Windows XP default program is installed. For setting up a
wireless network using the Windows XP program, this option should be selected.
Q6 When connecting to a computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network, I cannot
connect to another computer connected to the same computer-to-computer
network.
A1
Make sure that the security settings and network name of the computer-tocomputer (Ad Hoc) network is correct.
A2
Check the TCP/IP properties of the computers to be connected through the
computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network. All of the computers to be connected
through a computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network should be configured so that
their IP addresses are within the same subnet range.
- If the TCP/IP Settings are configured to DHCP, the address is automatically
configured to an address within the subnet IP range. This will take about 2~3
minutes.
Troubleshooting 131
- If the IP address is configured to static IP in TCP/IP properties, select Use the
following IP address in the TCP/IP properties of the wireless adapter, configure
IP address:10.0.0.1~10.0.0.254, and Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0, and then try
again.
- A fixed IP is recommended for a small-size network.
Q7 When using a computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network, sometimes I cannot
search the access point.
A
It may happen occasionally when you are using a computer-to-computer (Ad
Hoc) network connection. Even if you cannot find some access points, the
computer-to-computer (Ad Hoc) network is operating properly. Click Refresh to
view the latest search result.
Q8 Running Help file while running Profile Wizard in the wireless LAN
program (PROSet) makes the PROSet window white.
A
It will be displayed properly when you finish the profile wizard. It dose not affect
the program operation.
Q9 The network does not operate properly when both the wireless and the wired
network connections are simultaneously configured with the same IP
address.
A
You cannot use the wireless and the wired network connections using the same
IP address simultaneously. To use either the wireless or the wired network in turn
with the same IP address, you have to Disable whichever network device will not
be using in the network connection of the Control Panel.
Q10 The wireless LAN does not work properly when there is a device operating
on an adjacent frequency in the vicinity of the product.
A1
Channel interference may occur when a wireless video transceiver or a
microwave oven is being used.If you experience channel interference from other
equipment, it is recommended changing the channel to connect to the AP. For
more information about AP settings, refer to the User Manual supplied by the AP
manufacturer.
A2
Since IEEE802.11g equipment operates in hybrid mode when there is active
IEEE802.11b equipment, the data rate may be degraded.
132 Users Manual
Q11 An established wireless LAN connection is disconnected after 2~3 minutes,
and the connection is not recovered.
A1
This may be caused by channel interference. Change the channel of the AP, and
reconnect.
A2
This may be caused by selecting the ’Use IEEE 802.1x network authentication’
option when IEEE 802.1x authentication is not available.
Check the properties of the AP in the wireless network settings. If the ’Use IEEE
802.1x authentication in this network’ option is selected, deselect the option on
the Authentication tab.
For more detailed information about authentication server, ask your network
administrator.
A3
If the AP is configured to ’Use network authentication (Shared Key)’
If the AP is configured to authentication shared mode, all computers to be
connected should be configured as follows:
- If you are using Windows XP, select network authentication(shared mode) in
the wireless network settings.
Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network
Connections, right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon and then select
View Available Wireless Networks.
Select Change Advanced Settings from the left menu, select an AP from
Preferred networks window in the Wireless Networks tab, and click the
Properties button. Select Shared Mode in the Network Authentication field of the
Association tab, and then click the OK button.
If the Preferred networks window in the Wireless Network tab is empty, click
View Wireless Networks, select an AP to connect to, and select Shared Mode in
the Network Authentication field of the Connection Information tab as described
above.
For more detailed network authentication procedures, ask your AP (Access
Point) administrator.
Q12 After PROSet is installed, The “AEGIS Protocol (IEEE 802.1x) v2.2.1.0”
appears in the [Local Area Connection Properties] window.
A
The AEGIS Protocol is a security authentication protocol that is automatically
installed when PROSet is installed and does not affect the operation of other
programs.
Troubleshooting 133
Q13 Although I have turned the wireless LAN off using the Off Button on the
PROSet, the wireless LAN operating light is still on.
A
This is normal. The Off Button for the Wireless LAN on the PROSet only turns
off the S/W and not the H/W for the Wireless LAN.
Q14 After installing the PROSet, I cannot manage the wireless network under
Windows.
A
Click on "Use Microsoft Client" in the Tools menu of the PROSet program to
manage a wireless network in Windows.
To manage a wireless network in the PROSet program, click on "Use Inter
PROSet/Wireless" in the Tools menu of the PROSet program.
Games and Programs Related
Q1 3D game is not executed, or some functions are not working.
A
Change the graphic setting of the game to '2D' or 'Software Renderer', then
execute the program again.
Q2 I launched a game right after installing it, and the game is not executed.
A
This problem may occur when the game is not compatible with Windows XP.
Launch the game again, and it will be executed properly.
Q3 <Fn+F4/
A
> Key combination does not work.
While displaying video of VCD or MPEG, or the display setting is Dual View,
you cannot toggle display devices. Also the installation of NetWare Client 32
program disables the function of <Fn+F4/
>.
Q4 While playing a game, pressing the <Fn>+<F4 /
the screen is not properly displayed.
A
>keys does not work or
Some games and 3D application programs may change the display device
control. Therefore, pressing the <Fn>+<F4 / > keys may terminate the running
program or may display an abnormal screen.
Press the <Fn>+<F4 / > keys before launching a program and do not press
them while running the program.
134 Users Manual
Q5 Running speed of a game is too slow or fast.
A
Change the setting of Power Schemes to 'Always On'.
(Click Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options >
Power Schemes tab, then configure the Power schemes field to 'Always On'.)
Q6 Some part of a game image is not displayed or is displayed in black.
A
This may happen when running a game designed for DirectX 8.1, such as NHL
2003, MVP Baseball 2003, etc.
Q7 The game screen is displayed small.
A
[nVidia Graphics]
This may happen when the display settings are set to zoom out mode ('Use center
output'). Change the settings as follows to fit the game screen to the LCD screen.
1.
Right-click over the Desktop and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the [Display Properties] window, select the Settings tab > Advanced >
GeForce Go 6600 tab.
3.
Select the nView Display Settings item, set the nView mode to 'Single Display'
and set the Current Display to 'Laptop Display'.
4
Right-click over the figure of the Digital Display Device and then click Device
Adjustments.
5.
Select 'Use Display Adapter Scaling' and then click the Apply button.
[Intel Graphics]
1.
Right-click on the Desktop and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the [Display Properties] window, select the Settings tab > Advanced > Intel
Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile tab.
3.
Select the Graphic Properties item, select 'Single Display' and set the Current
Display to 'Notebook'.
4.
Click the Display Settings menu, select 'Full Screen' for the Display Extension
and then click the Apply button.
Q8 The game play screen frequently stops and starts.
A
[nVidia Graphics]
This may occur when the PowerMizer Setting is set to 'Maximum Power Saving
Function' or 'Balanced'.
Troubleshooting 135
1.
Right-click on the Desktop and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the [Display Properties] window, select the Settings tab > Advanced >
GeForce Go xxxx tab.
3.
Select the PowerMizer item, slide the AC outlet and the battery sliders to
Maximum Performance and then click the Apply button.
[Intel Graphics]
This may occur when 'Intel Dual Frequency Graphics Technology' is selected.
1.
Right-click on the Desktop and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the [Display Properties] window, select the Setting tab > Advanced > Intel
Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile tab.
3.
Select the Graphic Properties item, select 'Single Display' and set the Current
Display to 'Notebook'.
4.
Click the Display Settings menu and the 'Power Settings'.
5.
Unselect 'Intel Dual Frequency Graphics Technology' and then click the
Apply button.
Q9 The picture is not displayed properly for some games.
A
Some games such as 'Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's Stone', 'Harry Potter and the
Chamber of Secrets', etc. may not display the picture properly when the screen
resolution is set to 1024x768 and the color quality is set to 32 bit.
For these games, set the screen resolution to 1024x768, and the color quality to
16 bit.
Q10 Game play is not displayed smoothly on the screen.
A
For 3D games, the texture data for the 3D screen display is saved to the system
memory. If there is insufficient system memory, the data is saved to the hard disk
drive and loaded to memory when required. This operation may temporarily stop
displaying the picture on the screen.
In this case, lower the game resolution or the screen settings. (For Delta Force:
Black Hawk Down, Medal of Honor, Battle Field, 1942, etc.)
136 Users Manual
Security Center
Q1 To change the popup window display settings when connected to the
Internet.
In the Windows XP SP2 environment, you can decide whether to display a popup
window when connected to the Internet, for user convenience and security.
A1
To display most of the popup windows when connected to the Internet:
1.
Click on Internet Options in Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Manage
security settings for.
2.
In the Privacy tab of Internet Properties, clear Block pop-ups.
A2
To display popup windows only from the current site when connected to the
Internet:
Place the cursor on the notification area at the bottom of the Internet address bar
and right-click to display a menu, from which you can select Temporarily Allow
Pop-ups or Always Allow Pop-ups from This Site.
A3
To display popup windows from a particular site:
1.
Click on Internet Options in Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Manage
security settings for.
2.
In the Privacy tab of Internet Properties, click on Settings from Block pop-ups.
3.
Enter a URL to want to allow pop-ups into Address of Web site to allow and click
on Add.
4.
You will find that the entered address is added to the allowed sites list. The next
time you connect to the Web site, you will see pop-ups appearing.
When you need to re-block a permitted site, select the Web site address that you
want to block from the Allowed Sites and click on Remove.
Q2 When you connect to a Web site, you see the message, “To help protect your
security, Internet Explorer stopped this site from installing an ActiveX
control on your computer” or “This site might require the following ActiveX
control” below the address bar.
A
Windows XP SP2 blocks unsigned ActiveX controls from being installed when
connected to certain Web sites for security reasons. On some Web sites that have
no ActiveX controls installed, applications are not started or do not display
properly.
In this case, to install ActiveX controls, right-click the notification area to display
a menu from which you can select Install ActiveX control.
Troubleshooting 137
Q3 When you see a Windows Security Alert icon (
of the task bar.
) appear on the right part
With the Security Center feature added, Windows XP SP2 checks the Firewall,
the automatic updates configuration and installation of virus-checking programs
to display a Windows Security Alert icon on the right part of the task bar when it
judges that the computer is vulnerable to attacks from the Internet. In this case,
check the following to install the necessary components.
A1
Set up the Windows Firewall.
When you set up the Windows Firewall, you will be protected from unauthorized
access through the Internet or the network.
1.
Click on Windows Firewall in Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Manage
security settings for.
2.
From the General tab of Windows Firewall, select ON (recommended).
3.
If you want to allow a certain program or service to gain access to your computer
using the Firewall, select and check the program or service that you want to allow
access from, in the Exceptions tab of the Windows Firewall. If you want to add
a program to Programs and Services, click on Add Program and select it.
A2
Set up Windows Automatic Updates.
This automatically downloads and installs critical updates via the Internet to keep
your computer up to date.
1.
Click on Automatic Updates in Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Manage
security settings for.
2.
From general tab of Automatic Updates window, select Automatic
(recommended).
A3
Keep your computer current with the latest virus updates. (ex: Norton Antivirus)
Even when you have installed Norton AntiVirus on your computer, Windows
cannot recognize the program until you configure the settings, displaying a
Security Alert icon.
When you first use or install Norton AntiVirus for the first time, follow the
Registration Wizard steps to configure the registration settings.
To protect your computer from virus attacks with the latest updates, click on
Options to display the Norton AntiVirus Options window. From the left menu of
the window, check Run Automatic Protection to select Automatic Protection and
check Run LiveUpdate to select LiveUpdate.
A4
138 Users Manual
Two virus scanning programs on one computer may cause system conflicts.
Remove one of the programs from the system.
A5
If Windows does not recognize the existence of an anti-virus program even when
it has been installed, your computer could be vulnerable to attacks from the
Internet. You should install an anti-virus program that your computer is able to
identify.
Check the following programs which Windows can detect and select one from
the list.
A list of anti-virus programs that Windows can detect:
-Symantec Norton Anti-Virus
-NetworkAssociates (McAfee)
-TrendMicro
-ComputerAssociates
-Panda
-Kaspersky
-Ahnlabs (AhnLab)
Visit the Microsoft Web site (www.microsoft.com) regularly to check the latest
list.
Other
Q1 4GB memory capacity is not properly recognized by Windows.
A
Windows XP SP2 and Windows Sever 2003 SP1 Standard Server cannot display
memory exceeding 4GB due to license and driver compatibility problem. Even if
the memory capacity is displayed as 3GB in your system information, 4GB
memory is recognized normally by the system.
Troubleshooting 139
Restoring the System
This description is only for models running Window XP.
The System Restore function allows you to restore your computer to an earlier copy
(called restore point), and restores the settings if a problem occurs.The System Restore
function is provided by Windows XP to enable the resolution of various problems
without reinstalling Windows XP completely.
You can use System Restore in the following cases.
•
•
•
•
The system files are deleted or damaged by mistake.
The system is unstable or a problem occurs in a device driver.
A problem occurs after changing system files such as the registry.
A problem occurs after installing a new program.
Creating a Restore Point
Restore points are created at predetermined times and at times of significant system
events such as when a program or a driver is installed. You can also decide when to
create your own restore points.
There has to more than 200MB of free space on the hard disk drive. If the disk
space is insufficient, a saved restore point might be deleted.
You are recommended to create a restore point when you have purchased a
new computer and before installing new programs or device drivers. Before
creating a restore point, check that the computer is operating properly.
The procedures to create your own restore point are described below.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > System Restore.
140 Users Manual
2. Select "Create a restore point", and click Next.
Since changes made after the Recovery Point may not be maintained, please
back-up all necessary files to another location before performing system
recovery.
3. In the Restore point description box, type a name to identify the restore point, and
than click Create. A restore point has been created.
Returning your computer to an earlier restore point
The procedures to return your computer to an earlier restore point when a problem has
occurred are described below.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > System Restore.
Troubleshooting 141
2. Select "Restore my computer to an earlier time", and then click Next.
3. Select the desired restore date from the calendar restoration and select the desired
restore point from the list, and then click Next.
The date of the restore point is displayed in bold font.
4. Confirm the selected restore point and click Next. System Restore shuts down
Windows, and starts the restoration processes.
142 Users Manual
5. After the restoration is complete, Windows restarts. In the [System Restore
completed] dialog, click OK.Your computer has been restored to the selected
restore point.
Undoing the last restoration
The procedures to undo a restoration are described below.
1. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > System Restore.
2. Select "Undo my last restoration", and then click Next.
3. Confirm the restoration information to undo, and than click Next. System Restore
shuts down Windows and starts undoing the restoration.
4. After the undo restoration is complete, Windows restarts. In the [Undo the last
restoration completed] dialog, click OK.Your computer has been restored to the
point prior to the last restoration.
Troubleshooting 143
Reinstalling Software
If you have reinstalled the Windows operating system, or the system and program do
not operate properly, you can re-install the driver and program using the system
software Media.
This computer is optimized for Microsoft Windows XP, therefore drivers for
other operating systems are not included on the System Software Media.
Running the system software Media
Insert the system software Media into the CD-ROM drive. The initial screen appears
automatically.
• Standard Installation: This displays a list of drivers or programs that are not
currently installed on your computer from the system software Media provided.
All necessary components are installed using the factory defaults.
• Minimum Installation: This displays the components (driver, Windows
programs, etc) that, if not installed, may cause problems with the system
performance. You can install only required components.
• Custom Installation: You can customize the installation of drivers and
programs.
144 Users Manual
Installing drivers and programs
1. Click Standard Installation in the main window of the System Software Media.
(Standard Installation is recommended)
2. The system is scanned to display the drivers and programs that need to be installed.
3. Click OK. The drivers and programs are automatically installed as factory
defaults.
4. When done, restart the system.
Troubleshooting 145
Reinstalling Windows XP
If the Windows XP does not operate properly due to an error in the system, or if you
have replaced the hard disk drive, you can reinstall Windows XP using the system
recovery CD.
With the system recovery CD, you can reinstall Windows XP only. To return
the system to the state of shipment, reinstall the device drivers and programs
with the system software Media after reinstalling Windows XP with the system
recovery CD.
Reinstalling Window may delete the data on the hard disk drive such as files,
programs, etc. In order to minimize damage from data loss, please remember
to always back up data. Samsung Electronics is not liable in the case of data
loss, please consult your warranty statement for clarification.
When you have set a booting password
You are asked to enter your booting password after restarting the system
during the Windows installation. Enter the password to continue to the next
steps.
Reinstalling Windows
Explain Standard installation option as a standard.
1. Insert the system recovery CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. In the initial screen, click Standard Installation.
146 Users Manual
• Standard installation: You can change the settings for partitioning, the
installation folder, etc. during the Windows installation. However, reinstalling
Windows may delete the data on the hard disk drive such as files, programs,
etc. In order to minimize damage from data loss, please remember to always
back up data.
• Quick Installation: This re-installs Windows with the user data and the system
configuration intact. The user data in the already existing Windows folders may
be preserved as the existing Windows folders are overwritten.
3. The description for the standard installation appears. Click Yes.
The installation starts, and the system will be restarted after a while.
When Quick Installation is selected,
Setup proceeds with Step 3 before automatically installing Windows. Quick
Installation overwrites the existing Windows version, so that drivers or
applications do not need to be reinstalled.
4. After the system has restarted, the message ’Press any key to boot from CD’
appears. Do not press any key at this time. After a while the partition configuration
screen appears.
To not change the partition, press <Enter>.
What is partition configuration?
Partition configuration is a function that devides the hard disk drive into one or
several partitions. Note that changing the partition deletes all of the data on the
hard disk drive.
5. Select the folder to install the Windows operating system.
To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press
<L> on the keyboard.
If you press ESC to select another folder for the installation, new Windows
folders are created causing a risk of dual booting.
6. After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows
installation, restart the system, and the message “Press any key to boot from CD”
is displayed. You do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP
installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation.
Troubleshooting 147
7. When the Regional and Language Options window appears, click Next.
8. When a window that requires your name and organization pops up, enter your
name and the organization and click Next.
In the Windows XP Professional edition, an additional window that requires the
computer name and the administrator password appears.
Enter the computer name and the administrator password and click Next.
9. When the Date and Time Settings window appears, click Next.
Setup will continue.
10. When the system restarts to display Press any key to boot from CD, do not press
any key.
When you see the Windows desktop, this means that the installation process is
completed. Remove the system recovery CD and install the device drivers and
applications from the system software Media.
148 Users Manual
If You Cannot Run Windows
If you cannot run Windows, you have to boot the system with the system recovery CD,
and reinstall Windows. If you boot the system from the system recovery CD, you can
install Windows only with the user installation option. You cannot install with the
standard installation option.
1. Insert the system recovery CD into the CD-ROM drive and start the computer.
2. If the following message appears on the screen, press any key from the keyboard.
Press any key to boot from CD.....
This message appears only when the CD drive has booting priority. If the
message does not appear, configure the CD drive as the first booting device
referring to ”Changing Booting Priority” on page 97.
3.
Do not press any key at this time. After a while the partition configuration screen
appears.
To not change the partition, press <Enter>.
4. Select the desired file system ( format ).
To maintain the current file system, press <Enter>.
5. Select the folder to install the Windows operating system.
To delete the previous version of Windows and install in the current folder, press
<L> on the keyboard.
6. After the installation process copies the necessary folders for the Windows
installation, restart the system, and the message “Press any key to boot from CD”
is displayed. You do not need to enter anything. In a moment, the Windows XP
installation screen will appear to proceed with the installation.
7. Follow the instructions of the Windows XP installation wizard to continue with the
installation.
8. When the installation is complete, the computer will restart.
When the system has restarted, the Press any key to boot from CD message
appears. Ignore the message.
The system boots and the Windows and Windows Registration screen appears.
Register Windows, following the instructions to finish the Windows installation.
Remove the System Recovery CD and install the device drivers and application
programs using Standard Installation from the System Software Media.
Troubleshooting 149
Specifications
System Specification
The system specifications will be described below. The system specifications may
differ depending on the derived models.
Item
Specification
Remarks
CPU
Intel Core ™ processor Duo
Intel Core ™ processor Solo
Intel Celeron M
Optional
Cache memory
2MB
Main memory
256MB / Max 4GB Memory type : DDR2 SODIMM
Optional
Main Chipset
Intel 945PM / 945GM , ICH7M
Optional
Hard disk drive (HDD)
9.5mmH 2.5" HDD
40GB/60GB/80GB/100GB/120GB
Optional
CD drive
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, RW-Combo, DVD Super Multi
Optional
Graphics
NVIDIA Geforce Go 7300/7400/7600 (64MB/128MB/256MB)
Intel 945GM Graphics (DVMT 64MB/128MB)
Optional
Sound
High Definition Audio Codec AD1986A
Network Interface
Modem: V.92
Wired LAN: Broadcom BCM5751M 1G+ASF
Broadcom BCM4401E 10/100
Wireless LAN: 802.11ABG
Bluetooth 2.0+EDR
Optional
Optional
Multi Card Slot
Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro, SD Card, MMC, xD card Supported
Optional
PC Card Slot
ExpressCard and PCMCIA Type I and, II Compatible
Ports
IEEE 1394 (4 Pin), USB 2.0 x 4, Microphone, Headphone(S/PDIF
supported), Modem(RJ-11), LAN(RJ-45), Monitor and TV Out(S-Video),
Serial Port, DC Jack, Security Lock Port, 120 Pin Dock Port, IrDA
Optional
Dimensions (mm)
329.8 x 272 x 30.7
WxDxH
LCD
15" XGA(1024x768), 15" SXGA+(1400x1050)
Optional
Weight
2.7Kg
Battery
Lithium-Ion smart battery: 6 Cells or 9 Cells
Operation
Environment
Temperature (storage) : -5 ~ 40°C (operation) : 10 ~ 32° C
Humidity (storage) : 5% ~ 90%
(operation) : 20% ~ 80%
Operation Voltage
100 - 240 VAC
Frequency
50 - 60 Hz
Output Power
60/90W
Output Voltage
19.0VDC
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
The system specifications are subject to change without notice. For detailed system specifications, refer to the product
catalog.
The capacity of the hard disk drive with Samsung Recovery Solution will be displayed as less than the specified
capacity.
150 Users Manual
Wireless LAN Specification (Optional)
Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection
Product Specification
Item
Physical
Specifications
Power Specification
Network
Specifications
Detailed Specifications
Dimensions
(Width X Height) 30.0 x 50.95 mm
operation temperature and
humidity
Same as system operation
Power Saving Mode
70 mW
Receiving Mode
0.95 W
Transmission Mode
1.4 W
Power
3.3V
Compatibility
IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP
- NDIS5 Miniport Driver
Media Access Protocol
CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with
Acknowledgement(ACK)
Security
Wired Equivalent Privacy support (WEP) 64bit / 128bit
WPA*, CCX*
Temperature: 0°C ~ 70°C
Humidity: less than 85%
* This piece of equipment supports the Wi-Fi wireless LAN security standard, WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) and
CCX (Cisco Compatible eXtensions). To connect to a wireless network consisting of the WPA and CCX,
certificates or PROSet may be required depending on the network settings. For driver update, visit
www.samsung.com and for information on the PROSet installation, refer to "Wireless Network Setup Using the
Wireless LAN Setup Program" (p70). For more information, ask your network administrator.
Radio Specifications
RF Band
2.4GHz, 5GHz
Support Channels
Channels allowed per country.
Device
Transceiver
Standard Output Power
5 mW
Transmission Method
11a mode: OFDM
11b mode: DSSS
11g mode: OFDM
Transmission Rate (Mbps) *
11a mode** : 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6
11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1
11g mode*** : 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6
Antenna Type
Internal Antenna 2 EA (Main/Aux)
* The transmission rate may differ from the actual transmission rate.
** 11a mode is supported only when the device is connected with an IEEE802.11a device (e.g. IEEE802.11a
compatible Access Point).
***11g mode is supported only when you are connected to an IEEE 802.11g device (e.g. An Access Point
supporting IEEE 802.11g).
Specifications 151
Abbreviations
A . . . . . . . . . Amperes
AC . . . . . . . . Alternating current
ACPI . . . . . . Advanced Configuration and Power management Interface
APM . . . . . . Advanced Power Management
ATA. . . . . . . AT attachment (refers to the hard-drive interface in an ATcompatible computer)
ATAPI. . . . . AT attachment packet interface
BBS . . . . . . . Bulletin board system
BIOS . . . . . . Basic input/output system
C . . . . . . . . . Centigrade
CD . . . . . . . . Compact disc
CD-ROM . . Compact disc read-only memory
cm . . . . . . . . Centimeters
COM . . . . . . Communication (as in communication port)
CMOS . . . . . Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
DC . . . . . . . . Direct current
DMA . . . . . . Direct memory access
DPMS . . . . . Display power-management signaling
DRAM. . . . . Dynamic random access memory
DSTN . . . . . Double layer super twist nematic
ECP . . . . . . . Extended capabilities port
EPP . . . . . . . Enhanced parallel port
g . . . . . . . . . . gram
G . . . . . . . . . Gravity
GB . . . . . . . . Gigabytes
hr . . . . . . . . . hour
Hz . . . . . . . . Hertz
IDE . . . . . . . Integrated drive electronics
I/O . . . . . . . . Input/output
IRQ . . . . . . . Interrupt request line
152 Users Manual
ISA . . . . . . . Industry Standard Architecture
KB . . . . . . . . Kilobytes
kg . . . . . . . . . Kilograms
LAN. . . . . . . Local-area network
lb.. . . . . . . . . Pounds
LBA . . . . . . . Logical block addressing
LCD. . . . . . . Liquid-crystal display
m . . . . . . . . . Meters
mA . . . . . . . . Milliampere
mAhr . . . . . . Milliampere hour
MB. . . . . . . . Megabyte
mm . . . . . . . millimeter
MPEG . . . . . Motion Picture Experts Group
MPU . . . . . . Microprocessor unit
ms . . . . . . . . Millisecond
PDF . . . . . . . Portable document format
PC . . . . . . . . Personal computer
PCI . . . . . . . Peripheral component interconnect
PCMCIA. . . Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
POST. . . . . . Power-on self-test
PNP . . . . . . . Plug and play
PS/2 . . . . . . . Personal System/2
RAM . . . . . . Random-access memory
ROM . . . . . . Read-only memory
SVGA . . . . . Super video graphics array
TFT . . . . . . . Thin-film transistor
USB . . . . . . . Universal serial bus
V . . . . . . . . . Volt
VAC . . . . . . Voltage alternating current
VCC . . . . . . Voltage collector current
VDC . . . . . . Voltage direct current
whr . . . . . . . Watt hour
Abbreviations 153
Glossary
AC adapter
The AC (or alternating current) adapter regulates current coming into your
computer from the wall outlet. The current at the wall outlet is alternating current
and needs to be changed by the adapter to DC (direct current) before your
computer can use it for power.
ACPI
ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface)- a method for describing
hardware interfaces in terms abstract enough to allow flexible and innovative
hardware implementations and concrete enough to allow shrink-wrap OS code to
use such hardware interfaces.
BIOS
BIOS stands for basic input/output system. The BIOS is software (often called
firmware) that is independent of any operating system. It enables the computer to
communicate with the screen, keyboard, and other peripheral devices without
using programs on the hard disk.
The BIOS on your computer is flash BIOS, which means that it has been recorded
on a flash memory chip that can be updated if needed.
Boot
To start your computer. A cold boot resets the entire computer and runs through
all computer self-tests. A warm boot clears out computer memory only.
Boot disk
A disk containing operating system programs required to start your computer. A
boot disk can be a floppy disk, hard drive, or compact disc.
Byte
The basic unit of measure for computer memory. A character—such as a letter of
the alphabet—uses one byte of memory. Computer memory is often measured in
kilobytes (1,024 bytes) or megabytes (1,048,576 bytes).
Each byte is made up of eight bits. For more information on bytes and bits, see an
introductory book on computers.
Cache memory
Cache is very fast, zero-wait-state memory located between the microprocessor
and main memory. Cache reduces the average time required by the
microprocessor to get the data it needs from the main memory by storing recently
accessed data in the cache.
154 Users Manual
CardBus
CardBus technology enables the computer to use 32-bit PC Cards. Hardware in
the computer and the Windows operating system provide support for the 32-bit
cards. The voltage of 32-bit cards (3.3 volts) is lower than that of 16-bit cards (5
volts). The 32-bit cards can transmit more data at a time than the 16-bit cards, thus
increasing their speed.
CMOS memory
CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor) memory is powered by the
CMOS battery. The System Setup settings and other parameters are maintained in
CMOS memory. Even when you turn your computer off, the information in
CMOS memory is saved.
COM port
COM stands for communication. COM ports are the serial ports in your computer.
Compact Disc
A compact disc (CD).
Conventional memory
The first 640 KB of system memory. Operating systems and application programs
can directly access this memory without using memory-management software.
Disk
The device used by the computer to store and retrieve information. Disk can refer
to a floppy disk, hard disk, or RAM disk.
Disk cache
A software device that accumulates copies of recently used disk sectors in RAM.
The application program can then read these copies without accessing the disk.
This, in turn, speeds up the performance of the application.
A cache is a buffer for transferring disk sectors in and out of RAM. Data stored in
a disk cache is a copy of data already stored on the physical disk.
DMA (direct memory access)
A method of transferring data from a device to memory without having the data
pass through the microprocessor. Using DMA can speed up system performance.
DPMS
Display Power Management Signalling. Displays or monitors that comply with
this can be managed by the Power Management features found in the system
setup.
Floppy disk
A removable disk, also called floppy or diskette.
Glossary 155
Hard drive
Also called fixed disk. A hard drive is connected to the computer and can be
installed or removed. Data written to a hard drive remains until it is overwritten
or corrupted.
The 2.5-inch hard drive in your computer was designed for use in a notebook
computer. Because hard drives in notebook computers are smaller than those in
desktop computers, their maximum storage capacity may be less than that of
desktop hard drives. However, because of their smaller size, the drives handle
shock and vibration better than larger drives, which is important for a notebook
computer.
I/O
Input/output. Refers to peripheral devices, such as printers, that are addressed
through an I/O address.
I/O address
I/O stands for input/output. Peripheral devices, such as printers, are addressed
through the I/O port address.
IRQ (interrupt request line)
The IRQ is a hardware line that a device uses to signal the microprocessor when
the device needs the microprocessor’s services. The number of IRQs is limited by
industry standards.
LCD (liquid-crystal display)
The LCD screen on your computer differs from the display screen of a desktop
monitor. Most desktop monitors use CRT (cathode-ray tube) displays, which
work by moving an electron beam across phosphor dots on the back of the screen.
The phosphor dots light up to show the image. LCDs use a liquid-crystal solution
between two sheets of polarizing material. Electric current passing through the
liquid aligns the crystals so that light can or cannot pass through them, creating an
image.
MB (megabyte)
1,024 kilobytes.
Megabit
1,048,576 bits or about 128 kilobytes.
Operating system
A program that supervises the computer's operation, including handling I/O.
Application programs and users can request operating-system services. A user
might request operation-system services to copy files or format a disk. An
application program might use the operating system to obtain keyboard input,
write data to a file, or write data to a screen.
156 Users Manual
PC Card
PC Card stands for personal computer card. The Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) defines the standards used to develop
all PC Cards. PC Card types include: modems, Ethernet adapters, SCSI adapters,
ATA cards, and memory cards.
PC slot
The PC slot is the hardware slot in the computer where the PC Card is placed.
Pixel
A pixel is an individual dot in a graphic displayed on your computer. The pixels
are so close together that they look as though they are connected. An LCD screen
displays thousands or millions of pixels.
Plug and Play
A plug and play operating system automatically configures computer components
to work with your system. With this type of operating system, you normally do
not need to set jumpers on devices or set memory addresses or IRQs.
RAM (random access memory)
The computer's system memory, including conventional and extended memory.
You can write to and read from RAM. Information stored in RAM is temporary,
and is erased when the system is turned off.
Refresh rate
The refresh rate is the rate at which the image on the LCD screen is rewritten to
the screen. A fast refresh rate helps keep the image from flickering.
Resolution
The resolution is the sharpness or clarity of the image on your LCD screen.
Resolution is measured by the number of pixels the computer’s screen can
display. For example, a resolution of 800 x 600 means that the screen can display
800 pixels in row and can display 600 rows. The more pixels displayed, the higher
the resolution and the better the image.
ROM (read-only memory)
Permanent computer memory dedicated to a particular function. For example, the
instructions for starting the computer when you first turn on power are contained
in ROM. You cannot write to ROM. (ROM is not the same as RAM).
Sector
Also known as disk sector. The portion of a track that is numbered and can hold
a specified number of characters (usually 512 KB).
Glossary 157
Shadow RAM
A write-protected area of RAM that contains a copy of the BIOS. As the computer
boots, the BIOS is copied from its permanent location in ROM to RAM. The
BIOS can be executed much faster in RAM than in ROM. The BIOS remains in
shadow RAM until you turn off the computer.
TFT (thin film transistor) LCD
A TFT LCD uses a separate transistor circuit to control each pixel. This
technology provides the best resolution for an LCD screen. A TFT LCD is also
sometimes called an active matrix LCD.
158 Users Manual
»ÃСÒÈ
ËéÒÁäÁèãËé·Ó«éÓÊèǹ˹Öè§Êèǹ㴢ͧàÍ¡ÊÒùÕé ºÑ¹·Ö¡äÇéã¹Ãкº·ÕèÊÒÁÒö¹Ó¡ÅѺÁÒãªéä´éãËÁè ËÃ×ÍÊ觵èÍä´éäÁèÇèÒ¨Ðà»ç¹ ÃٻẺ
ËÃ×ÍÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃã´æ äÁèÇèÒ¨Ðãªé¡Åä¡ ¡ÒöèÒÂàÍ¡ÊÒà ¡Òúѹ·Ö¡äÇéËÃ×Í´éÇÂÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃÍ×è¹æ â´ÂäÁèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃ͹Ø−Òµà»ç¹ÅÒÂÅѡɳìÍÑ¡ÉÃ
¨Ò¡ºÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµ
¢éÍÁÙÅ㹤ÙèÁ×͹ÕéÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§â´ÂäÁèµéͧá¨é§ãËé·ÃÒºÅèǧ˹éÒ
ºÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµäÁè¢ÍÃѺ¼Ô´ªÍºã¹¤ÇÒÁ¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´·Ò§à·¤¹Ô¤ËÃ×ͨҡ¡ÒÃá¡éä¢ËÃ×Í¡ÒâҴËÒÂ仢ͧà¹×éÍËÒ㹤ÙèÁ×͹Õé ÊÓËÃѺ¤ÇÒÁ
àÊÕÂÍÒ¨·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹ËÃ×Íà¡Ô´¢Öé¹ÀÒÂËÅѧ·Õèà»ç¹¼ÅÁÒ¨Ò¡
¡ÒûÃѺáµè§ »ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾ËÃ×Í¡ÒÃãªéàÍ¡ÊÒùÕé
Microsoft Windows ¤×Íà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒ¡ÒäéÒ¨´·ÐàºÕ¹¢Í§ Microsoft Corporation
ª×èͼÅÔµÀѳ±ìµèÒ§æ ·ÕèÃкØäÇéã¹·Õè¹Õé ãªéÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃÃкض֧à·èÒ¹Ñé¹áÅÐÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒáÅèÒǶ֧à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒ¡ÒäéÒ áÅÐ/ËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂ
¡ÒäéÒ¨´·ÐàºÕ¹¢Í§ºÃÔÉÑ·à¨éҢͧ¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì
»ÃСÒȨҡ Macrovision
ËÒ¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕä´Ã¿ì DVD áÅоÍÃìµá͹ÒÅçÍ¡ TV Out ãËé´Ù¢éÍÁÙŵèÍ仹Õé:
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÁÕà·¤â¹âÅÂÕ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃÅÐàÁÔ´ÅÔ¢ÊÔ·¸Ôì «Öè§ä´éÃѺ¡ÒäØéÁ¤Ãͧâ´Â¡ÃÃÁÇÔ¸Õ«Öè§ÁÕ¡Òè´·ÐàºÕ¹ÊÔ·¸ÔºÑµÃ áÅÐÁÕÊÔ·¸Ôã¹
·ÃѾÂìÊÔ¹·Ò§»Ñ−−ÒÍ×è¹æ ·Õèà»ç¹¢Í§ Macrovision Corporation áÅкؤ¤ÅÍ×è¹·Õèà»ç¹à¨éҢͧ ¡ÒÃãªéà·¤â¹âÅÂÕ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃÅÐàÁÔ´
ÅÔ¢ÊÔ·¸Ôì¹Õé¨Ðµéͧä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃ͹ØÁѵÔâ´Â Macrovision Corporation áÅÐãªéÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹ºéÒ¹ áÅСÒÃÃѺªÁÍÂèÒ§¨Ó¡Ñ´à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¡àÇé¹·Õèä´éÃѺ͹Ø−Òµâ´Â Macrovision Corporation ËéÒÁÂé͹¡Ãкǹ¡ÒüÅÔµËÃ×Ͷʹ»ÃСͺÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé
ÅÔ¢ÊÔ·¸Ôì 2003 ʧǹÅÔ¢ÊÔ·¸Ôì·Ñé§ËÁ´
»ÃСÒÈ i
¢éÍÁÙÅÊÓ¤Ñ−à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
¤Óá¹Ð¹Óà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
Ãкº¢Í§¤Ø³ä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÍ͡ẺáÅз´Êͺà¾×èÍãËéµÃ§µÒÁÁҵðҹÅèÒÊØ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ¢ͧÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊÒÃʹà·È
ÍÂèÒ§äáçµÒÁ à¾×èÍãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒ¨ÐãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéä´éÍÂèÒ§»ÅÍ´ÀÑ µéͧ·ÓµÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ·ÕèÃкØäÇé·Õè¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì
áÅÐã¹àÍ¡ÊÒäÙèÁ×Í·ÕèãËéÁÒ
¡ÃسҷӵÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓàËÅèÒ¹Õéà¾×èͪèÇ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃä´éÃѺºÒ´à¨çºáÅСÒÃà¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒ¡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì
i
¡ÒõԴµÑé§Ãкº
• ÍèÒ¹áÅл¯ÔºÑµÔµÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó·ÕèÃкØäÇé·Õè¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ìáÅÐã¹àÍ¡ÊÒäÙèÁ×Í¡è͹·Õè¨ÐàÃÔèÁãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ à¡çº¤Ó
á¹Ð¹Óà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂáÅФÓá¹Ð¹Ó㹡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¾×èÍãªéã¹Í¹Ò¤µ
•
•
•
•
ËéÒÁãªé¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì¹Õéã¡Åé¹éÓËÃ×ÍáËÅ觤ÇÒÁÃé͹àªè¹ ËÁé͹éÓ
µÔ´µÑé§à¤Ã×èͧº¹¾×é¹·ÕèÁÕ¼ÔÇÃÒº
µéͧãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¡ÑºáËÅ觨èÒÂä¿·ÕèÃкØäÇé㹩ÅÒ¡ÃкØáç´Ñ¹ä¿¿éÒà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
µÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒàµéÒàÊÕº俷Õè¤Ø³¨Ðãªé¨èÒÂä¿ãËé¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¶Ö§ä´é§èÒÂ㹡óշÕèà¡Ô´ä¿äËÁéËÃ×Íà¡Ô´¡ÒÃ
ÅѴǧ¨Ã
• ËÒ¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕÊÇÔµªìàÅ×Í¡áç´Ñ¹ä¿¿éÒ µÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒµÓá˹觢ͧÊÇÔµªìµÃ§¡ÑºµÓá˹觷Õè¶Ù¡µéͧ
• ªèͧà»Ô´ã¹à¤Ê¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìãªéÊÓËÃѺÃкÒÂÍÒ¡ÒÈ ËéÒÁ¡Õ´¢ÇÒ§ËÃ×ͻԴªèͧà»Ô´àËÅèÒ¹Õé µÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèҤسàµÃÕÂÁ
¾×é¹·ÕèäÇé¾Íà¾Õ§ ÍÂèÒ§¹é͵éͧàÇé¹ÃÐÂÐâ´ÂÃͺ 6 ¹ÔéÇ (15 ૹµÔàÁµÃ) Ãͺà¤Ã×èͧÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃÃкÒÂÍÒ¡ÒÈàÁ×èͤسµÔ´µÑé§
à¤Ã×èͧ
ËéÒÁÊÍ´Çѵ¶Øã´æ ŧ㹪èͧà»Ô´ÊÓËÃѺÃкÒÂÍÒ¡ÒȢͧà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìà»ç¹Íѹ¢Ò´
• µÃǨ´ÙÇèҾѴÅÁÃкÒÂÍÒ¡ÒÈ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§à¤ÊäÁè¶Ù¡»Ô´¡Ñé¹µÅÍ´àÇÅÒ ËéÒÁÇÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃ캹¾×é¹¼ÔÇ·Õè¹ØèÁ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡
¡Ò÷Óàªè¹¹Ñ鹨зÓãËéªèͧÃкÒÂÍÒ¡Òȶ١»Ô´¡Ñé¹
• ËÒ¡¤Ø³ãªé»ÅÑê¡ÊÒÁµÒà¾×è͵è͡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ ãËéµÃǨ´ÙÇèҨӹǹáÍÁá»ÃìÃÇÁ¢Í§¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ìµèÒ§æ ·ÕèàÊÕºŧ㹻ÅÑê¡
ÊÒÁµÒäÁèà¡Ô¹áÍÁá»ÃìÊÙ§ÊØ´¢Í§»ÅÑê¡·Õèãªé
ii Users Manual
¡ÒôÙáÅÃÐËÇèÒ§¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
• ËéÒÁàËÂÕºÊÒÂä¿ËÃ×ÍËéÒÁäÁèãËéÁÕÊÔ觢ͧÇÒ§·ÑºÊÒÂä¿
• ËéÒÁãËé¢Í§àËÅÇã´æ ˡôà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ ÇÔ¸Õ¡Ò÷Õè´Õ·ÕèÊش㹡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¢Í§Ë¡Ã´à¤Ã×èͧ¤×Í¡ÒÃäÁè
ÃѺ»ÃзҹÍÒËÒÃËÃ×Í´×èÁà¤Ã×èͧ´×èÁã¡Åéà¤Ã×èͧ
• à¤Ã×èͧºÒ§à¤Ã×èͧÍÒ¨ÁÕẵàµÍÃÕè CMOS ·ÕèÊÒÁÒö¶Í´à»ÅÕè¹ä´éº¹àÁ¹ºÍÃì´ ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´ÍѹµÃÒ¨ҡ¡ÒÃÃÐàºÔ´ä´é
•
•
ËÒ¡¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ẵàµÍÃÕè CMOS äÁè¶Ù¡µéͧ ãËéà»ÅÕè¹ẵàµÍÃÕèẺà´ÔÁËÃ×ÍẺ·Õèà·Õºà·èÒ
«Öè§ä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃá¹Ð¹Ó¨Ò¡ºÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµ
¡Ó¨Ñ´áºµàµÍÃÕèµÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó¢Í§ºÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµ ËÒ¡µéͧà»ÅÕè¹ẵàµÍÃÕè CMOS µéͧá¹èã¨ÇèÒ¼Ùé·Õè¨Ð·Ó¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ãËé
à»ç¹ªèÒ§·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¢³Ð·Õè»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì ¨ÐÂѧ¤§ÁÕ¡ÃÐáÊä¿¿éÒ»ÃÔÁÒ³àÅ硹éÍÂäËÅàÇÕ¹ÍÂÙèã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì à¾×èÍËÅÕ¡àÅÕ觡ÒÃ
à¡Ô´ä¿¿éÒªç͵ ãËé¶Í´»ÅÑê¡ÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅÍÍ¡·Ø¡¤ÃÑé§ ¶Í´áºµàµÍÃÕèáÅÐÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅâÁà´çÁ¨Ò¡àµéÒàÊÕº·Õ輹ѧ¡è͹
·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´à¤Ã×èͧ
¶Í´»ÅÑꡢͧà¤Ã×èͧÍÍ¡¨Ò¡àµéÒàÊÕº·Õ輹ѧáÅйÓ仫èÍÁ¡ÑºªèÒ§·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧËÒ¡:
– ÊÒÂä¿ËÃ×Í»ÅÑê¡à¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒÂ
– ÁբͧàËÅÇˡôà¤Ã×èͧ
– à¤Ã×èͧäÁèÊÒÁÒö·Ó§Ò¹µÒÁ»¡µÔ·Ñ駷Õèãªé§Ò¹µÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓáÅéÇ
– ·Óà¤Ã×èͧµ¡ËÃ×Íà¤Êä´éÃѺ¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒÂ
– »ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧà»ÅÕè¹ä»
¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé NotePC ÍÂèÒ§»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
1. ¢³ÐµÔ´µÑé§áÅÐãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì â»Ã´»¯ÔºÑµÔµÒÁ¢éÍ¡Ó˹´¢Í§¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
2. â»Ã´ãªé§Ò¹ÃèÇÁ¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÃкØäÇéã¹¢éÍÁÙŨÓà¾Òдéҹ෤¹Ô¤ÊÓËÃѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìà·èèÒ¹Ñé¹
3. ¢³Ðãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì â»Ã´»¯ÔºÑµÔµÒÁ¢éÍ¡Ó˹´àº×éͧµé¹
4. ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¡Ô´¢éͺ¡¾Ãèͧ (ÁÕ¡ÅÔè¹äËÁé ¤Çѹ ÏÅÏ) â»Ã´¶Í´»ÅÑê¡ä¿¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍÍ¡¨Ò¡áËÅ觨èÒÂ俷ѹ·Õ
áÅÐËéÒÁµèÍ»ÅÑê¡ä¿¨¹¡ÇèÒ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒëèÍÁá«Á
5. â»Ã´ãËéªèÒ§¼ÙéàªÕèÂǪÒ−¢Í§¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà»ç¹¼Ùé«èÍÁºÓÃاÍØ»¡Ã³ì
¼ÙéÍӹǡÒôéҹ෤¹Ô¤¢Í§ÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡ÒÃ
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ÍÐäËÅèáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ
ãªé੾ÒÐÍÐäËÅèáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃá¹Ð¹Óâ´Â¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¡ÒÃÅ´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕ觢ͧ¡ÒÃà¡Ô´ä¿ãËÁè ãËéãªé੾ÒÐÊÒÂÊ×èÍÊÒÃàºÍÃì 26 AWG ËÃ×ÍãË−è¡ÇèÒ
¢éÍÁÙÅÊÓ¤Ñ−à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ iii
ËéÒÁãªéà¤Ã×èͧ㹾×é¹·Õè·ÕèÃкØÇèÒÍÒ¨à¡Ô´ÍѹµÃÒÂä´é â´Â¾×é¹·Õè´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ ¤Ãͺ¤ÅØÁ¶Ö§¾×é¹·ÕèÊÓËÃѺ´ÙáżÙé»èÇÂ
ã¹âç¾ÂÒºÒÅËÃ×ͤÅÔ¹Ô¤·Ñ¹µ¡ÃÃÁ ÊÀÒÇзÕèÁÕÍÍ¡«ÔਹÁÒ¡ËÃ×Íã¹¾×é¹·Õè¢Í§âç§Ò¹ÍصÊÒË¡ÃÃÁ
Written by: Daryl L. Osden
¡ÒáӨѴẵàµÍÃÕè
ËéÒÁ·Ôé§áºµàµÍÃÕèẺªÒÃ쨻ÃШØãËÁèä´é ËÃ×ͼÅÔµÀѹ±ì·Õèãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºµàµÍÃÕèẺäÁèÊÒÁÒö
¶Í´à»ÅÕè¹ä´é»Ð»¹¡Ñº¢ÂÐÍ×è¹æ
µÔ´µèÍÊÒÂãËé¤Ó»ÃÖ¡ÉҢͧ Samsung (Samsung Helpline) ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙŶ֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒáӨѴẵàµÍÃÕè·Õè¤Ø³äÁèÊÒÁÒö
ãªé§Ò¹ËÃ×ͪÒÃ쨻ÃШØà¾ÔèÁä´éÍÕ¡
»¯ÔºÑµÔµÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤Ñºã¹¡ÒáӨѴẵàµÍÃÕèà¡èÒ
¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ㹡ÒÃãªéàÅà«ÍÃì
à¤Ã×èͧ·Ñé§ËÁ´·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ä´Ã¿ì CD ËÃ×Í DVD ·Õèä´éÁҵðҹ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀѵèÒ§æ ÃÇÁ·Ñé§ IEC 825 ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÅà«ÍÃìã¹à¤Ã×èͧ
àËÅèÒ¹Õé¨Ñ´à»ç¹ ÒÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÅà«ÍÃì ¤ÅÒÊ 1Ó µÒÁÁҵðҹ»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¡ÒÃá¼èÃѧÊբͧ US Department of Health and Human
Services (DHHS) ËÒ¡µéͧ«èÍÁÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ ãËéµÔ´µèÍÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡Ò÷Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃáµè§µÑé§
ËÁÒÂà˵Øà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ¢ͧàÅà«ÍÃì:
¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁµèÒ§æ ËÃ×Í¡ÒûÃѺµèÒ§æ ËÃ×Í»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀҾ㹡Ò÷ӧҹµèÒ§æ ¹Í¡¨Ò¡·Õèä´éÃкØäÇé㹤ÙèÁ×͹ÕéÍÒ¨
Ê觼ÅãËéà¡Ô´ÍѹµÃÒ¨ҡ¡ÒÃá¼èÃѧÊÕä´é à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒáÃШÒ¢ͧáʧàÅà«ÍÃì ËéÒÁ¾ÂÒÂÒÁà»Ô´ä´Ã¿ì CD ËÃ×Í
DVD
¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒÃà¡ÕèÂǡѺªØ´ÊÒÂä¿
ªØ´ÊÒÂä¿ (»ÅÑê¡àÊÕº¼¹Ñ§, à¤àºÔÅáÅлÅÑê¡ÍÐá´»àµÍÃì AC) ·Õè¤Ø³ä´éÃѺÁҡѺ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³µÃ§µÒÁ¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒÃÊÓËÃѺ
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹»ÃÐà·È·Õè¤Ø³«×éÍà¤Ã×èͧÁÒ
ªØ´ÊÒÂä¿ÊÓËÃѺãªéã¹»ÃÐà·ÈÍ×è¹æ µéͧµÃ§¡Ñº¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡Òâͧ»ÃÐà·È·Õè¤Ø³¨Ð¹Óà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìä»ãªé ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅ
à¾ÔèÁàµÔÁà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒâͧªØ´ÊÒÂä¿ â»Ã´µÔ´µè͵ÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃáµè§µÑ駢ͧ¤Ø³, ÃéÒ¹¤èÒËÃ×ÍÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡ÒÃ
¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡Ò÷ÑèÇä»
¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒõèÍ仹Õéãªéä´é¡Ñº·Ø¡»ÃÐà·È:
• ¤ÇÒÁÂÒǢͧªØ´ÊÒÂ俵éͧÁÕ¤ÇÒÁÂÒÇÍÂèÒ§¹éÍ 6.00 ¿Øµ (1.8 àÁµÃ) áÅФÇÒÁÂÒÇÊÙ§ÊØ´ 9.75 ¿Øµ (3.0 àÁµÃ)
• ªØ´ÊÒÂä¿·Ñé§ËÁ´µéͧä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧâ´ÂµÑÇá·¹·ÕèÃѺ¼Ô´ªÍºã¹¡ÒõÃǨÊͺ㹻ÃÐà·È«Ö觨ÐãªéªØ´ÊÒÂ俹Ñé¹
• ªØ´ÊÒÂ俵éͧÁÕ¤ÇÒÁ¨Ø¡ÃÐáÊä¿ÍÂèÒ§¹éÍ 7 áÍÁá»ÃìáÅÐáç´Ñ¹ä¿¿éÒÃÐºØ 125 ËÃ×Í 250 âÇŵì AC µÒÁ¤ÇÒÁ
µéͧ¡ÒâͧÃкºä¿¿éÒã¹»ÃÐà·È¹Ñé¹
iv Users Manual
• »ÅÑꡢͧÍØ»¡Ã³ìµéͧµÃ§µÒÁ¤Í¹¿Ô¡¡Ùàêѹ¢Í§Áҵðҹ EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C7 ÊÓËÃѺ¡Òûé͹ä¿
à¢éÒà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì
¢éÍÁÙÅÊÓ¤Ñ−à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ v
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ
¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃкºäÇÃìàÅÊ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃкº LAN Ê×èÍÊÒôéǤÅ×è¹ÇÔ·ÂØ ¾Åѧ§Ò¹µèÓ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒÃäÇÃìàÅÊ´éǤÅ×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ (RF)) ·Ó§Ò¹´éǤÇÒÁ¶Õè
2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì ÍÒ¨¾ºä´éã¹ à¤Ã×èͧâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ ÊèǹµèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢éÍÁÙÅ·ÑèÇä»·Õèµéͧ¾Ô¨ÒóÒàÁ×èÍãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
¢éͨӡѴà¾ÔèÁàµÔÁ, ¤Óàµ×͹áÅÐÊÔ觷Õèµéͧ¤Ó¹Ö§¶Ö§ÊÓËÃѺáµèÅлÃÐà·ÈÁÕ¡ÒÃáÊ´§äÇéã¹Êèǹ¢Í§áµèÅлÃÐà·È (ËÃ×ÍÊèǹ
¡ÅØèÁ»ÃÐà·È) ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³ãªéÊÓËÃѺ㹻ÃÐà·È·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃÃкصÒÁ©ÅÒ¡ÃѺÃͧ¡ÒÃãªéÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·ÂØ (Radio
Approval Marks) ·ÕèµÔ´äÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ ËÒ¡äÁè»ÃÒ¡¯ÃÒª×èͧ͢»ÃÐà·È·Õè¤Ø³¨Ð¹ÓÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊä»ãªé â»Ã´µÔ´µèÍ˹èǧҹ
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤Å×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØà¾×èÍÊͺ¶ÒÁ¢éÍÁÙÅ ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒäǺ¤ØÁÍÂèÒ§ã¡ÅéªÔ´áÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèä´éÃѺ
͹Ø−ÒµãËéãªé§Ò¹
à¾ÒàÇÍÃìàÍÒµì¾Øµ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÍÒ¨µÔ´µÑé§ÁÒã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ÁÕÃдѺ¡ÒÃÊ觤Å×è¹
¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ RF µèÓ¡ÇèÒ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´Áҵðҹ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ («Öè§ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÁÒã¹à¤Ã×èͧâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³) Êè§
¾Åѧ§Ò¹µèÓ¡ÇèÒÃдѺ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´ã¹Áҵðҹ¤Å×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ ºÃÔÉÑ·àª×èÍÁÑè¹ÇèÒÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ ¹Í¡¨Ò¡
ÃдѺ¾Åѧ§Ò¹áÅéÇ µéͧÃÐÁÑ´ÃÐÇѧà¾×èÍÅ´¡ÒÃÊÑÁ¼ÑʡѺÃèÒ§¡Ò¢³Ðãªé§Ò¹µÒÁ»¡µÔ
´Ñ§¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó·ÑèÇä» ¤ÇÃàÇé¹ÃÐÂÐ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊáÅÐÃèÒ§¡Ò ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì
äÇÃìàÅÊã¡ÅéÃèÒ§¡Ò (äÁèÃÇÁÃдѺÊÙ§ÊØ´) «Öè§à»ç¹»¡µÔ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Öé¤ÇÃÍÂÙèËèÒ§ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂà¡Ô¹ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ¨Ò¡ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂ
àÁ×èÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ·Ó¡ÒÃÃѺÊ觢éÍÁÙÅ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃѺÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³¹ÕéµéͧäÁè·Ó§Ò¹ã¡Åé¡ÑºàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧÃѺÊè§Í×è¹
ʶҹ¡ÒóìºÒ§»ÃÐàÀ··ÕèËéÒÁãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ µÑÇÍÂèÒ§¡ÒÃËéÒÁãªéÁÕ¡ÒÃáÊ´§äÇéã¹ÊèǹµèÍ仹Õé:
¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒäÅ×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØÍҨú¡Ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìº¹ÊÒ¡ÒúԹ¾Ò³ÔªÂì ¢éͺѧ¤Ñº¡ÒúԹ㹻Ѩ¨ØºÑ¹ ¡Ó˹´
ãËé»Ô´ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ¢³Ðà´Ô¹·Ò§ã¹à¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹ ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒà 802.11B (ËÃ×ÍàÃÕ¡ÇèÒ wireless Ethernet ËÃ×Í Wifi)
áÅкÅٷٸ (Bluetooth) à»ç¹µÑÇÍÂèÒ§¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒÃẺäÇÃìàÅÊ
vi Users Manual
ã¹ÊÀÒÇÐáÇ´ÅéÍÁ·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´ÍѹµÃÒÂ㹡ÒÃú¡ÇáÒ÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹ ËÃ×Í¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéà¡Ô´
ÍѹµÃÒÂËÃ×Íä´éÃѺÍѹµÃÒ ÍÒ¨¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃÃкءÒèӡѴ¡ÒÃãªéËÃ×ÍËéÒÁãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ Ê¹ÒÁºÔ¹, âç¾ÂÒºÒÅ
áÅо×é¹·Õè·ÕèÁÕÍÍ¡«ÔਹáÅÐá¡êÊ·ÕèµÔ´ä¿ä´é¤×͵ÑÇÍÂèҧʶҹ·Õè·ÕèÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒèӡѴ¡ÒÃãªéËÃ×ÍËéÒÁãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
àÁ×èÍÍÂÙèã¹ÊÀÒÇÐáÇ´ÅéÍÁ·Õè¤Ø³äÁèá¹èã¨ã¹¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ ãËéÊͺ¶ÒÁà¨éÒ˹éÒ·Õè¡è͹¡ÒÃà»Ô´ãªé§Ò¹
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
ã¹áµèÅлÃÐà·È¨ÐÁÕ¢éͨӡѴ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ·ÕèᵡµèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä» à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÁÒ
¾ÃéÍÁ¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ àÁ×èͤسà´Ô¹·Ò§ä»µèÒ§»ÃÐà·Èâ´Â¹Óà¤Ã×èͧ仴éÇ ãËéµÃǨÊͺ¡ÑºË¹èǧҹ
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒÃÇÔ·ÂØã¹¾×é¹·ÕèÊÓËÃѺ¢éͨӡѴ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊã¹»ÃÐà·È¹Ñé¹æ
㹡óշÕèà¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊäÇéÀÒÂã¹à¤Ã×èͧ ËéÒÁà»Ô´ãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ â´Â·Õè½Ò¤Ãͺà¤Ã×èͧ
áÅеÑÇà¤Ã×èͧ»ÃСͺ¡Ñ¹ÍÂÙèµÒÁ»¡µÔ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊäÁèÊÒÁÒö«èÍÁá«Áä´éâ´Â¼Ùéãªé ËéÒÁ·Ó¡ÒÃá¡éä¢äÁèÇèҡóÕã´æ ¡ÒôѴá»Å§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
¨Ð·ÓãËéÊÔé¹ÊØ´¡ÒÃ͹Ø−ÒµãËéãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ ¡ÃسҵԴµèͺÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà¾×èÍÃѺ¡ÒëèÍÁá«Á
ãªé੾ÒÐä´ÃàÇÍÃì·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧÊÓËÃѺ»ÃÐà·È·Õè¨ÐãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹à·èÒ¹Ñé¹ ´Ù¤ÙèÁ×͵ԴµÑé§Ãкº¢Í§ºÃÔÉÑ·
¼Ùé¼ÅÔµËÃ×͵ԴµèͽèÒÂʹѺʹع·Ò§à·¤¹Ô¤¢Í§ºÃÔÉÑ·ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàµÔÁ
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ vii
»ÃÐà·ÈÊËÃÑ°ÍàÁÃÔ¡Ò
¢éÍ¡Ó˹´áÅлÃСÒÈ´éÒ¹¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ¢ͧÊËÃÑ°ÍàÁÃÔ¡ÒáÅÐ᤹ҴÒ
ËéÒÁÊÑÁ¼ÑÊËÃ×Íà¤Å×è͹ÂéÒÂàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ¢³Ð·ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ì¡ÓÑÅѧÃѺÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³
ËéÒÁ¶×Íͧ¤ì»ÃСͺ㴷ÕèÁÕÇÔ·ÂØ â´ÂãËéàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈÍÂÙèã¡ÅéËÃ×ÍÊÑÁ¼ÑʡѺÃèÒ§¡Ò â´Â੾ÒÐãºË¹éÒËÃ×ʹǧµÒ
¢³Ð·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³
ËéÒÁãªéÇÔ·ÂØËÃ×;ÂÒÂÒÁÊ觢éÍÁÙÅ ËÒ¡äÁèä´éµèÍàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ ÁԩйÑé¹ ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÇÔ·ÂØÍÒ¨àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
ãªéã¹ÊÀÒ¾áÇ´ÅéÍÁ·ÕèÃкØà·èÒ¹Ñé¹:
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒÂã¹¾×é¹·Õè«Öè§ÁÕÍѹµÃÒ¨ÐÁÕ¢éͨӡѴµÒÁ·Õè¼ÙéÍӹǡÒýèÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ¢ͧáµèÅÐʶҹ·ÕèÃкØäÇé
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒÂã¹à¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹¨ÐÍÂÙèã¹ÍÓ¹Ò¨¢Í§ Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒÂã¹âç¾ÂÒºÒŨÐÁÕ¢éͨӡѴµÒÁ·Õèâç¾ÂÒºÒÅáµèÅÐáË觡Ó˹´
¡ÒÃãªéàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ:
à¾×èÍãËéÊÍ´¤Åéͧ¡Ñº¢éͨӡѴ¡ÒÃä´éÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·Âآͧ FCC àÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈã¹µÑǪ¹Ô´ÊÑ鹨еéͧÍÂÙèã¹ÃÐÂеèÓÊØ´ 20 «Á. (8 ¹ÔéÇ)
¨Ò¡ÃèÒ§¡Ò¢ͧºØ¤¤Å·Ñé§ËÁ´ã¹ºÃÔàdz
àÊÒÍÒ¡ÒȪ¹Ô´ÊÙ§ µÔ´¼¹Ñ§ ËÃ×͵ԴàÊÒ ä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÍ͡Ẻà¾×èÍãËéµÔ´µÑé§â´ÂªèÒ§¼ÙéªÓ¹Ò− áÅФÇÃÁÕÃÐÂÐÍÂèÒ§¹éÍ 30 «Á. (12 ¹ÔéÇ)
¨Ò¡ÃèÒ§¡Ò¢ͧºØ¤¤Å·Ñé§ËÁ´ â»Ã´µÔ´µèͪèÒ§µÔ´µÑ駼ÙéªÓ¹Ò−§Ò¹ VAR
ËÃ×ͼÙé¼ÅÔµàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈà¾×èÍ·ÃÒº¢éÍ¡Ó˹´¡ÒõԴµÑ駷ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁ
¤Óàµ×͹à¡ÕèÂǡѺÃÐÂÐËèÒ§¨Ò¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèà»ç¹Çѵ¶ØÃÐàºÔ´
ËéÒÁãªéà¤Ã×èͧÊè§áºº¾¡¾Ò (àªè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒÂ) ã¡Åé¡ÑºÇѵ¶ØÃÐàºÔ´·ÕèäÁèÁÕ¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹
ËÃ×Íã¹ÊÀÒÇÐáÇ´ÅéÍÁ·ÕèäǵèÍ¡ÒÃÃÐàºÔ´ ¡àÇé¹·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒôѴá»Å§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¾×èÍãËéàËÁÒÐÊÁ¡Ñº¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
¤Óàµ×͹ÊÓËÃѺàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ
à¾×èÍãËéà»ç¹ä»µÒÁ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´¡ÒÃÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·Âآͧ FCC áÅÐ ANSI C95.1 ¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËéµÔ´µÑé§ Intel? PRO/Wireless
Network Connections 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìà´Ê¡ì·Í»ËÃ×ÍẺ¾¡¾Ò
â´ÂãËéàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒȢͧÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍÂÙèËèÒ§ÍÍ¡ä»ÍÂèÒ§¹éÍ 20 «Á. (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ¨Ò¡ºØ¤¤Å·Ñé§ËÁ´
áÅÐàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒȨеéͧäÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃèÇÁ ËÃ×Íãªé§Ò¹¼ÊÒ¹¡ÑºàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·ÂØÍ×è¹
¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËé¼Ùéãªé¨Ó¡Ñ´àÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ ËÒ¡àÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈÍÂÙèã¡Åéà¡Ô¹¡ÇèÒ 20 «Á. (8 ¹ÔéÇ)
¢éͤÇÃÃÐÇѧ㹡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹ÍÒ¡ÒÈÂÒ¹
¢éͤÇÃÃÐÇѧ: ÃÐàºÕº¢Í§ FCC áÅÐ FAA ËéÒÁ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒ·Õèãªé¤ÇÒÁ¶Õè¢Í§ÇÔ·ÂØ¢³Ðà´Ô¹·Ò§·Ò§ÍÒ¡ÒÈ
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÊÑ−−Ò³¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍҨú¡Ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊÓ¤Ñ−¢Í§ÍÒ¡ÒÈÂÒ¹ä´é
viii Users Manual
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒÂÍ×è¹æ
»ÃСÒÈà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂÊÓËÃѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹æ ã¹à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒÂ:
â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹àÍ¡ÊÒ÷ÕèÁÒ¾ÃéÍÁ¡ÑºÍÐá´»àµÍÃìÍÕà¸ÍÃìà¹çµäÃéÊÒ ËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹æ ã¹à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒÂ
¤Óàµ×͹: ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÇÔ·ÂØ Part 15 ¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹â´ÂäÁèÁÕÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹ã¹ªèǧ¤ÇÒÁ¶Õèà´ÕÂǡѹ
¡ÒÃá¡éä¢ËÃ×Í´Ñ´á»Å§¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ ·ÕèäÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃ͹ØÁѵÔÍÂèÒ§ªÑ´à¨¹â´Â Intel
ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéÊÔ·¸Ôì㹡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì¢Í§¼Ùéãªéà»ç¹âÁ¦Ð
Unintentional Emitter ¢Í§ FCC Êèǹ 15
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµÃ§µÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºÊèǹ 15 ¢Í§ FCC ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹µéͧà»ç¹ä»µÒÁà§×è͹䢵èÍ仹Õé: (1) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁè·ÓãËéà¡Ô´
ÍѹµÃÒ¨ҡÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹áÅÐ (2) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµéͧÊÒÁÒöÃѺÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹ä´é ÃÇÁ·Ñé§ÊÑ−−Ò³
ú¡Ç¹·ÕèÍÒ¨Ê觼ŵèÍ¡Ò÷ӧҹ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéä´é¼èÒ¹¡Ò÷´ÊͺáÅеçµÒÁ¢éͨӡѴ¤ÅÒÊ B ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔµÍÅ µÒÁÊèǹ·Õè 15 ¢Í§¡® FCC ¢éͨӡѴ
àËÅèÒ¹Õéä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÍ͡Ẻà¾×èÍãËé¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁà¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹·ÕèÍÒ¨à»ç¹ÍѹµÃÒÂ
ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹·Õè¾Ñ¡ÍÒÈÑ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÊÃéÒ§áÅÐãªé§Ò¹¾Åѧ§Ò¹¤Å×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØáÅÐËÒ¡äÁèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃ
µÔ´µÑé§áÅÐãªé§Ò¹µÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓÍÒ¨·ÓãËéà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹·ÕèÍÒ¨à»ç¹ÍѹµÃÒÂ
áµè¨ÐäÁèà¡Ô´¢Öé¹ã¹¡ÒõԴµÑ駵ÒÁ»¡µÔ ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé·ÓãËéà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹µèÍ¡ÒÃÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·ÂØËÃ×Íâ·Ã·Ñȹì
«Öè§ÊÒÁÒöµÃǨÊͺä´éâ´Â¡ÒûԴáÅÐà»Ô´ÍØ»¡Ã³ì áÅÐá¹Ð¹ÓãËéá¡éä¢ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹â´ÂÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒõèÍ仹Õé:
• ¨Ñ´ÇÒ§ËÃ×ÍÂéÒµÓá˹觢ͧàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ
• à¾ÔèÁÃÐÂÐËèÒ§ÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÅÐÀÒ¤ÃѺ
• µèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¢éҡѺàµéÒàÊÕº·Õèᡨҡ·ÕèãªéàÊÕºÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³
• »ÃÖ¡ÉÒµÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒÂËÃ×ͪèÒ§ÇÔ·ÂØ/â·Ã·Ñȹì·ÕèÁÕ»ÃÐʺ¡Òóìà¾×èͤ͢Óá¹Ð¹Ó
㹡óշÕè¨Óà»ç¹ ¼ÙéãªéÍÒ¨µéͧ»ÃÖ¡ÉÒµÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒÂËÃ×ͪèÒ§ÇÔ·ÂØ/â·Ã·Ñȹìà¾×èͤ͢Óá¹Ð¹Ó ¼ÙéãªéÍÒ¨¾ºÇèÒ¤ÙèÁ×Í
àËÅèÒ¹ÕéÁÕ»ÃÐ⪹ì: "à¡ÕèÂǡѺÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹" «Öè§ÊÒÁÒö¢ÍÃѺä´é·ÕèÊӹѡ§Ò¹à¡ÕèÂǡѺ FCC ã¹¾×é¹·Õè ºÃÔÉÑ·Ï äÁè¢Í
ÃѺ¼Ô´ªÍºÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹µèÍÇÔ·ÂØËÃ×Íâ·Ã·ÑÈ¹ì ·Õèà¡Ô´¨Ò¡¡ÒôѴá»Å§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìâ´ÂäÁèä´éÃѺ͹Ø−Òµ ¡ÒûÃѺ
à»ÅÕè¹ËÃ×͵èÍÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅàª×èÍÁµè͡ѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹æ ·ÕèºÃÔÉÑ·äÁèä´éÃкØäÇé ¼ÙéãªéµéͧÃѺ¼Ô´ªÍºã¹¡ÒÃá¡é䢴éǵ¹àͧ ãªé੾ÒÐÊÒÂ
à¤àºÔÅ¢éÍÁÙÅ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒêÕÅ´ì¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
Written by: Daryl L. Osden
intentional Emitter ¢Í§ FCC Êèǹ 15
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃкº LAN Ê×èÍÊÒôéǤÅ×è¹ÇÔ·ÂØ ¾Åѧ§Ò¹µèÓ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒÃäÇÃìàÅÊ´éǤÅ×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ (RF)) ·Ó§Ò¹´éǤÇÒÁ¶Õè
2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì ÍÒ¨¾ºä´éã¹à¤Ã×èͧâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ ãªé¢éÍÁÙÅÊèǹ¹Õé㹡óշÕèÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ àËÅèÒ¹Õéà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ â»Ã´´Ù¨Ò¡©ÅÒ¡¢Í§
à¤Ã×èͧà¾×è͵ÃǨÊͺà¡ÕèÂǡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ·ÕèÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§äÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ãªéÊÓËÃѺ㹻ÃÐà·ÈÊËÃÑ°ÍàÁÃÔ¡ÒËÒ¡ÁÕËÁÒÂàÅ¢ FCC ID
·Õè©ÅÒ¡¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
FCC ¡Ó˹´ãËéàÇé¹ÃÐÂÐ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊáÅÐÃèÒ§¡Ò ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊã¡ÅéÃèÒ§¡ÒÂ
(äÁèÃÇÁÃдѺÊÙ§ÊØ´) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹é¤Ö ÇÃÍÂÙèËèÒ§ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂà¡Ô¹ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ¨Ò¡ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂàÁ×èÍà»Ô´ãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
à¾ÒàÇÍÃìàÍÒµì¾Øµ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÍÒ¨µÔ´µÑé§ÁÒã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ÁÕÃдѺ¡ÒÃÊ觤Å×è¹
¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ RF µèÓ¡ÇèÒ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´Áҵðҹ
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ ix
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃѺÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³¹ÕéµéͧäÁè·Ó§Ò¹ã¡Åé¡ÑºàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧÃѺÊè§Í×è¹
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéµéͧà»ç¹ä»µÒÁà§×è͹ä¢Êͧ»ÃСÒõèÍ仹Õé: (1) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁè·ÓãËéà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹·Õèà»ç¹ÍѹµÃÒÂáÅÐ
(2) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÊÒÁÒöÃѺÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹ã´æ ÃÇÁ·Ñé§ÊÑ−−Ò³·ÕèÍÒ¨Ê觼ŵèÍ¡Ò÷ӧҹ·ÕèäÁè¾Ö§»ÃÐʧ¤ì¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéä´é
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊäÁèÊÒÁÒö«èÍÁá«Áä´éâ´Â¼Ùéãªé ËéÒÁ·Ó¡ÒÃá¡éä¢äÁèÇèҡóÕã´æ ¡ÒôѴá»Å§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
¨Ð·ÓãËéÊÔé¹ÊØ´¡ÒÃ͹Ø−ÒµãËéãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ µÔ´µèͺÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà¾×èÍÃѺ¡ÒëèÍÁá«Á
»ÃСÒÈ FCC SÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ Wireless LAN:
"¢³ÐµÔ´µÑé§áÅÐãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³¹ÕéáÅÐàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈÃÇÁ·Ñ駡ÒÃÊ觤Å×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØÁÕ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´·Õè 1mW/cm2
ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¤èÒÊÙ§à¡Ô¹¡ÇèÒ¡Ó˹´ËÒ¡ÁÕÃÐÂÐÃÐËÇèÒ§àÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ·ÕèÊÑé¹à¡Ô¹ä» ´Ñ§¹Ñé¹ ¼Ùéãªé¨Ö§¤ÇÃÃÑ¡ÉÒÃÐÂÐËèÒ§äÇéÍÂèÒ§¹éÍÂ
20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ¨Ò¡àÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈäÇéµÅÍ´àÇÅÒ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁèÊÒÁÒöãªéÃèÇÁ¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³áÅÐàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈÍ×è¹æ"
FCC Êèǹ 68
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµÃ§µÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤Ñº¢Í§ FCC ´éÒ¹ËÅѧà¤Ã×èͧ¨ÐÁÕ©ÅÒ¡·ÕèÁÕ¢éÍÁÙÅÃкØËÁÒÂàÅ¢ FCC áÅÐËÁÒÂàÅ¢ Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) äÇéÃÇÁ¡Ñº¢éÍÁÙÅÍ×è¹æ 㹺ҧ¡Ã³Õ ÍÒ¨µéͧãËé¢éÍÁÙŹÕé¡ÑººÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ì
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéãªéá¨ç¤ USOC µèÍ仹Õé : RJ11C
ÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìáÅлÅÑ¡ê µè͵ÒÁÁҵðҹ FCC ÁÕÁÒãËé¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÍ͡Ẻà¾×èÍàª×èÍÁµè͡Ѻà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
â·ÃÈѾ·ìËÃ×Í¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍ·Õèãªéá¨ç¤âÁ´ÙÅÒÃì«Ö觵çµÒÁÁҵðҹÊèǹ 68 ´ÙÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´¨Ò¡¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒõԴµÑé§
REN ãªéÊÓËÃѺµÃǨÊͺ¨Ó¹Ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁµè͡ѺÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìä´é ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍà¡Ô¹¡ÇèÒ REN ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¡ÃÔè§â·ÃÈѾ·ì
äÁè´Ñ§àÁ×èÍÁÕÊÒÂàÃÕ¡à¢éÒ ÊèǹãË−è áµèäÁè·Ø¡¾×é¹·Õè ¨Ó¹Ç¹ÃÇÁ¢Í§ REN äÁè¤ÇÃà¡Ô¹ËéÒ (5.0) ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒõÃǨÊͺ¨Ó¹Ç¹
·Õèá¹è¹Í¹¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁµè͡ѺÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìä´é µÒÁ·ÕèÃкØ㹨ӹǹ REN ÃÇÁ â»Ã´µÔ´µèͺÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ìã¹
¾×é¹·Õèà¾×è͵ÃǨÊͺ¨Ó¹Ç¹ REN ÊÙ§ÊØ´·ÕèÊÒÁÒöãªéä´éÊÓËÃѺ¾×é¹·Õè¹Ñé¹æ
ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà·ÍÃìÁÔ¹ÑÅ·ÓãËéà¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒ¡Ѻà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ì ºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ì¨Ðá¨é§ãËé¤Ø³·ÃÒºÅèǧ˹éÒÇèÒÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕ
¡ÒÃãËéºÃÔ¡ÒêÑèǤÃÒÇ áµèËÒ¡äÁèÊÒÁÒöá¨é§àµ×͹Åèǧ˹éÒ ºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ì¨Ðá¨é§ãËéÅÙ¡¤éÒ·ÃÒºâ´ÂàÃçÇ·ÕèÊØ´à·èÒ·Õè¨Ð·Óä´é
áÅФس¨Ðä´éÃѺ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óã¹ÊÔ·¸Ô¢Í§¤Ø³·Õè¨ÐÊ觤ÇÒÁ¤Ô´àËç¹ä»Âѧ FCC ËÒ¡¤Ø³¤Ô´ÇèÒ¨Óà»ç¹
ºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ìÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§à¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í ÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ ¡Ò÷ӧҹËÃ×Í¡Ãкǹ¡Ò÷ÕèÍÒ¨Ê觼šÃзºµèÍ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì
ä´é ËÒ¡à¡Ô´¡Ã³Õ¹Õé¢Öé¹ ºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ì¨Ðá¨é§ãËé·ÃÒºÅèǧ˹éÒà¾×èÍãËé¤Ø³·Ó¡ÒûÃѺá¡é·Õè¨Óà»ç¹ à¾×èÍãËéÊÒÁÒöÃѺºÃÔ¡ÒÃ
ä´éÍÂèÒ§µèÍà¹×èͧ
ËÒ¡à¡Ô´»Ñ−ËҡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé (âÁà´çÁ) ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒëèÍÁáÅСÒÃÃѺ»ÃСѹ â»Ã´µÔ´µè͵ÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒÂã¹¾×é¹·Õè
ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé·ÓãËéà¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒ¡Ѻà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ì ºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ìÍÒ¨¢ÍãËé¤Ø³àÅÔ¡àª×èÍÁµèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì ¨¹¡ÇèÒ¨Ðá¡éä¢
»Ñ−ËÒä´é
¼ÙéãªéµéͧãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ ·Õèä´éÃѺ¨Ò¡ºÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà¾×èÍãËéä´é»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾ÊÙ§ÊØ´¨Ò¡¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
ËéÒÁ¼Ùéãªé·Ó¡ÒëèÍÁá«Áã´æ ´éǵ¹àͧ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁèÊÒÁÒöãªéä´é¡Ñºâ·ÃÈѾ·ìËÂÍ´àËÃÕÂ−ÊÒ¸ÒóзÕèãËéºÃÔ¡ÒÃâ´ÂºÃÔÉÑ·â·ÃÈѾ·ì ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍä»Âѧ¡ÒûÃЪØÁÊÒÂ
µéͧàÊÕ¤èÒºÃÔ¡ÒõÒÁÍѵÃÒã¹ÃÑ°¹Ñé¹æ
¾Ãº.à¾×èÍ¡Òû¡»éͧ¼ÙéºÃÔâÀ¤à¡ÕèÂǡѺºÃÔ¡ÒÃâ·ÃÈѾ·ì (Telephone Consumer Protection Act) »Õ 1991 ·ÓãËéà»ç¹¡ÒüԴ¡®ËÁÒÂ
ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍÔàÅç¡·Ã͹ԡÊìÍ×è¹æ ÃÇÁ·Ñé§à¤Ã×èͧῡ«ì à¾×èÍÊ觢éͤÇÒÁã´æ ¹Í¡¨Ò¡¢éͤÇÒÁ¹Ñé¹
ÁÕÊèǹ¢Íºº¹áÅÐÅèÒ§·ÕèªÑ´à¨¹ã¹áµèÅÐ˹éÒ·ÕèÊè§ Çѹ·ÕèáÅÐàÇÅÒ·ÕèÊè§áÅСÒÃÃкت×èͺÃÔÉÑ·ËÃ×ÍÍ×è¹æ ËÃ×ͼÙéÊ觢éͤÇÒÁáÅÐ
ËÁÒÂàÅ¢â·ÃÈѾ·ì·ÕèãªéÊè§àªè¹ ºÃÔÉÑ·ËÃ×Í¢éÍÁÙÅÍ×è¹æ ËÃ×Í¢éÍÁÙźؤ¤Å (ËÁÒÂàÅ¢â·ÃÈѾ·ì·ÕèÃкØÍÒ¨äÁèãªèËÁÒÂàÅ¢·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒäԴ¤èÒ
ºÃÔ¡ÒÃà¡Ô¹áººã¹¾×é¹·ÕèËÃ×ÍẺ·Ò§ä¡Å)
x Users Manual
à¾×è͵Ñé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¢éÍÁÙÅàËÅèÒ¹Õéŧã¹à¤Ã×èͧâ·ÃÊÒâͧ¤Ø³ â»Ã´´Ù¤ÙèÁ×ͧ͢«Í¿µìáÇÃì¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒ÷Õèãªé
᤹ҴÒ
Unintentional Emitter per ICES-003
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔµÍŹÕéäÁèà¡Ô¹¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´¤ÅÒÊ B Ê−ÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃÊè§ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹ÇÔ·ÂبҡÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔµÍŵÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤Ñº
ÇèÒ´éÇ¡ÒÃÊè§ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹¢Í§ÇÔ·ÂصÒÁÁҵðҹÍصÊÒË¡ÃÃÁã¹á¤¹Ò´Ò
Le prŽsent appareil numŽrique nÕŽmet pas de bruits radioŽlectriques dŽpassant les
limitesapplicables aux appareils numŽriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le
brouillage radioŽlectrique ŽdictŽ par Industrie Canada.
Intentional Emitter per RSS 210
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃкº LAN Ê×èÍÊÒôéǤÅ×è¹ÇÔ·ÂØ ¾Åѧ§Ò¹µèÓ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒÃäÇÃìàÅÊ´éǤÅ×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ (RF)) ·Ó§Ò¹´éǤÇÒÁ¶Õè
2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì ÍÒ¨¾ºä´éã¹ à¤Ã×èͧâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ ãªé¢éÍÁÙÅÊèǹ¹Õé㹡óշÕèÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ àËÅèÒ¹Õéà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ â»Ã´´Ù¨Ò¡©ÅÒ¡
¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧà¾×è͵ÃǨÊͺà¡ÕèÂǡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ·ÕèÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§äÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ãªéÊÓËÃѺ㹻ÃÐà·È᤹ҴÒËÒ¡ÁÕËÁÒÂàÅ¢ Industry Canada ID
·Õè©ÅÒ¡¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
´Ñ§¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó·ÑèÇä» ¤ÇÃàÇé¹ÃÐÂÐ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊáÅÐÃèÒ§¡Ò ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊã¡Åé
ÃèÒ§¡Ò (äÁèÃÇÁÃдѺÊÙ§ÊØ´) «Öè§à»ç¹»¡µÔ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Öé¤ÇÃÍÂÙèËèÒ§ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂà¡Ô¹ 20 ૹµÔàÁµÃ (8 ¹ÔéÇ) ¨Ò¡ÃèÒ§¡ÒÂàÁ×èÍà»Ô´ãªé
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
à¾ÒàÇÍÃìàÍÒµì¾Øµ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÍÒ¨µÔ´µÑé§ÁÒã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ÁÕÃдѺ¡ÒÃÊ觤Å×è¹
¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ RF µèÓ¡ÇèÒ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´Áҵðҹ·Õè¡Ó˹´â´Â Industry Canada
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃѺÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³¹ÕéµéͧäÁè·Ó§Ò¹ã¡Åé¡ÑºàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧÃѺÊè§Í×è¹
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéµéͧà»ç¹ä»µÒÁà§×è͹ä¢Êͧ»ÃСÒõèÍ仹Õé: (1) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁè·ÓãËéà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹·Õèà»ç¹ÍѹµÃÒÂáÅÐ
(2) ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÊÒÁÒöÃѺÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹ã´æ ÃÇÁ·Ñé§ÊÑ−−Ò³·ÕèÍÒ¨Ê觼ŵèÍ¡Ò÷ӧҹ·ÕèäÁè¾Ö§»ÃÐʧ¤ì¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéä´é
à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃà¡Ô´¡ÒÃú¡Ç¹ÊÑ−−Ò³ÇÔ·ÂØ㹡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÍ͡ẺãËéãªéã¹ÍÒ¤ÒÃáÅÐËèÒ§¨Ò¡
˹éÒµèÒ§à¾×èÍãËé¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹ÊÙ§ÊØ´ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì (ËÃ×ÍàÊÒÍÒ¡ÒÈ) ·ÕèµÔ´µÑ駹͡ÍÒ¤Òà µéͧä´éÃѺ͹Ø−ÒµàÊÕ¡è͹
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊäÁèÊÒÁÒö«èÍÁá«Áä´éâ´Â¼Ùéãªé ËéÒÁ·Ó¡ÒÃá¡éä¢äÁèÇèҡóÕã´æ ¡ÒôѴá»Å§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
¨Ð·ÓãËéÊÔé¹ÊØ´¡ÒÃ͹Ø−ÒµãËéãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ µÔ´µèͺÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà¾×èÍÃѺ¡ÒëèÍÁá«Á
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ xi
á¨é§ãËé·ÃÒºà¡ÕèÂǡѺàÍ¡ÊÒôéÒ¹¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒÃ
(ÊÓËÃѺ¼ÅÔµÀѹ±ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§âÁà´çÁÁҵðҹ IC)
©ÅÒ¡ Industry Canada ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃÃкØäÇéãËé¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õè¼èÒ¹Áҵðҹ ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧ¹ÕéËÁÒ¶֧¡Ò÷ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ìµÃ§µÒÁÁҵðҹ
¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¢Í§à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂâ·Ã¤Á¹Ò¤Á ¡Ò÷ӧҹ áÅФÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ ˹èǧҹäÁèÃѺÃͧÇèÒÍØ»¡Ã³ì
¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹ä´éµÃ§µÒÁ¤ÇÒÁ¾Í㨢ͧÅÙ¡¤éÒ
¡è͹µÔ´µÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé ¼Ùéãªé¤ÇõÃǨÊͺãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒä´éÃѺ͹Ø−ÒµãËéàª×èÍÁµè͡ѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì¢Í§ºÃÔÉÑ·â·Ã¤Á¹Ò¤Áã¹¾×é¹·Õè ¡ÒõԴµÑé§
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìµéͧ·ÓµÒÁÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍ·Õè¶Ù¡µéͧ 㹺ҧ¡Ã³Õ ¡ÒÃà´Ô¹ÊÒÂÀÒÂã¹â´ÂãªéÊÒÂà´ÕÂÇ ÍÒ¨ä´éÃѺ¡Òõè;èǧ´éÇÂ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèä´éÁҵðҹ ÅÙ¡¤éÒ¤ÇõÃÐ˹ѡÇèÒ¡Òû¯ÔºÑµÔµÒÁà§×è͹䢢éÒ§µé¹ äÁèÍÒ¨»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃŴŧ¢Í§»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾
¡Ò÷ӧҹ㹺ҧʶҹ¡Òóìä´é
¡ÒëèÍÁÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèä´éÁҵðҹ¹Õé¤Ç÷Óâ´ÂÈÙ¹Âì«èÍÁ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃáµè§µÑé§â´Â˹èǧҹ¡ÒëèÍÁºÓÃا¢Í§á¤¹Ò´Ò·Õèä´éÃѺ
¡ÒáÓ˹´â´ÂµÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒ ¡ÒëèÍÁËÃ×Í»ÃѺá¡éÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õéâ´Â¼Ùéãªé ËÃ×Í¡Ò÷ӧҹ·Õè¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍÒ¨·ÓãËé
ºÃÔÉÑ·â·Ã¤Á¹Ò¤Á¢ÍãËé¼Ùéãªé¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì
¼Ùéãªé¤ÇõÃǨÊͺãËéá¹èã¨à¾×èÍ¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹µÑÇàͧÇèÒ ÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµèÍÊÒ¡ÃÒǹ´ì, ÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìáÅÐÃкº·è͹éÓÀÒÂã¹
ËÒ¡ÁÕà¢éÒ´éÇ¡ѹ ¤Óàµ×͹¹ÕéÁÕ¤ÇÒÁÊÓ¤Ñ−ÍÂèÒ§ÂÔè§ã¹¾×é¹·Õ誹º·
à¾×èÍËÅÕ¡àÅÕ觡ÒÃà¡Ô´ä¿¿éÒªç͵ËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Ó§Ò¹¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´ ËéÒÁ¾ÂÒÂÒÁ·Ó¡ÒõèÍÊÒ¡ÃÒǹ´ì´éǵÑǤسàͧ
ãËéµÔ´µèͪèҧ俿éÒ·ÕèÁÕ¤ÇÒÁàªÕèÂǪÒ−à¾×èͨѴ¡Òçҹ¹Õé
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) ·Õè¡Ó˹´ãËé¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìà·ÍÃìÁÔ¹ÑÅáµèÅеÑÇáÊ´§¶Ö§¨Ó¹Ç¹ÊÙ§ÊØ´¢Í§à·ÍÃìÁÔ¹ÑÅ
·Õèàª×èÍÁµèÍä´é¡ÑºÍÔ¹àµÍÃìà¿«¢Í§â·ÃÈѾ·ì Êèǹ»ÅÒ¢ͧÍÔ¹àµÍÃìà¿«ÍÒ¨»ÃСͺ´éÇÂÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ ·Õè¼ÅÃÇÁ¢Í§ Ringer
Equivalence Numbers µéͧäÁèà¡Ô´¨Ó¹Ç¹ 5
xii Users Manual
ÊËÀÒ¾ÂØâû
»ÃСÒÈà¡ÕèÂǡѺà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂáÅÐÁҵðҹ CE ¢Í§ÊËÀÒ¾ÂØâû
¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì·Õè¼ÅÔµà¾×èͨÓ˹èÒÂã¹ÊËÀÒ¾ÂØâû¨ÐÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒ Conformité Européene (CE)
«Öè§áÊ´§¶Ö§¤ÇÒÁÊÍ´¤Åéͧ¡Ñº¢éÍ¡Ó˹´áÅÐÁҵðҹ¢Í§ÂØâû ÃÇÁ¶Ö§º·á¡é䢴ѧ·ÕèÃкصèÍ仹Õé ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéÂѧÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂÃкØ
Class 2
¢éÍÁÙŵèÍ仹ÕéãªéÊÓËÃѺà¤Ã×èͧ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒõԴ©ÅÒ¡ CE à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¤ÓÊÑ觢ͧÊËÀÒ¾ÂØâû
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊÒÃʹà·È¹Õéä´é¼èÒ¹¡Ò÷´ÊͺáÅеçµÒÁÁҵðҹ
¢éÍ¡Ó˹´µèÒ§æ ¢Í§¡ÅØèÁ»ÃÐà·ÈÂØâû ¤×Í:
• EMC Directive 89/336/EEC áÅФÓá¡é䢢éͺѧ¤Ñº 92/31/EEC & 93/68/EEC
– EN 55022 Class B
– EN 61000-3-2
– EN 61000-3-3
– EN 55024
• ¢éͺѧ¤Ñºà¡ÕèÂǡѺ俿éÒáç´Ñ¹µèÓ (¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ) 73/23/EEC áÅÐ EN 60950(A1/A2/A3/A4/A11)
• ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºÇèÒ´éÇÂÍØ»¡Ã³ìÇÔ·ÂØáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒà 199/5/EC
– CTR21 (ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§âÁà´çÁÁÒ´éÇÂ)
– ETS 300 328 (ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ 2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì)
– ETS 301,489-1 (ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ 2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì)
– ETS 301,489-17 (ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ 2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì)
¢éÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧ¡ÒÃãªéÇÔ·Âآͧ¡ÅØèÁ»ÃÐà·ÈÂØâû
(ÊÓËÃѺ¼ÅÔµÀѹ±ì·ÕèµÃ§µÒÁ¢éÍ¡Ó˹´à¡ÕèÂǡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìÇÔ·Âآͧ EU)
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé¤×Íà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìâ¹éµºØê¤ â´ÂÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ìÃкº LAN Ê×èÍÊÒôéǤÅ×è¹ÇÔ·ÂؾÅѧ§Ò¹µèÓ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒÃäÇÃìàÅÊ
´éǤÅ×蹤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ (RF)) ·Ó§Ò¹´éǤÇÒÁ¶Õè 2.4 ¡Ô¡ÐàÎÔÃ쵫ì ÍÒ¨¾ºä´éã¹ à¤Ã×èͧâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³à¾×èÍãªéã¹·Õè¾Ñ¡ÍÒÈÑÂ
ËÃ×Íã¹Êӹѡ§Ò¹ ãªé¢éÍÁÙÅÊèǹ¹Õé㹡óշÕèÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ìµèÒ§æ àËÅèÒ¹Õéà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ â»Ã´´Ù¨Ò¡©ÅÒ¡¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧà¾×è͵ÃǨÊͺà¡ÕèÂǡѺ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊ
ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³áÅмèÒ¹Áҵðҹ¢Í§ÊËÀÒ¾ÂØâûËÃ×;×é¹·Õè·Õèà¡ÕèÂÇ¢éͧ ËÒ¡ÁÕ©ÅÒ¡
à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒ CE
áÅÐÁÕËÁÒÂàÅ¢ Notified Body Registration Number áÅÐÊÑ−Åѡɳì Alert µÔ´·Õèà¤Ã×èͧ
à¾ÒàÇÍÃìàÍÒµì¾Øµ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÇÃìàÅÊËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÍÒ¨µÔ´µÑé§ÁÒã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàµÍÃìâ¹éµºØꤢͧ¤Ø³ÁÕÃдѺ¡ÒÃÊ觤Å×è¹
¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÇÔ·ÂØ RF µèÓ¡ÇèÒ¢Õ´¨Ó¡Ñ´Áҵðҹ¢Í§¤³Ð¡ÃÃÁÒ¸Ô¡ÒâͧÂØâûµÒÁ¢éÍ¡Ó˹´ R&TTE
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ xiii
â»Ã´´Ù¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§ 802.11b áÅÐ 802.11g ÊÓËÃѺáµèÅлÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀÒ¤¢Í§»ÃÐà·È ã¹ËÑÇ¢éÍ
“¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§à¢µàÈÃÉ°¡Ô¨ÂØâû” ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§
»ÃСÒȤÇÒÁÊÍ´¤Åéͧ©ºÑºá»Å
[English]
This product follows the provisions of the European Directive 1999/5/EC.
[Danish]
Dette produkt er i overensstemmelse med det europæiske direktiv 1999/5/EC
[Dutch]
Dit product is in navolging van de bepalingen van Europees Directief 1999/5/EC.
[Finnish]
Tämä tuote noudattaa EU-direktiivin 1999/5/EC määräyksiä.
[French]
Ce produit est conforme aux exigences de la Directive Européenne 1999/5/EC.
[German]
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Bestimmungen der Europäischen Richtlinie 1999/5/EC
[Greek]
Το προϊόν αυτό πληροί τις προβλέψεις της Ευρωπαϊκής Οδηγίας 1999/5/ΕC.
[Icelandic]
Þessi vara stenst reglugerð Evrópska Efnahags Bandalagsins númer 1999/5/EC
[Italian]
Questo prodotto è conforme alla Direttiva Europea 1999/5/EC.
[Norwegian]
Dette produktet er i henhold til bestemmelsene i det europeiske direktivet 1999/5/EC.
[Portuguese]
Este produto cumpre com as normas da Diretiva Européia 1999/5/EC.
[Spanish]
Este producto cumple con las normas del Directivo Europeo 1999/5/EC.
[Swedish]
Denna produkt har tillverkats i enlighet med EG-direktiv 1999/5/EC.
¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§à¢µàÈÃÉ°¡Ô¨ÂØâû
xiv Users Manual
¢éͨӡѴ㹾×é¹·ÕèÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªéÇÔ·ÂØ 802.11b/802.11g
[ËÁÒÂà˵ض֧¼ÙéÃǺÃÇÁ: »ÃСÒȵèÍ仹Õéà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͨӡѴ㹾×é¹·Õè ¨Ðµéͧä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃà¼Âá¾Ãèã¹àÍ¡ÊÒ÷Ñé§ËÁ´¢Í§¼Ùéãªé
·ÕèãËéÁÒ¾ÃéÍÁ¡ÑºÃкºËÃ×ͼÅÔµÀѳ±ì·ÕèÁÕ¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection]
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤ÇÒÁ¶Õè·Õèãªéâ´ÂÍØ»¡Ã³ì LAN äÃéÊÒ 802.11b/802.11g ÍÒ¨ÂѧäÁèµÃ§¡Ñ¹·Ñé§ËÁ´ã¹·Ø¡»ÃÐà·È ¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì
802.11b/802.11g ¨Ö§ä´éÑÃѺ¡ÒÃÍ͡Ẻà¾×èÍãËéãªé㹺ҧ»ÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀÒ¤à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
áÅÐäÁèä´éÃѺ͹Ø−ÒµãËé¹Óä»ãªéã¹»ÃÐà·ÈÍ×蹹͡à˹×Í仨ҡ»ÃÐà·È·ÕèÃкØ
㹰ҹмÙéãªé¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì
¤Ø³ÁÕ˹éÒ·ÕèµÃǨÊͺÇèÒ¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ìÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹à©¾ÒÐã¹»ÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀÒ¤·Õè¡Ó˹´ãËéãªéä´é
áÅÐÁÕ˹éÒ·ÕèµÃǨÊͺÇèÒÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒâ´Âãªé¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèáÅЪèͧÊÑ−−Ò³·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁ¡Ñº»ÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀÒ¤·Õèãªé§Ò¹
áÅéÇ ¡ÒõÑé觤èÒ·Õè¼Ô´à¾Õé¹仨ҡ¤èÒ·Õè͹Ø−ҵ㹻ÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀÒ¤ ÍÒ¨à»ç¹¡ÒÃÅÐàÁÔ´¡®ËÁÒÂã¹·éͧ¶Ôè¹
áÅеéͧä´éÃѺâ·ÉµÒÁº·ºÑ−−ѵÔáË觡®ËÁÒ¹Ñé¹
¢éÍ¡Ó˹´ÊÓËÃѺÂØâû¹ÕéÁÕãËéÊÓËÃѺãªé§Ò¹ã¹à¢µàÈÃÉ°¡Ô¨ÂØâû
áµè¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒèӡѴ¡ÒâÍ͹Ø−Òµãªé§Ò¹ã¹ºÒ§»ÃÐà·ÈËÃ×ÍÀÙÁÔÀҤ㹻ÃÐà·È ´Ñ§¹Õé:
·ÑèÇä»
ÁҵðҹÂØâû¡Ó˹´¡ÓÅѧÊè§ÊÙ§ÊØ´·Õè 100 mW ¡ÓÅѧÊè§äÍâ«â·Ã»Ô¡·ÕèÁÕ¼Åãªé§Ò¹ (EIRP) áÅЪèǧ¤ÇÒÁ¶ÕèÃÐËÇèÒ§ 2400 – 2483.5
MHz
àºÅàÂÕÂÁ
¼ÅÔµÀѳ±ì¹ÕéÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹¡ÅÒ§á¨é§ä´é áµè¡ÒÃÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³¡ÅÒ§á¨é§ã¹ÃÐÂÐ 300 àÁµÃ¢Öé¹ä» ¨Ðµéͧä´éÃѺãºÍ¹Ø−Òµ¨Ò¡ BIPT
¢éͨӡѴ¹Õé¤ÇèÐáÊ´§ã¹¤ÙèÁ×ʹѧ¹Õé:
Dans le cas d'une utilisation privée, à l'extérieur d'un bâtiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est nécessaire
pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance supérieure à 300m un enregistrement auprès de l'IBPT est requise. Pour
une utilisation publique à l'extérieur de bâtiments, une licence de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez
contacter l'IBPT.
½ÃÑè§àÈÊ
ÊÓËÃѺἹ¡ Metropolitan:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹ÍÒ¤ÒÃ
2.400 -2.454 GHz (ªèͧÊÑ−−Ò³ 1 ¶Ö§ 7) ÊÓËÃѺãªé§Ò¹¡ÅÒ§á¨é§
ÊÓËÃѺ Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹áÅй͡ÍÒ¤ÒÃ
ÊÓËÃѺ Reunion, Guyane:
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹ÍÒ¤ÒÃ
2.420 -2.4835 GHz ÊÓËÃѺãªé§Ò¹¡ÅÒ§á¨é§ (ªèͧÊÑ−−Ò³ 5 ¶Ö§ 13)
ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºµèÒ§æ xv
¢éÍÁÙÅâ·Ã¤Á¹Ò¤Á¢Í§¡ÅØèÁ»ÃÐà·ÈÂØâû
(ÊÓËÃѺ¼ÅÔµÀѹ±ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒõԴµÑé§âÁà´çÁ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧâ´Â EU)
¡ÒÃÁÕÊÑ−Åѡɳì
áÊ´§¶Ö§¡Ò÷ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµÃ§µÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºÇèÒ´éÇÂÇÔ·ÂØáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊ×èÍÊÒà 1999/5/EC à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂ
´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµÃ§µÒÁËÃ×Í´Õ¡ÇèÒÁҵðҹ·Ò§à·¤¹Ô¤µèÍ仹Õé:
CTR 21 Ð ¤ÇÒÁµéͧ¡ÒÃÊÓËÃѺÁҵðҹᾹÂÙâÃà»Õ¹㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµè͡Ѻà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÊÇÔ·ªìâ·ÃÈѾ·ìÊÒ¸ÒóÐá͹ÒÅçÍ¡ (PSTNs)
ËÃ×Í TE (äÁèÃÇÁºÃÔ¡ÒÃàÊÕ§·Ò§â·ÃÈѾ·ì¢Í§ TE) ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃÃкØã¹à¹çµàÇÔÃì¡ ËÒ¡ÁÕ¨ÐËÁÒ¶֧¡Ò÷ÕèãªéÊÑ−−Ò³ Dual Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF)
áÁéÇèÒÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Õé¨ÐÊÒÁÒöãªéä´é·Ñé§ÊÑ−−Ò³ÅÙ» (pulse) ËÃ×Í DTMF (tone) ¡çä´é áµèÁÕà¾Õ§¡Ò÷ӧҹã¹ÊÑ−−Ò³
DTMF ·ÕèµÃ§µÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤ÑºÊÓËÃѺ¡Ò÷ӧҹµÒÁ»¡µÔ ¨Ö§á¹Ð¹ÓãËéµÑ駤èÒÍØ»¡Ã³ìãËéãªéÊÑ−−Ò³ DTMF à¾×èÍ
à¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ºÃÔ¡Òéءà©Ô¹ÊÒ¸ÒóÐËÃ×ÍÊèǹµÑÇ ÊÑ−−Ò³ DTMF ÂѧªèÇÂãËé¡ÒõÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃâ·Ã·Óä´éàÃçÇ¢Öé¹´éÇÂ
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéµÃ§µÒÁ¢éͺѧ¤Ñº¢Í§¤³Ð¡ÃÃÁÒ¸Ô¡ÒþԨÒÃ³Ò 98/482/EEC "CTR 21" ÊÓËÃѺᾹÂÙâÃà»Õ¹ à¡ÕèÂǡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì
·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁµè͡Ѻ Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
ÍÂèÒ§äáçµÒÁ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤ÇÒÁᵡµèÒ§ÃÐËÇèÒ§ PSTN ·ÕèÁÕã¹áµèÅлÃÐà·È ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧ¹Õé¨Ö§äÁèÃѺ»ÃСѹ¡Ò÷ӧҹä´é¡Ñº·Ø¡æ
PSTN ËÒ¡à¡Ô´»Ñ−ËÒ ¤Ø³¤ÇõԴµèͺÃÔÉÑ·¼Ùé¼ÅÔµà¾×èÍ¢ÍÃѺ¤ÇÒÁªèÇÂàËÅ×ͷҧ෤¹Ô¤
xvi Users Manual
¡ÒÃãªéàÍ¡ÊÒÃ
¢ÍáÊ´§¤ÇÒÁÂÔ¹´Õ¡Ñº¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡«×éͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ¹éμºØꤷÕèÁÒ¾ÃéÍÁ¡ÑºÃкº»¯ÔºÑμÔ¡Òà Windows® XP äÁèÇèҤس¨ÐÂѧãËÁè¡Ñº¡ÒÃãªé
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìẺ¾¡¾ÒËÃ×Íà»ç¹¼Ùéãªé·ÕèÁÕ»ÃÐʺ¡ÒÃ³ì ¤ÙèÁ×Í¡ÒÃãªéÊÒÁÒöªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé»ÃÐ⪹ìÊÙ§ÊØ´ä´é¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
¡ÒèѴÃٻẺàÍ¡ÊÒÃ
äͤ͹¢éÍÁÙÅ
ã¹àÍ¡ÊÒùÕé¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃãªéäͤ͹áÅТéͤÇÒÁÊÒÁ»ÃÐàÀ· äͤ͹¢éÍÁÙŨлÃÒ¡¯ÍÂÙè¡è͹¢Ñé¹μ͹/¢éÍÁÙÅ·ÕèÁÕ:
¤Óàμ×͹:
áÊ´§¶Ö§¡ÒÃÍÒ¨·ÓãËéà¡Ô´ÍѹμÃÒ¡ѺÃèÒ§¡ÒÂä´é
¢éͤÇÃÃÐÇѧ:
àμ×͹¤Ø³à¡ÕèÂǡѺâÍ¡ÒÊ㹡ÒêÓÃØ´¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìËÃ×Í¢éÍÁÙÅ
ËÁÒÂàËμØ:
á¨é§à¡ÕèÂǡѺʶҹ¡Òóì¾ÔàÈÉ
¢éÍÁÙŷҧ෤¹Ô¤:
á¨é§¤Ø³à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤ÇÒÁμéͧ¡ÒþÔàÈÉËÃ×Í¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìμèÒ§æ
¡ÒèѴàÃÕ§á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì
»ØèÁμèÒ§æ ·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡´à¾×èÍãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μèÒ§æ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÍÂÙè㹤ÙèÁ×ÍÀÒÂã¹à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂǧàÅçº μÑÇÍÂèÒ§àªè¹:
<Ctrl> ËÁÒ¶֧¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁ control (Ctrl º¹á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì)
㹡óշÕèμéͧ¡´»ØèÁÊͧ»ØèÁ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹ ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃáÊ´§ª×èÍ»ØèÁ·Ñé§Êͧâ´ÂÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒºǡ μÑÇÍÂèÒ§àªè¹:
<Fn+F8> ËÁÒ¶֧¡Ò÷Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡´»ØèÁ Fn ¤éÒ§äÇéáÅéÇ¡´»ØèÁ F8
¡ÒÃãªéàÍ¡ÊÒà 1
¡ÒáÓ˹´ª×èÍãËé¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁμÔ´μÑé§ËÅÒÂæ â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¤Ø³μéͧ·Óâ´ÂμÔ´μÑ駨ҡ«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ ÅӴѺ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¨Ð¶×ÍÇèÒä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ¤×Íä´Ã¿ì d:\
ÍÂèÒ§äáçμÒÁÍÒ¨¨ÐäÁè¨Óà»ç¹àÊÁÍä» ÍÑ¡ÉÃÃкØä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁÍÒ¨à»ç¹ÍÑ¡ÉÃÍ×è¹·ÕèμÒÁËÅѧª×èÍÎÒÃì´ä´Ã¿ìμÑÇÊØ´·éÒÂã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¡çä´é
μÑÇÍÂèÒ§àªè¹ ËÒ¡ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕ¡ÒÃáºè§¾ÒÃì·ÔªÑ¹ ¨Ð·ÓãËéÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìà»ç¹ä´Ã¿ì C: áÅÐ D: áÅÐä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ¤×Íä´Ã¿ì E:
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹·Ñªá¾´
¤Ø³ÍÒ¨ä´éÃѺ¡ÒâÍãËé¤ÅÔ¡ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèÃÒ¡Ò÷Õè»ÃÒ¡¯º¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹·Ñªá¾´¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹àËÁ×͹¡Ñº¡ÒÃãªéàÁÒÊì
ẺÅéÍ ËÒ¡ÁÕ¤ÇÒÁáμ¡μèÒ§¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃ͸ԺÒÂäÇéâ´ÂÍÐàÍÕ´
Íͺਡμì·Õèμéͧ¤ÅÔ¡¨Ð¶Ù¡áÊ´§à»ç¹¢éͤÇÒÁ μÑÇË¹Ò ËÃ×ÍáÊ´§à»ç¹ÍÑ¡ÉÃμÑÇàÅç¡ àªè¹ »ØèÁ Start
»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹·Õè´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ =>
Table 1. ¡ÒäÅÔ¡·Ñªá¾´
¡Ò÷ӧҹ
¡Ãкǹ¡ÒÃ
¤ÅÔ¡
¡´»ØèÁ«éÒ¢ͧ·Ñªá¾´áÅéÇ»ÅèÍÂ
´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡
¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ«éÒ¢ͧ·Ñªá¾´Êͧ¤ÃÑé§â´ÂàÃçÇ
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÇÔ¹â´ÇÊì:
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Windows à¡×ͺ·Ñé§ËÁ´¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃáÊ´§ª×èÍ/¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§»ØèÁËÃ×Íäͤ͹ËÒ¡¤Ø³àÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃì¢Í§·Ñªá¾´
ä»ÇÒ§äÇéà˹×ÍÃÒ¡Ò÷Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃÃÙé¢éÍÁÙÅ
¤ÙèÁ×Í¡ÒÃãªé«Í¿μìáÇÃì
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³¶Ù¡¨Ñ´Êè§ÁÒ¨Ò¡âç§Ò¹â´ÂÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁμèÒ§æ ÁÒãËéÅèǧ˹éÒáÅéÇ â´Â·Õè«Í¿μìáÇÃìμèÒ§æ ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¤ÙèÁ×Í
¡ÒÃãªéÍ͹äŹìËÃ×Í©ºÑº¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËéãªé¢éÍÁÙŨҡàÍ¡ÊÒÃËÃ×ÍμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ÇÔ¸Õãªé㹫ͿμìáÇÃìà¾×èÍ´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ
ÃÙ»áÅÐÀÒ¾»ÃСͺ㹤ÙèÁ×͹ÕéÍÒ¨äÁèàËÁ×͹¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¢Í§¤Ø³
ËÁÒÂàËμØà¡ÕèÂǡѺäͤ͹·ÑèÇä»:
äͤ͹ºÒ§ª¹Ô´·Õèãªéã¹ Windows XP ÍÒ¨»ÃÒ¡¯º¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃìä´éâ´Â¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ (àªè¹: àÅ×Í¡μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Place the
volume icon in the taskbar) ã¹ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì Properties
2 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
àÃÔèÁμé¹
ÃÙé¨Ñ¡¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
ÁØÁÁͧ´éҹ˹éÒ
ÊÅÑ¡ÂÖ´¨Í LCD
¿áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð (¹. 14)
¨Í LCD
»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì
»ØèÁ AVS ËÃ×Í»ØèÁÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ
(ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
ÅÓ⾧
á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì (¹. 8)
à¤Ã×èͧÍèÒ¹ÅÒ¹ÔéÇÁ×Í (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
äÁâ¤Ã⿹ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
¿áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð (¹. 14)
·Ñªá¾´/»ØèÁ¢Í§·Ñªá¾´ (¹. 11)
ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ) (¹. 28)
»ØèÁ AVS ËÃ×Í»ØèÁÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
ÊÓËÃѺÃØè¹·ÕèÁÕ»ØèÁ AVS ( ) »ØèÁ¹Õé¨ÐãªéÊÓËÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ AVStation (¹. 48)
ÊÓËÃѺÃØè¹·ÕèÁÕ»ØèÁÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ ( ) ¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹à»ç¹»ØèÁÊÓËÃѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ
à¤Ã×èͧÍèÒ¹ÅÒ¹ÔéÇÁ×Í (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»Ô´¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ´ÂãªéÅÒ¹ÔéÇÁ×Í ËÃ×ÍÅçÍ¡ÍÔ¹à¢éÒÊÙè Windows â»Ã´´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ·Õè¤ÙèÁ×Í·ÕèãËéÁÒ
(੾ÒÐÃØè¹·ÕèÁÕÃкºÍèÒ¹ÅÒ¹ÔéÇÁ×Í)
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 3
ÁØÁÁͧ´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ
¾ÍÃìμ USB (2.0)
¾ÍÃìμÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
¾ÍÃìμ 1394 (4 ¢Ò, ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
¾ÍÃìμ͹ءÃÁ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
ÊÇÔμªì LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´Õ (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ ¹. 21)
ÁØÁÁͧ´éÒ¹«éÒÂ
¾ÍÃ×μàÍÒμì¾Øμ TV
(S-Video)
¾ÍÃìμÁ͹ÔàμÍÃì
4 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¾Ñ´ÅÁÃкÒ ¤ÇÒÁÃé͹
¾ÍÃìμ LAN (¹. 56)
¾ÍÃìμâÁà´çÁ (¹. 55, ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
ÊÅçÍμ¾Õ«Õ¡ÒÃì´ (¹. 31)
á¨ê¤àδ⿹ / á¨ç¤ S/PDIF
äÁâ¤Ã⿹ á¨ç¤
ÁØÁÁͧ´éÒ¹ËÅѧ
áºμàμÍÃÕè (¹. 99)
¾ÍÃìμ USB (2.0)
á¨ç¤ DC
¾ÍÃìμÅçÍ¡à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹
à¤Ã×èͧÊÙ−ËÒ (¹. 106)
ÁØÁÁͧ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§
ÊÅÑ¡ÂÖ´áºμàμÍÃÕè
·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍʶҹÕμèÍ¢ÂÒÂ
(ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
ªèͧãÊè˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó (¹. 104)
½Ò»Ô´ªèͧãÊèÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì
¡ÒöʹËÃ×ÍãÊèÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì¨Ð·ÓãËé¡ÒÃÃѺ»ÃСѹÊÔé¹Êشŧ ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì â»Ã´μÔ´μèÍÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡Òâͧ
Samsung ·Õèã¡Åé·ÕèÊØ´
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 5
¡ÒÃà»Ô´áÅлԴà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¡ÒÃà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
1. ãÊèáºμàμÍÃÕèáÅéÇμèÍÊÒÂ俢ͧÍÐá´»àμÍÃì AC μÒÁÇÔ¸Õ¡Òâͧ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó㹡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§
2. àÅ×è͹ÊÅÑ¡ÂÖ´ LCD ä»·Ò§¢ÇÒ ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹à»Ô´Ë¹éÒ¨Í LCD ¢Öé¹
3. ¡´»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì
¡ÒûԴà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ start (
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
2. ¤ÅÔ¡àÅ×Í¡ Turn Off Computer.
6 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
3. ¤ÅÔ¡ Turn Off
ËÒ¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìäÁè»Ô´ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡à¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁ¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´¢Í§Ãкº ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete> àÁ×èÍ
»ÃÒ¡¯ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì [Windows Task Manager] ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Shut Down > Turn Off à¾×èͻԴà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
§Ò¹·ÕèÂѧäÁèä´éºÑ¹·Ö¡ÍÒ¨ÊÙ−ËÒÂ/àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
ËÒ¡¡Òá´»ØèÁ <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Delete> äÁèÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹ä´é ãËé¡´»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì¤éÒ§äÇéÍÕ¡ 4 ÇÔ¹Ò·Õà¾×èͻԴ
à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì §Ò¹·ÕèÂѧäÁèä´éºÑ¹·Ö¡ÍÒ¨ÊÙ−ËÒÂ/àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é àÁ×èͤسà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¤ÃÑé§¶Ñ´ä» Ãкº¨Ð
·Ó¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺ´ÔÊ¡ì
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 7
¡ÒÃãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕ»ØèÁ·Ñé§ËÁ´ 88 »ØèÁ ¡Òá´»ØèÁ·Õè¡Ó˹´¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ËÅÑ¡æ
ä´éàËÁ×͹¡Ñº¡ÒÃãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìÁÒμðҹ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹áÅлØèÁà¾×èͧҹ¾ÔàÈÉ
»ØèÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹
»ØèÁ
Windows
»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢
»ØèÁá;¾ÅÔपѹ
»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§Ë¹éÒ¨ÍáÅÐ
¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§àÊÕ§/»ØèÁ·ÔÈ·Ò§
áÁéÇèÒ¡ÒèѴàÃÕ§¢Í§»ØèÁμèÒ§æ ã¹á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³¨Ðáμ¡μèҧ仨ҡá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§
à¤Ã×èͧà´Ê¡ì·Í» áμè¤ÇÒÁÃÙéÊ֡㹡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹¨ÐäÁèÁÕ¤ÇÒÁáμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹áμèÍÂèÒ§ã´
»ØèÁμèÒ§æ º¹á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìÍÒ¨¨Ñ´¡ÅØèÁËÅÑ¡æ ä´é´Ñ§¹Õé:
• á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìÁÒμðҹ·Õè»ÃСͺ´éÇÂÍÑ¡¢ÃÐμèÒ§æ áÅÐÁÕ¡ÒèѴàÃÕ§àËÁ×͹¡Ñºá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§¾ÔÁ¾ì´Õ´ÁÒμðҹ
áÅÐãªéà¾×èÍ»é͹¢éͤÇÒÁ »ØèÁ Windows ·Õè·Ñé§Êͧ´éÒ¹¢Í§ spacebar ãªéà»Ô´àÁ¹ÙμèÒ§æ ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´ÇÊìáÅзÓ˹éÒ·Õè
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾ÔàÈÉÍ×è¹æ
• àÁ×èÍ¡´»ØèÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñº¡´»ØèÁ <Fn> ¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹μÒÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾ÔàÈÉμèÒ§æ
• à¤ÍÃìà«ÍÃìáÅлØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁãªéàÅ×è͹à¤ÍÃìà«ÍÃ캹˹éÒ¨Í â´ÂÍÒ¨·Ó§Ò¹ã¹¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹Í×è¹æ â´Â¢Ö鹡Ѻ«Í¿μìáÇÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
¡Ò÷ӤÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ãËéãªé¼éÒ½éÒÂËÁÒ´æ àªç´·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´ àªç´»ØèÁáÅмÔÇÃÍºæ ¢Í§»ØèÁμèÒ§æ
ËéÒÁãËé¢Í§àËÅÇˡŧã¹á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìÁԩйÑé¹ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìàÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
8 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìμÑÇàÅ¢
á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§¤Ø³¨ÐÁÕ»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢ «Öè§à»ç¹¡ÅØèÁ¢Í§»ØèÁ·Õè¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé¾ÔÁ¾ìμÑÇàÅ¢áÅÐÊÑ−ÅѡɳìμèÒ§æ ·Ò§¤³ÔμÈÒÊμÃìä´é
àªè¹à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒºǡ ËÁÒÂàÅ¢ËÃ×ÍÊÑ−Åѡɳì·ÕèÊèǹÁØÁ¢Í§»ØèÁ¡´áμèÅлØèÁ¨ÐÁÕÊÑ−ÅѡɳìáÊ´§¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹·Ò§¤³ÔμÈÒÊμÃì
ËÅÍ´ LED áÊ´§
Num Lock
¡´»ØèÁ <Fn+Num Lock> à¾×èÍà»Ô´ãªé§Ò¹¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢ ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μÑÇàÅ¢¢Í§á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¨Ð¶Ù¡à»Ô´ãªé§Ò¹àÁ×èÍä¿ LED ¢Í§ Num Lock
μÔ´ÍÂÙè (”¤ÇÒÁËÁÒ¢ͧä¿áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð” (¹. 14) ÊÓËÃѺμÓáË¹è§¢Í§ä¿ Num Lock)
àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃà»Ô´ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μÑÇàÅ¢ ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨¡ÅѺä»ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹»¡μԢͧ»ØèÁä´éâ´Â¡Òá´»ØèÁ¹Ñé¹áÅлØèÁ <Fn> μÑÇÍÂèÒ§àªè¹ ¡ÒþÔÁ¾ì
ÍÑ¡Éà m ¡´ <Fn+M> ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¹Õé¨ÐáÊ´§ÍÑ¡Éà m
¡ÒûԴ»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Fn+Num Lock> ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ ä¿ LED ¢Í§ Num Lock ¨Ð´Ñºä»
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 9
¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾ÔàÈÉ
»ØèÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¨ÐàÃÕ¡ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾ÔàÈÉμèÒ§æ àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡Òá´¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñº»ØèÁÍ×è¹æ
¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁ <Fn> ¼ÊÁ
ª×èÍ»ØèÁ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§»ØèÁ
<Esc/
>
Êáμ¹´ìºÒÂ
¡Ó˹´ãËé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´Êáμ¹´ìºÒ 㹡ÒÃÍÍ¡¨Ò¡âËÁ´Êáμ¹´ìºÒÂ
ãËé¡´»ØèÁà»Ô´ (¹. 95)
<F2/
>
Gauge
áÊ´§ÃдѺ¾Åѧ§Ò¹·ÕèàËÅ×ͧ͢áºμàμÍÃÕè
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒСóշÕèμÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Samsung Display Manager äÇé
<F4/
>
LCD/CRT
ÊÅѺ˹éÒ¨ÍÃÐËÇèÒ§¨Í LCD
áÅÐ˹éÒ¨Íμè;èǧÀÒ¹͡àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͨÍÀÒ¹͡ (¹. 92)
<F5/Backlit>
ä¿´éÒ¹ËÅѧ
à»Ô´áÅлԴ LCD
<F6/Mute>
μÑ´àÊÕ§
à»Ô´áÅлԴàÍÒμì¾ØμàÊÕ§
<F7/SRS>
SRS
¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ¹ÕéªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ä´éÊÑÁ¼ÑʡѺÃкºàÊÕ§ẺÊàμÃÔâÍ·Õèà»ç¹¸ÃÃÁªÒμÔ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅ×Í¡ âËÁ´μèÍ仹Õé â´Â¡´»ØèÁ
ËÁÒÂàËμØ âËÁ´ WOW XT ON: àÅ×Í¡à¾×èͿѧ´¹μÃÕ
âËÁ´ TRUSURROUND : àÅ×Í¡à¾×èͪÁÀҾ¹μÃì
âËÁ´ SRS OFF : μÑ´¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ SRS
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ SRS ¨Ðãªéä´é੾ÒСѺÅÓ⾧ã¹μÑǢͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅÐàδ⿹à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
áÅÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹¼èÒ¹¾ÍÃìμ S/PDIF
·Ñªá¾´
à»Ô´áÅлԴ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹·Ñªá¾´
âËÁ´ Etiquette
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅ×Í¡âËÁ´ Etiquette àÁ×èÍμéͧ¡ÒÃÃкº¡Ò÷ӧҹ·Õèà§Õº
<F11/Num Lock>
Number Lock
à»Ô´ãªé»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢ (¹. 9)
<F12/Scroll>
Scroll Lock
àÅ×è͹˹éҨ͢Öé¹áÅÐŧâ´Â·ÕèäÁèà»ÅÕè¹μÓá˹觢ͧà¤ÍÃìà«ÍÃìÀÒÂã¹á;¾ÅÔपѹº
Ò§ »ÃÐàÀ·
<F9/
>
<F10/
>
<
/
>
Volume Down
Å´¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§¢Í§àÊÕ§
<
/
>
Volume Up
à¾ÔèÁ¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§¢Í§àÊÕ§
<
/
>
Brightness Up
»ÃѺà¾ÔèÁ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
<
/
>
Brightness Down
»ÃѺŴ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
àÁ×èͤس¡´»ØèÁ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹ àÊÕ§¢Í§Ãкº¨Ð¶Ù¡μѴ仪ÑèǤÃÒÇ
10 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé·Ñªá¾´
ã¹ Windows ¤Ø³¨ÐàËç¹ÃÙ»¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡àÅç¡æ º¹Ë¹éÒ¨ÍàÊÁÍ «Öè§áÊ´§μÓá˹觷Õè¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÊÑ觧ҹμèÍä»ä´é ÃÙ»àÅç¡æ
¹ÕéàÃÕ¡ÇèҾ͹ìàμÍÃì «Öè§â´Â»¡μÔ¨ÐáÊ´§à»ç¹ÃÙ»ÅÙ¡Èà ( ) ËÃ×ÍμÑÇ I ( )
·Ñªá¾´
»ØèÁμèÒ§æ ¢Í§·Ñªá¾´
·Ñªá¾´·Õèà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»ÁÒº¹¨Í LCD ä´é àªè¹à´ÕÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªéàÁÒÊìà¾×èÍ
àÅ×è͹ã¹à¤Ã×èͧà´Ê¡ì·Í» »ØèÁ¢Í§·Ñªá¾´ªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÊÑ觧ҹ¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä´é àªè¹ ¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ÃÒ¡ÒÃËÃ×Í¡ÒÃãªé¤ÓÊÑè§
¡ÒÃÅçͤ·Ñªá¾´
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÅçͤ·Ñªá¾´ áÅÐãªé੾ÒÐá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìáÅÐàÁÒÊì 㹡ÒÃÅçͤ·Ñªá¾´ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Fn> + <F9> ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 11
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÊÑ觧ҹμèÒ§æ ä´éâ´Âãªé·Ñªá¾´ ´Ñ§¤Ó͸ԺÒÂμèÍ仹Õé
d
¡Ò÷ӧҹ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹
¡Ãкǹ¡ÒÃ
àÅ×è͹
àÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃì
ÇÒ§¹ÔéÇŧº¹·Ñªá¾´áÅéÇàÅ×è͹¹ÔéÇä»ã¹
·ÔÈ·Ò§·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃ
¤ÅÔ¡
àÅ×Í¡Íͺਡμì à»Ô´àÁ¹Ù ËÃ×ͤÅÔ¡»ØèÁ
àÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»äÇéà˹×ÍÍͺਡμì·Õè μéͧ¡ÒÃ
ãËé¡´»ØèÁ«éÒ¢ͧ·Ñªá¾´Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§
ËÃ×͹Ӿ͹ìàμÍÃìä»ÇÒ§äÇéà˹×ÍÍͺਡμì
áÅéÇãªé¹ÔéÇá·ç»·Õè·Ñªá¾´Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§
´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡
à»Ô´â»Ãá¡ÃÁËÃ×Íà»Ô´ä¿Åì
àÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»äÇéà˹×ÍÍͺਡμì ãËé¡´
»ØèÁ«éÒ¢ͧ·Ñªá¾´Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§
ËÃ×͹Ӿ͹ìàμÍÃìä»ÇÒ§äÇéà˹×ÍÍͺਡμì
áÅéÇãªé¹ÔéÇá·ç»·Õè·Ñªá¾´Êͧ¤ÃÑé§ÍÂèÒ§àÃçÇ
12 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ
áÊ´§àÁ¹ÙªçÍμ¤Ñ·
àÅ×è͹¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»äÇéà˹×ÍÍͺਡμì·Õè
μéͧ¡Òà áÅéÇ¡´»ØèÁ¢ÇҢͧ·Ñªá¾´Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§
ÅÒ¡
àÅ×è͹Íͺਡμì ËÃ×ÍàÅ×Í¡¾×é¹·Õè·ÕèÁÕ
ËÅÒÂÍͺਡμì
ÅÒ¡áÅÐÇÒ§ä»ÂѧμÓá˹觷Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃ
¡Ò÷ӧҹ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹
¡Ãкǹ¡ÒÃ
àÅ×è͹
áÊ´§Êèǹº¹/ÅèÒ§/«éÒÂ/¢ÇÒ ¢Í§
à¹×éÍËÒã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì
ÇÒ§¹ÔéÇ·Õè¢Íº¢ÇÒËÃ×ͧ͢ÅèÒ§¢Í§·Ñªá¾´áÅéÇ
àÅ×è͹ã¹á¹ÇμÑé§ËÃ×Íá¹Ç¹Í¹
(ãªéä´é੾ÒСѺá;¾ÅÔपѹºÒ§»ÃÐàÀ·
à·èÒ¹Ñé¹)
¡ÃسÒãªé·Ñªá¾´â´Âãªé¹ÔéÇà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèáËÅÁ¤ÁÍÒ¨·ÓãËé·Ñªá¾´àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
¡ÒÃÊÑ觧ҹ·Ñªá¾´ËÃ×Í»ØèÁ¢Í§·Ñªá¾´¢³Ð·ÕèºÙμà¤Ã×èͧÍÒ¨·ÓãËéàÇÅÒ㹡ÒúÙμ Windows à¾ÔèÁ¢Öé¹
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 13
¤ÇÒÁËÁÒ¢ͧä¿áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð
áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
14 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
Num Lock
¨ÐμÔ´àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹»ØèÁμÑÇàÅ¢
Caps Lock
¨ÐμÔ´àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÍÑ¡ÉÃμÑǾÔÁ¾ìãË−è
Scroll Lock
¨ÐμÔ´àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´ãËéàÅ×è͹˹éҨ͢Öé¹áÅÐŧâ´Â·ÕèäÁèà»ÅÕè¹μÓá˹觢ͧà¤ÍÃìà«ÍÃìÀÒÂã¹
á;¾ÅÔपѹºÒ§»ÃÐàÀ·
ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìä´Ã¿ì /
ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
¡Ð¾ÃÔºàÁ×èÍÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìËÃ×Íä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ¡ÓÅѧ·Ó§Ò¹
LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
ÊÇèÒ§àÁ×èÍãªé§Ò¹¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ LAN äÃéÊÒ (俹Õé¨ÐäÁè·Ò¹ÊÓËÃѺÃØè¹·ÕèäÁèÁÕÃкº LAN äÃéÊÒÂ)
áºμàμÍÃÕè
ÊÇèÒ§à»ç¹ÊÕà¢ÕÂÇ – àÁ×èÍáºμàμÍÃÕèÁÕ»ÃШØàμçÁ ËÃ×ÍàÁ×èÍäÁèä´éμÔ´μÑé§áºμàμÍÃÕèã¹à¤Ã×èͧ
à»ç¹ÊÕÍӾѹ - ¢³Ð·Õè¡ÓÅѧªÒÃ쨻ÃШØãËéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¡ÃоÃÔº - àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§áºμàμÍÃÕèäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ
à¾ÒàÇÍÃì
ä¿áÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð¨ÐμÔ´ – ¢³Ð·Õèà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¡ÃоÃÔº – àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´Êáμ¹´ìºÒÂ
¡ÒûÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
ÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD ÁÕ·Ñé§ËÁ´ 8 ÃдѺ´éÇ¡ѹ (1: ÊÇèÒ§¹éÍ·ÕèÊØ´ ~ 8: ÊÇèÒ§·ÕèÊØ´)
¡ÒûÃѺâ´Âãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì
¡´»ØèÁ <Fn>+<
> ËÃ×Í <Fn>+<
> ¨Ò¡á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìà¾×èÍ»ÃѺÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
àÁ×èÍã´¡çμÒÁ·Õè¤Ø³à»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧËÃ×Íà»ÅÕè¹áËÅ觨èÒÂä¿ ÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í¨Ðà»ÅÕè¹ä»μÒÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҴѧ¹Õé
• àÁ×èÍãªé¡ÃÐáÊä¿ AC: ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§ÃдѺ 8
• àÁ×Íè ãªé俨ҡáºμàμÍÃÕè: ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§ÃдѺ 1
¡ÒûÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§â´Âãªé Battery Manager
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾â´Âãªé Battery Manager (¹. 102)
¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤èÒ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD ËÅѧ¨Ò¡»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧáÅÐà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ
1. à»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯âÅâ¡é Samsung ¢Öé¹ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <F2> à¾×èÍà¢éÒÊÙè¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҢͧà¤Ã×èͧ
2. ã¹àÁ¹Ù Boot ãËéà»ÅÕ蹤èÒμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Brightness Mode Control à»ç¹ User Control
3. ºÑ¹·Ö¡¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒáÅéÇÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҢͧà¤Ã×èͧ
- àÁ×èÍãªé Battery Manager ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃà¡çº¤ÇÒÁÊÇèҧ˹éÒ¨Í੾ÒзÕè¡Ó˹´äÇéã¹âËÁ´ 'Customized' à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¡ÒûÃÐËÂÑ´»ÃШØä¿¿éҢͧáºμàμÍÃÕè
àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕè ¡ÒûÃѺŴÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
ÊÒÁÒöªèÇÂÅ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕèä´é
¡ÒÃà¡Ô´¨Ø´ºÍ´ã¹¨Í LCD
¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§à·¤â¹âÅÂÕ¡ÒüÅÔμ LCD ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒÃà¡Ô´¾Ô¡à«ÅªÓÃØ´ä´éÊÙ§ÊØ´äÁèà¡Ô¹ 10 ¾Ô¡à«Å
«Ö觨ÐÂѧäÁèÁռšÃзºμèÍ»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¢Í§Ãкº
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¹Õé¨Ö§ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒÃà¡Ô´¾Ô¡à«ÅªÓÃØ´ä´éàªè¹à´ÕÂǡѺ¼ÅÔμÀѹ±ì¢Í§¼Ùé¼ÅÔμÃÒÂÍ×è¹æ
¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó㹡ÒôÙáÅà¤Ã×èͧ
㹡Ò÷ӤÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´¨Í LCD ãËéãªé੾ÒÐÊÒ÷ӤÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÃкØáÅмéÒ¹ØèÁ â´Â¤èÍÂæ
àªç´ä»ã¹·ÔÈ·Ò§à´ÕÂǡѹ
àÃÔèÁμé¹ 15
¡ÒûÃѺ¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§àÊÕ§
¡ÒûÃѺâ´Âãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì
¡´»ØèÁ <Fn>+<
> ËÃ×Í <Fn>+<
> ¨Ò¡á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì
¡ÒûÃѺâ´Âãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§àÊÕ§
¤ÅÔ¡äͤ͹ ÃдѺàÊÕ§ (
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅéÇ»ÃѺᶺàÅ×è͹ä»ÂѧÃдѺ·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃ
ÊÓËÃѺμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒûÃѺÃдѺàÊÕ§Ẻ«Ñº«é͹ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ ÃдѺàÊÕ§ (
àÊÕ§¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¤Çº¤ØÁ
¢³Ð·Õèà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´àÊÕ§¨Ò¡¡ÒúÙμä´é
16 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
) áÅéÇ»ÃѺÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§
ÃÙé¨Ñ¡¡Ñº Windows
à¢éÒ㨡Ò÷ӧҹ¡Ñºà´Ê¡ì·Í»
à´Ê¡ì·Í»¤×;×é¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì â´Â»ÃСͺ´éǾ×é¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹¢¹Ò´ãË−èáÅзÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì·ÕèÊèǹÅèÒ§
äͤ͹ªçÍμ¤Ñ·
àÁ¹Ù Start
Recycle Bin
ᶺÀÒÉÒ
»ØèÁ Start
·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
«ÔÊàμçÁà·ÃÂìáÅйÒÌÔ¡Ò
»ØèÁ Start
à»Ô´àÁ¹Ù Start
·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
áÊ´§â»Ãá¡ÃÁμèÒ§æ ·Õè¡ÓÅѧãªé§Ò¹ÍÂÙèã¹¢³Ð¹Ñé¹ áÅÐÊÒÁÒö¹Óäͤ͹·ÕèãªéºèÍÂ
ÇÒ§äÇéä´éÍÕ¡´éÇÂ
Recycle Bin
ä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃìμèÒ§æ ·Õè¶Ù¡Åº¨Ð¶Ù¡Êè§ÁÒ·Õè¹Õè
ᶺÀÒÉÒ
ÊÅѺÀÒÉÒÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃÍÔ¹¾Øμ
ÃÙé¨Ñ¡¡Ñº Windows 17
à¢éÒ㨡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§àÁ¹Ù Start
àÁ¹Ù Start »ÃСͺ´éÇ·ءæ ÍÂèÒ§·Õè¨Óà»ç¹ã¹¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁãªé§Ò¹ Windows ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù Start ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÃѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ à»Ô´ä¿Åì ¡Ó˹´
¼Ùéãªé¢Í§Ãкºâ´Âãªé Control Panel ¢ÍÃѺ¤ÇÒÁªèÇÂàËÅ×Íâ´Â¡ÒäÅÔ¡·Õè ÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅСÒÃʹѺʹع ¤é¹ËÒÃÒ¡Ò÷Õèμéͧ¡Òèҡ
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìËÃ×ÍÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμä´éâ´Â¡ÒäÅÔ¡·Õè ¤é¹ËÒ
My Computer
Control Panel
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ·ÕèãªéºèÍÂ
ÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅСÒÃʹѺʹع
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ·Ñé§ËÁ´
»ØèÁ Start
18 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
My Computer
áÊ´§¢éÍÁÙŢͧÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì, ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ,ä´Ã¿ìà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡áÅпÅçÍ»»Õé´ÔÊ¡ì áÅÐÊÒÁÒöãªé
à¾×èͤé¹ËÒáÅÐà»Ô´ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃìμèÒ§æ ä´éÍÕ¡´éÇÂ
Control Panel
ªèÇÂãËé¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´¤èÒμèÒ§æ ãËé¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä´é
ÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅÐ
¡ÒÃʹѺʹع
ÊÓËÃѺàÃÕº¡ãªéÇÔ¸ÕãªéÍ͹äÅ¹ì ´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺÇÔ¹â´ÇÊìáÅСÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ
¤é¹ËÒ
ªèÇÂãËé¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒö¤é¹ËÒ¢éÍÁÙÅã¹ä¿ÅìμèÒ§æ ËÃ×ͨҡÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμä´é
Run
Ãѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁμèÒ§æ ËÃ×ÍàÍ¡ÊÒÃμèÒ§æ
à¢éÒ㨡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì
ÇÔ¹â´Çì¤×Íͧ¤ì»ÃСͺ¾×鹰ҹ㹡Ò÷ӧҹ¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ÇÔ¹â´Çì My Computer à»ç¹ÇÔ¹â´ÇìÊÓËÃѺáÊ´§¢éÍÁÙÅ ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì
¨Ð¶Ù¡ãªéà»ç¹μÑÇÍÂèÒ§à¾×èÍáÊ´§Í§¤ì»ÃСͺμèÒ§æ ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > My Computer
äͤ͹â¿Åà´ÍÃì
äμàμÔźÒÃì
àÁ¹ÙºÒÃì
»ØèÁ»Ô´
»ØèÁ¢ÂÒÂ
»ØèÁÂèÍ
ÇÔ¹â´Çì Quick
Task
â¿Åà´ÍÃì
ä¿Åì
´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡àÍ¡ÊÒÃ
·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìËÃ×Í´ÔÊ¡ì
μèÒ§æ
¤Ø³¨ÐàËç¹ä¿ÅìáÅÐ
â¿Åà´ÍÃìμèÒ§æ
´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì (ä´Ã¿ìã¹à¤Ã×èͧ) à¾×èÍ´Ùâ¿Åà´ÍÃìáÅÐä¿ÅìμèÒ§æ ÀÒÂã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¹Ñé¹æ ËÒ¡äÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃáÊ´§
¢éÍÁÙÅÀÒÂã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Show the contents of this folder
ä´Ã¿ì¤×ÍÍÐäÃ?
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¨Ñ´à¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅ·ÕèÁÕ¡Òúѹ·Ö¡ä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃìμèÒ§æ àÍÒäÇé áÅÐÊÒÁÒöàÃÕ¡ÍèÒ¹¢éÍÁÙŨҡÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇä´é
â¿Åà´ÍÃì¤×ÍÍÐäÃ?
â¿Åà´ÍÃì¶Ù¡ãªéà¾×èͨѴ¡ÅØèÁáÅШѴ¡ÒÃä¿ÅìÍÂèÒ§à»ç¹Ãкº áÅÐÍÒ¨ÁÕä¿ÅìμèÒ§æ ã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃìÂèÍÂä´é´éÇ «Ö觨Ð
àËÁ×͹¡ÑºªÑé¹Çҧ˹ѧÊ×Í
ä¿Åì¤×ÍÍÐäÃ?
ä¿Åì¤×ÍàÍ¡ÊÒÃËÃ×ͼŨҡ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁμèÒ§æ â´ÂàÃÕ¡ÍÕ¡ÍÂèÒ§ÇèÒ ¢éÍÁÙÅ
¡ÒôÙâ¤Ã§ÊÃéÒ§·Ñé§ËÁ´¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì
¤ÅÔ¡äͤ͹â¿Åà´ÍÃìã¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃìà¾×èÍ´Ùâ¤Ã§ÊÃéÒ§·Ñé§ËÁ´ ¤ÅÔ¡ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§à¾×èÍ¡ÅѺä»ÂѧÇÔ¹â´Çì Quick Task
ÃÙé¨Ñ¡¡Ñº Windows 19
ÈÙ¹ÂìÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅСÒÃʹѺʹع
ÈÙ¹ÂìÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅСÒÃʹѺʹع (Help and Support Center) ÊÒÁÒöãªéÍéÒ§ÍÔ§áÅд٢éÍÁÙÅà¾×èÍ¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä´é
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Help and Support
Windows XP Tour
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μèÒ§æ ·ÕèÁÕã¹ Windows XP ä´é
â´Â¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Tour Windows XP
ËÃ×ͤÅÔ¡ Start > All Programs > Accessories > Tour Windows XP
¤ÅÔ¡·ÕèáμèÅÐËÑÇ¢éÍà¾×èÍËÒ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μèÒ§æ ¢Í§ Windows XP
20 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¡ÒÃãªéä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
¤Ø³ÁÕä´Ã¿ìẺã´áººË¹Öè§μèÍ仹ÕéμÔ´μÑé§äÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
ä´Ã¿ CD-ROM
ÍèÒ¹á¼è¹«Õ´
ä´Ã¿ì DVD-ROM
ÍèÒ¹á¼è¹«Õ´ÕáÅдÕÇÕ´
ä´Ã¿ì CD-RW/DVD-ROM Combo
ÍèÒ¹á¼è¹ CD/DVD áÅÐà¢Õ¹á¼è¹ CD ä´é
ä´Ã¿ì DVD Super Multi Drive
ÍèÒ¹á¼è¹ CD/DVDs áÅÐà¢Õ¹¢éÍÁÙÅŧá¼è¹ CD/DVDs »ÃÐàÀ·¢Í§ DVD ·Õèãªéä´éÁÕ DVD ± R,
DVD ± RW áÅÐ DVD-RAM
ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì³àÊÃÔÁ â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹á¤μμÒÅçÍ¡¼ÅÔμÀѳ±ì à¾×èÍ´ÙÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢éÍÁÙŨÓà¾ÒÐ
¡ÒÃãÊèá¼è¹«Õ´Õ
1. ¡´»ØèÁ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡·Õè´éÒ¹¢ÇҢͧä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
2. àÁ×èͶҴ«Õ´ÕÃÍÁàÅ×è͹ÍÍ¡ ãËéÇÒ§á¼è¹«Õ´Õŧ㹶Ҵâ´Â˧Ò´éÒ¹·ÕèÁÕ©ÅÒ¡¢Öé¹ áÅéÇ¡´á¼è¹«Õ´Õŧ¨¹¡ÃзÑè§ä´éÂÔ¹àÊÕ§¤ÅÔ¡
ªèͧ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡©Ø¡à©Ô¹
»ØèÁ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡
ÊÑ−−Ò³ LED
3. ´Ñ¹¶Ò´à¢éÒ¨¹ä´éÂÔ¹àÊÕ§¤ÅÔ¡
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 21
¡ÒùÓá¼è¹«Õ´ÕÍÍ¡
1. ËÂØ´¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁà¾×èÍãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒÊÑ−−Ò³ä¿ LED áÊ´§¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁËÂØ´¡ÃоÃÔº
2. ¡´»ØèÁ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡·Õè´éÒ¹¢ÇҢͧä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
3. àÁ×èͶҴÇÒ§«Õ´ÕàÅ×è͹ÍÍ¡ ãËé¹Óá¼è¹«Õ´ÕÍÍ¡¨Ò¡¶Ò´¹Ñé¹
4. ´Ñ¹¶Ò´à¢éÒ¨¹ä´éÂÔ¹àÊÕ§¤ÅÔ¡
ËÒ¡¤Ø³¹Óá¼è¹«Õ´ÕÍÍ¡¢³Ð·ÕèÊÑ−−Ò³ä¿ LED Âѧ¤§μÔ´ÍÂÙè ´ÔÊ¡ìÍÒ¨àÊÕÂËÒÂáÅТéÍÁÙÅã¹á¼è¹
ÍÒ¨ä´éÃѺ¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
ªèͧ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡©Ø¡à©Ô¹
¡ÒùÓá¼è¹«Õ´ÕÍÍ¡¨Ò¡ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ·ÕèäÁè·Ó§Ò¹μÒÁ»¡μÔËÃ×ÍàÁ×èͻԴà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ãËé¹Ó¤ÅԻ˹պ¡ÃдÒÉ
ÁÒ´Ñ´áÅéÇÊÍ´»ÅÒ¤ÅÔ»à¢éÒ·Õèªèͧ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡©Ø¡à©Ô¹ (ÍÂÙè¶Ñ´¨Ò¡»ØèÁ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡) áÅéÇ¡´¤éÒ§äÇ騹¶Ò´ãÊè«Õ´Õ
à»Ô´ÍÍ¡
¡Ò÷ӤÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´á¼è¹«Õ´ÕËÃ×Í´ÕÇÕ´Õ
·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´´ÔÊ¡ìâ´Âãªé¼éÒÊÐÍÒ´â´Âàªç´¨Ò¡ÈÙ¹Âì¡ÅÒ§ÍÍ¡ä»´éÒ¹¹Í¡
22 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ Windows Media Player
Window Media Player ªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅè¹áÅШѴ¡ÒÃä¿ÅìàÊÕ§áÅÐÇÔ´ÕâÍä´é
¡ÒÃà»Ô´â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Windows Media Player ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Start > All Programs > Accessories > Entertainment > Windows Media Player
¡ÒÃÃѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁà»ç¹¤ÃÑéè§áá¨ÐáÊ´§Ë¹éҨ͡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ ¡Ó˹´¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óº¹·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯Ë¹éÒ¨Í
àÁ×èÍμÑ駤èÒàÊÃç¨áÅéÇ Ë¹éÒ¨ÍμèÍ仹Õé¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ
à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì
¾×é¹·Õè¤Çº¤ØÁ¡ÒÃàÅè¹
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ã¹¡Òô٢éÍÁÙÅÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´¡ÒÃãªé Windows Media Player:
àÃÕ¡ãªé Windows Media Player áÅФÅÔ¡¢ÇÒà˹×Í Function Taskbar áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Help > Windows Media Player
Help
¡ÒÃàÅè¹á¼è¹ÇÔ´ÕâÍ«Õ´Õ
ËÒ¡äÁèÊÒÁÒöÃѹá¼è¹ÇÔ´ÕâÍ«Õ´Õä´éÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé
1. ãÊèá¼è¹ÇÔ´ÕâÍ«Õ´Õŧã¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
2. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ¢Öé¹ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèâ¿Åà´ÍÃì MPEGAV
3. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿Åì .dat
4. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ [Caution] ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Open With
5. àÅ×Í¡ "Select the program from a list" áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
6. àÅ×Í¡ Windows Media Player ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ OK ÇÔ´ÕâͨÐàÃÔèÁàÅè¹
¡Ãкǹ¡ÒâéÒ§μé¹ãªéä´é੾ÒСѺÇÔ´ÕâÍ«Õ´Õ·ÕèÁÕä¿Åì .dat à·èÒ¹Ñé¹ ¡ÒÃàÅè¹ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¤ÇÒÁáμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹
ä»μÒÁª¹Ô´¢Í§ÇÔ´ÕâÍ«Õ´Õ
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 23
¡ÒÃà¢Õ¹¢éÍÁÙÅÅ§ã¹«Õ´Õ (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡)
ËÒ¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕä´Ãì¿ CD-RW ·Õè ¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒö¤Ñ´ÅÍ¡¢éÍÁÙÅä»Âѧá¼è¹«Õ´Õà»ÅèÒËÃ×ÍÊÃéÒ§á¼è¹ÍÍ´ÔâÍ«Õ´Õä´é
¤Ø³¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöà¢Õ¹¢éÍÁÙÅŧã¹á¼è¹«Õ´Õ·ÕèÁÕ¢éÍÁÙźѹ·Ö¡ÍÂÙèáÅéÇ
1. ãÊèá¼è¹«Õ´Õà»ÅèÒŧã¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
2. ã¹ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ [CD Drive] ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Open Writable CD Folder áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ¢Öé¹
3. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > My Computer
4. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì My Computer ãËéàÅ×Í¡ä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒäѴÅÍ¡ áÅéÇÅÒ¡ä»ÇÒ§ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
ÇÔ¹â´Çì My Computer
ÇÔ¹â´Çìä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
4.
ÅÒ¡áÅéÇÇÒ§â¿Åà´ÍÃìËÃ×Íä¿Åì·Õèμéͧ¡
5. ¤ÅÔ¡ Write these files to CD
5. ¤ÅÔ¡ Write these files to CD ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÃÍÁ
6. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ CD Writing Wizard ¢Öé¹ ãËé»é͹ª×èÍá¼è¹«Õ´Õ áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Next ¢éÍÁÙŨÐàÃÔèÁ¶Ù¡¤Ñ´ÅÍ¡
7. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒäѴÅÍ¡àÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙÃ³ì ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢éͤÇÒÁá¨é§ãËé·ÃÒº áÅÐÇÔ¹â´Çì¢Í§ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´Õ¨Ð¶Ù¡à»Ô´¢Öé¹â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃà¢Õ¹á¼è¹«Õ´Õ
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Help and Support ¾ÔÁ¾ì "CD copy" ŧ㹿ÔÅ´ì¤é¹ËÒ áÅéǤÅÔ¡äͤ͹ Search (
)
㹡ÒÃàºÔÃ칫մÕà¾Å§:
àÃÕ¡ãªé Windows Media Player áÅФÅÔ¡¢ÇÒà˹×Í Function Taskbar áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Help > Windows Media Player
Help
àÅ×Í¡ Using the Player > Using CDs, DVDs and VCDs > Using CDs > Burning your own CDs > To burn
your own CD à¾×èÍ´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅâ´ÂÅÐàÍÕ´
24 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
à¾ÅÔ¹¡ÑºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì (S/PDIF Port)
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³Ê¹ÑºÊ¹Ø¹àÍÒμì¾ØμẺ 5.1 ᪹à¹Å «Öè§à»ç¹¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¾×é¹°Ò¹¢Í§ÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì áÅÐä´Ã¿ì DVD
â´ÂãËé¤Ø³ÀÒ¾àÊÕ§Ẻ 3D áÅÐ˹éҨͷÕè¤ÁªÑ´
ÍÐää×ÍÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì?
ÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì ÁÑ¡¨Ð»ÃСͺ´éÇÂâ·Ã·Ñȹì, DVD, ÅÓ⾧Ẻ 5.1 ᪹à¹ÅáÅÐáÍÁ»ì´Ô¨ÔμÍÅáÅÐ˹éÒ¨Í
¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´ÊÙ§ (MPEG2) áÅÐÃкºàÊÕ§à«ÍÃìÃÒǹ´ìẺ 3D (Dolby 5.1 ËÃ×Í DTS) ´éÇÂÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¾ÅÔ¹¡ÑºÀÒ¾·Õè¤ÁªÑ´áÅÐàÊÕ§¡ÃÐËÖèÁ㹺éÒ¹ä´éàËÁ×͹¡Ñº¡ÒÃÃѺªÁã¹âçÀҾ¹μÃì
â´ÂμéͧÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ìμèÒ§æ μèÍ仹Õéà¾×èÍãËéÊÒÁÒöÃѺªÁÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃìä´é
ÅÓ⾧Ãкº 5.1 ᪹à¹Å (áÍÁ»ì»ÅÔ¿ÒÂàÍÍÃì, ÅÓ⾧,ÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅàª×èÍÁμèÍ)
á¡«×éÍä´é
ä´Ã¿ì DVD áÅÐâ»Ãá¡ÃÁÊÓËÃѺàÅè¹ DVD ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ
á¼è¹ DVD ·ÕèʹѺʹعÃкºàÊÕ§Ẻ 5.1 ᪹à¹Å
á¡«×éÍä´é
¡ÒÃãªéÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃì ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÒ§æ ´Ñ§μèÍ仹Õé:
• ¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. àª×èÍÁμèÍÃкºÅÓ⾧Ẻ 5.1 ᪹à¹Åà¢éҡѺà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
• ¢Ñ¹é ·Õè 2. ¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡àÍÒμì¾ØμàÊÕ§´Ô¨ÔμÍÅ·Õèà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
• ¢Ñ¹é ·Õè 3. à»Ô´àÍÒμì¾Øμ S/PDIF ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ DVD
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 25
¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. àª×èÍÁμèÍÃкºÅÓ⾧Ẻ 5.1 ᪹à¹Åà¢éҡѺà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
1. μèÍá¨ç¤ S/PDIF ¢Í§ÃкºáÅÐáÍÁ»ì»ÅÔ¿ÒÂàÍÍÃìẺ 5.1 ᪹à¹Å
2. μèÍÅÓ⾧à¢éҡѺáÍÁ»ì»ÅÔ¿ÒÂàÍÍÃì (·ÓμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó㹤ÙèÁ×ͧ͢ÅÓ⾧
3. ¡ÒÃàÃÕ¡´Ù¼èÒ¹â·Ã·Ñȹì ãËéàª×èÍÁμèÍâ·Ã·ÑȹìáÅéÇà»ÅÕè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹ãËéà»ç¹â·Ã·Ñȹìã¹ Display Properties
”¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡” (¹. 92)
â·Ã·Ñȹì
«ÑºÇÙ¿à¿ÍÃì
´Ô¨ÔμÍÅáÍÁ»ì»ÅÔ¿ÒÂàÍÍÃì
ÅÓ⾧˹éÒ¢ÇÒ
ÅÓ⾧˹éÒ«éÒÂ
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
ÅÓ⾧¡ÅÒ§
ÅÓ⾧à«ÍÃìÃÒǹ´ì«éÒÂ
ÅÓ⾧à«ÍÃìÃÒǹ´ì¢ÇÒ
¢Ñé¹μ͹·Õè 2. ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкºàÊÕ§à»ç¹àÍÒμì¾ØμàÊÕ§Ẻ´Ô¨ÔμÑÅ㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÃкºàÊÕ§㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¨Ð¡Ó˹´ãËéà»ç¹àÍÒμì¾ØμẺ´Ô¨ÔμÑÅμÑé§áμèááàÃÔèÁ ¤Ø³¨Ö§äÁè¨Óà»ç¹μéͧμÑ駤èÒà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÂ×¹Âѹ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒμèÍ仹Õé
1. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ Volume Control (
) ã¹¾×é¹·Õèá¨é§¢éÍÁÙŢͧ·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Options > Advanced Controls
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Advanced ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ Master Volume áÅÐμÃǨÊͺÇèÒäÁèä´éàÅ×Í¡ÃÒ¡Òà 1 Disable Digital Output äÇé
μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¹Õé¨ÐμéͧäÁèãªé§Ò¹ à¾×èÍãËéÊÒÁÒöãªéàÍÒμì¾Øμã¹ÃٻẺ´Ô¨ÔμÑÅä´é
26 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¢Ñé¹·Õè 3. à»Ô´àÍÒμì¾Øμ S/PDIF ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ DVD
㹡ÒÃãªéÅÓ⾧ 5.1 ᪹à¹Å ¤Ø³μéͧμÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ CyberLink Power DVD ¨Ò¡
«Õ´Õ CyberLink DVD Solution Installation CD (ËÃ×Í System software Media) ·ÕèÁҡѺ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹à»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èҴѧμèÍ仹Õé
CyberLink PowerDVD à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁàÊÃÔÁ áÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕãËé㹺ҧÃØè¹
1. àÃÕ¡ãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ CyberLink Power DVD áÅФÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ Configuration (
)
2. ã¹á·çº Audio ãËé¡Ó˹´¤èÒ Audio Output à»ç¹ "Use SPDIF" áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¾ÅÔ´à¾ÅÔ¹¡ÑºÃкºâÎÁà¸ÕÂàμÍÃìâ´ÂÃѺªÁ DVD ä´éáÅéÇ
¡ÒäǺ¤ØÁÃдѺ¤ÇÒÁ´Ñ§¢Í§àÊÕ§ã¹ÅÓ⾧Ẻ 5.1 ᪹à¹Å ãËéãªé»ØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁ·Õè´Ô¨ÔμÍÅáÍÁ»ì (´Ù¤ÙèÁ×ͧ͢ÅÓ⾧)
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 27
¡ÒÃãªéÊÅçÍμ Multi Card (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
àÁ×èÍãªéÊÅçÍμ Multi Card ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé¡ÒÃì´Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óàªè¹ Memory Stick, Memory Stick Pro, SD Card, MMC ËÃ×Í XD Card
à¾×èÍà»ç¹´ÔÊ¡ì·Õè¶Í´à¢éÒÍÍ¡ä´é ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹¢éÍÁÙÅÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¡ÑºÍØÖ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔμÑÅÍ×è¹æ àªè¹¡Åéͧ´Ô¨ÔμÑÅ
Memory Stick
Memory Stick Pro
SD Card
MMC
XD Card
ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´à»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁáÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕÍÂÙè㹺ҧÃØè¹
¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§¡ÒÃãªé¡ÒÃì´Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé¡ÒÃì´Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óà¾×èÍà¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹ÕéäÁèÃͧÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¡ÒäØéÁ¤ÃͧÅÔ¢ÊÔ·¸Ôì
¡ÒÃãÊèáÅÐãªéàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´
¹ÓμÑÇ»éͧ¡Ñ¹ÊÅçÍμÍÍ¡ ¡è͹·Õè¨ÐãªéÊÅçÍμ Multi Card ¡´·ÕèÊèǹ»ÅÒ¢ͧμÑÇ»éͧ¡Ñ¹àºÒæ
áÅйÓÍÍ¡¨Ò¡ÊÅçÍμàÁ×èÍÂ×è¹ÍÍ¡ÁÒ
ÊÍ´àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´â´Â˧Ò¢Öé¹
¡ÒÃãÊè¼Ô´´éÒ¹ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´áÅФÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä´éÃѺ¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒÂ
28 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
1. ãÊè¡ÒÃì´Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óã¹ÊÅçÍμ Multi Card
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > My Computer ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´·ÕèÊÍ´à¢éÒ仢Öé¹
Memory Stick
3. ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢Õ¹¢éÍÁÙÅŧã¹àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ä´é 㹡óշÕèàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´¹Ñé¹ÂѧäÁèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμ ãËé·Ó¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμ
¡è͹¹ÓÁÒãªé§Ò¹
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒÃËÅØ´Ãèǧä´é§èÒ¢³Ð·Õèà¤Å×è͹ÂéÒÂà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ´Ñ§¹Ñé¹ãËéà¡çºàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´
á¡äÇéμèÒ§ËÒ¡
¡ÒùÓá¼è¹àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ÍÍ¡
1. ¡´»ÅÒ¢ͧàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´àºÒæ à¾×èÍãËé´Õ´μÑÇÍÍ¡ÁÒ
2. ËÒ¡¡ÒÃì´àÅ×è͹ÍÍ¡ÁÒâ´ÂÁÕàÊÕ§¤ÅÔ¡ ãËé¹Ó¡ÒÃì´ÍÍ¡¨Ò¡Ãкº
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 29
¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμá¼è¹àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ä´éËÅѧ¨Ò¡·Ó¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμáÅéÇà·èÒ¹Ñé¹ â´Â¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´Áմѧ¹Õé
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμ¨Ðź¢éÍÁÙÅ·Ñé§ËÁ´ã¹àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ ¤Ø³¨Ö§¤ÇÃμÃǨÊͺãËéá¹èã¨àÊÕ¡è͹ÇèÒäÁèÁÕ¢éÍÁÙÅ
ÊÓ¤Ñ−ã´æ ËŧàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙè㹡ÒÃì´¡è͹·Õè¨Ð·Ó¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμ
¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¢éÍÁÙÅã¹àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´
ãËéàÅ×è͹ᶺ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¢éÍÁÙŢͧ Memory Stick ËÃ×Í SD memory card ä»ÂѧμÓá˹è§Åçͤ
1. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > My Computer
2. ¡´»ØèÁ¢ÇҢͧ·Ñªá¾´àÁ×èÍàÅ×Í¡·Õèä´Ã¿ìàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ Format ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù»çÍ»ÍÑ»
3. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁ·Ó¡ÒÿÍÃìáÁμ
¡ÒÃãªéàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´·Ñé§ã¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔμÍÅÍ×è¹æ àªè¹ ¡Åéͧ´Ô¨ÔμÍÅ á¹Ð¹ÓãËé¿ÍÃìáÁμ
àÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´¹Ñé¹æ ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔμÍÅâ´Âμç ËÒ¡¤Ø³¿ÍÃìáÁμàÁâÁÃÕè¡ÒÃì´ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨μéͧ
¿ÍÃìáÁμ¡ÒÃì´ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ô¨ÔμÍÅà¾×èÍãËéÊÒÁÒöãªé¡ÒÃì´¹Ñé¹ä´é¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ
30 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªéÊÅçÍμ PC
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéÎÒÃì´áÇÃ쪹ԴμèÒ§æ ·ÕèÃͧÃѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¿« PCMCIA áÅÐ Express ¼èÒ¹·Ò§ÊÅçÍμ¾Õ«Õ¡ÒÃì´ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¹ÕéÁÕÊÅçÍμ 2
ÊͧÊÅçÍμ áÅÐÃͧÃѺ»ÃÐàÀ·¡ÒÃì´ PCMCIA áÅÐ Express 16/32 ºÔμ type I ËÃ×Í II
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãÊè¡ÒÃì´ Express ã¹ÊÅçÍμ´éÒ¹º¹ áÅСÒÃì´ PCMCIA ã¹ÊÅçÍμ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§
ÊÅçÍμ¾Õ«Õ¡ÒÃì´¹ÕéäÁèÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃì´ ZV ËÃ×Í¡ÒÃì´ PCMCIA III
¡ÒÃãÊè¡ÒÃì´ PC
¡è͹¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ â»Ã´¹ÓμÑÇá·¹·Õè¡ÒÃì´à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹ÊÅçÍμÍÍ¡¡è͹
´éÒ¹º¹áÅдéÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§μÑÇá·¹·Õè¡ÒÃì´áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ â»Ã´μÃǨÊͺ¡è͹·Õè¨ÐãÊèμÑÇá·¹·Õè¡ÒÃì´¡ÅѺà¢éÒ·Õè
¡´»ØèÁ¹ÓÍÍ¡¢Í§ÊÅçÍμ¾Õ«Õ¡ÒÃì´Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§à¾×è͹ӡÒÃì´ÍÍ¡ ¡´
ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§à¾×è͹ÓμÑÇá·¹·Õè¡ÒÃì´ÍÍ¡
1. ãÊè¡ÒÃì´ PC ŧã¹ÊÅçÍμ PC ´éÒ¹¢éÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
μÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒ¡ÒÃì´ PC ãÊèäÇéã¹ÊÅçÍμÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¡ÒÃãÊè¡ÒÃì´¼Ô´¨Ð·ÓãËéÊÅçÍμ¡ÒÃì´ PC àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é
ãÊè¡ÒÃì´ Express ·Õè¹Õè
ãÊè¡ÒÃì´ PCMCIA ·Õè¹Õè
»ØèÁ¹Óá¼è¹ÍÍ¡
μÑÇÍÂèÒ§) ¡ÒÃì´ PCMCIA
2. Windows ¨ÐμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì·Õè¨Óà»ç¹μéͧãªéãËé¡ÒÃì´â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ ËÒ¡äÁ辺ä´ÃàÇÍÃìã¹ Windows ¤Ø³μéͧμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì
â´Âãªé´ÔÊ¡ì·Õèä´éÃѺÁҡѺ¡ÒÃì´¹Ñé¹æ
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 31
¡ÒùӡÒÃì´ PC ÍÍ¡
1. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ Safely Removes Hardware (
) º¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
2. ·Õèä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì [Safely Remove Hardware] ãËéàÅ×Í¡¡ÒÃì´ PC ·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁáÅéǤÅÔ¡ Stop
3. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì [Stop a Hardware Device] ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ OK
4. ¤ÅÔ¡ Close à¾×èͻԴä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì [Safely Remove Hardware]
5. ´Ñ¹»ØèÁ¹Ó¡ÒÃì´ÍÍ¡¢Í§ÊÅçÍμ¡ÒÃì´ PC ˹Ö觤ÃÑé§ »ØèÁ¨Ð´Õ´μÑÇÍÍ¡
6. ¡´»ØèÁÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§à¾×è͹ӡÒÃì´ PC ÍÍ¡
¡ÒÃì´ Express ¤×ÍÍÐäÃ
¡ÒÃì´ Express à»ç¹¡ÒÃì´ PCMCIA ÃØè¹ãËÁè·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃì´μèÒ§æ àªè¹ ¡ÒÃì´ LAN ¡ÒÃì´ TV ¡ÒÃì´àÊÕ§ ÏÅÏ
ÊÅçÍμ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¹ÕéÃͧÃѺ ExpressCard/34 áÅÐ ExpressCard/54
32 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé EasyBox
ãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ EasyBox à¾×èÍãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μèÒ§æ ¢Í§ Windows ä´é§èÒÂáÅÐÊдǡ
àÃÕ¹ÃÙéà¡ÕèÂǡѺ EasyBox
´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ EasyBox ( ) º¹à´Ê¡ì·Í»
(ËÃ×ÍàÅ×Í¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > EasyBox > EasyBox)
• System: ÁդسÊÁºÑμÔ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкºãËéàÅ×Í¡ãªé ÃÇÁ·Ñ駡Òà defrag ´ÔÊ¡ì, ¡ÒÃźä¿Åì/â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèäÁèä´éãªé, ¡ÒáÓ˹´
μÒÃÒ§¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅСÒáÙéÃкº
• BIOS: ã¹âËÁ´ windows ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÃÕ¡ãªé¤èÒμÑé§μ鹢ͧ BIOS áÅÐà»ÅÕè¹ÅӴѺ¡ÒúÙμ
• Desktop: ¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃà´Ê¡ì·Í»»ÃСͺ´éÇ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹¢¹Ò´ÃٻẺÍÑ¡ÉÃ, ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¡ÒâÂÒÂ, ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒàÁ¹Ù
Start áÅСÒèѴ¡ÒÃäͤ͹ quick launch º¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
• Security: «Ö觤سÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ·ÕèÁբͧ Windows XP SP2 áÅФسÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕ蹤èÒ
¤Í¹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒä¿ÃìÇÍÅÅì, Windows automatic updates áÅСÒúÅçͤ»çÍ»ÍÑ»àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
• ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ (Plus Tip): ¡ÅØèÁ¢Í§¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹à¾ÔèÁàμÔÁμèÒ§æ ¢Í§ Windows ·ÕèÁÕ»ÃÐ⪹ìÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº
(ÁÕ¤Ó͸ԺÒªçÍμ¤Ñ·¢Í§ Windows ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃìà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡áÅСÒÃà»Ô´áªÃìâ¿Åà´ÍÃì ÏÅÏ)
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 33
¡ÒÃãªé EasyBox
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¡ÒèѴ¡ÒäÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀѨÐÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ã¹·Õè¹Õéà¾×èÍà»ç¹μÑÇÍÂèÒ§à¾×èÍáÊ´§¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§ Easybox
¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§ä¿ÃìÇÍÅÅì
Windows Firewall ·Ó˹éÒ·Õè»éͧ¡Ñ¹¼Ùéãªé·ÕèäÁèä´éÃѺ͹Ø−Òμ¨Ò¡¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹Ãкº¢Í§¤Ø³¼èÒ¹·Ò§à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ËÃ×ÍÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
1. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > EasyBox > EasyBox
2. ¤ÅÔ¡Security ¨Ò¡àÁ¹ÙºÒÃì´éÒ¹º¹
3. àÅ×Í¡ Windows Firewall Settings ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù Security ·Ò§´éÒ¹«éÒÂ
4. àÅ×Í¡ÃдѺä¿ÃìÇÍÅÅì
5. ¤ÅÔ¡ Apply
¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ User Setting ÊÓËÃѺ¡Ó˹´¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ·Õè«Ñº«é͹ ÃÇÁ·Ñ駢éÍ¡àÇé¹áÅСÒÃ͹Ø−ÒμμèÒ§æ
34 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé Samsung Update Plus
Samsung Update Plus ¤×Í«Í¿μìáÇÃì·ÕèãªéμÃǨÊͺáÅÐÍÑ»à´μ«Í¿μìáÇÃìáÅÐä´ÃàÇÍÃìμèÒ§æ ¢Í§ Samsung
·ÕèμÔ´μÑé§äÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì Samsung ¢Í§¤Ø³ãËéà»ç¹àÇÍÃìªÑ¹ÅèÒÊØ´ ¡ÒÃãªé Samsung Update Plus
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³μéͧàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μ«Í¿μìáÇÃìáÅÐä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§ Samsung
1. àÅ×Í¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Update Plus > Samsung Update Plus
ËÒ¡¹Õèà»ç¹¤ÃÑé§áá·Õè¤Ø³Ãѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´ÇÊìͺ¶ÒÁÇèҤسàËç¹´éÇ¡Ѻ¢éÍμ¡Å§ã¹¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ËÃ×ÍäÁè
¤ÅÔ¡àÅ×Í¡ Agree à¾×èÍãªé«Í¿μìáÇÃì¹Õé
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ Search for and Install Updates áÅéǤÅÔ¡»ØèÁ Search for New Updates
3. ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μ«Í¿μìáÇÃìËÃ×Íä´ÃàÇÍÃìÊÓËÃѺà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÃÒ¡Òâͧ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μμèÒ§æ ¢Öé¹
àÅ×Í¡¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μ·Õèμéͧ¡ÒèҡÅÔÊμìáÅéǤÅÔ¡ Install Update à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μ
(ÃÒ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μº¹Ë¹éÒ¨ÍÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§ä»μÒÁÃØ蹢ͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õèãªé)
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 35
¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μáμèÅÐÃÒ¡ÒÃμéͧ·Óᡨҡ¡Ñ¹
ËÒ¡¤Ø³àÅ×Í¡ Install â´Â·ÕèÃÒ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μμéͧμÔ´μÑé§á¡¨Ò¡¡Ñ¹ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢éͤÇÒÁá¨é§ãËé¤Ø³·ÃÒº
·ÓμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óà¾×èÍ·Ó¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ãËé¶Ù¡μéͧ
¡ÒÃáÊ´§ÃÒ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
â´Â¤èÒ´Õ¿ÍÅμì ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ä´éÃѺ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡ãËé¤é¹ËÒ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μâ´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μ
ãËÁèæ ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃá¨é§ãËé·ÃÒºÀÒÂã¹¾×é¹·Õèá¨é§àμ×͹ ¤ÅÔ¡ºÍÅÅÙ¹¢Í§äͤ͹ÇÔ¸Õãªéã¹¾×é¹·Õèá¨é§àμ×͹ «Ö觤س¨Ð
ÊÒÁÒö¾ºàÇÍÃìªÑ¹ÅèÒÊØ´¢Í§¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μä´é
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕ蹡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒÍÑ»à´μÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ Configuration ã¹ÃÙ»·Õè 2 áÅÐà»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
Samsung Update Plus äÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃÍÑ»à´μμèÒ§æ ÊÓËÃѺ«Í¿μìáÇÃìáÅÐä´ÃàÇÍÃìÍ×è¹æ ·ÕèμÔ´μÑé§à¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ
36 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé AVStation premium
AVStation premium à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁÁÑÅμÔÁÕà´ÕÂÀÒÂã¹Ãкº ·ÕèªèÇÂãËé¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒöʹءʹҹ¡Ñº´¹μÃÕ ÀÒ¾¶èÒ ÇÔ´ÕâÍ ÀҾ¹μÃì
áÅÐÍ×è¹æ ÍÕ¡ÁÒ¡ÁÒÂã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁà´ÕÂÇ
•
•
•
•
AVStation premium à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁàÊÃÔÁ áÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕãËé㹺ҧ ÃØè¹
˹éҨͷÕèãªé㹤ÙèÁ×͹ÕéÍÒ¨μèҧ仨ҡ˹éҨͨÃÔ§ μÒÁàÇÍÃìªÑ¹¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
Ê¶Ò¹Õ TV ¨ÐÁÕãËé੾ÒÐã¹Ãкº·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ TV à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
ÊÓËÃѺÇÔ¸Õãªéâ´ÂÅÐàÍÕ´ â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹ÇÔ¸Õãªé¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁμé¹áÅÐÃٻẺ˹éÒ¨Í
㹡ÒÃàÃÕ¡ãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > AVStation premium > AVStation premium
ÁԩйÑé¹ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ AVStation premium (
) ·Õèà´Ê¡ì·Í»
v
x
z
c
z Station Bar
x Menu Bar
c Library
v Exit
¡´»ØèÁ Exit à¾×èÍÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
MUSIC
ãªéÊÓËÃѺà»Ô´ä¿Åì´¹μÃÕËÃ×Í«Õ´Õà¾Å§
PHOTO
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé´ÙËÃ×Íá¡éä¢ÀÒ¾¶èÒ (ÃÙ»ÀÒ¾) áÅдÙÀÒ¾¶èÒÂà»ç¹áººÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
MOVIE
ãªéÊÓËÃѺàÅè¹ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍËÃ×ÍÀҾ¹μÃìã¹á¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ/ÇÕ«Õ´Õ
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 37
MUSIC Station
àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation premium áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè MUSIC ·Õè Station Bar
z
x
c
b
z àÁ¹ÙºÒÃì¢Í§ MUSIC
x Station Bar
c MUSIC Library
v Register a File
b à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì
n »ØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁà¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì
m »ØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁ¡ÒÃàÅè¹
, ¡ÒäǺ¤ØÁÃдѺàÊÕ§
. μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒÃàÅè¹
/ »ØèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ EDS
n
v
m
,
.
/
EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound) ¤×ÍÍÐäÃ
EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound) ¤×Íà·¤â¹âÅÂÕ¡ÒûÃѺ»Ãا¤Ø³ÀÒ¾àÊÕ§·Õè¾Ñ²¹Ò¢Öé¹â´Â Samsung Electronics
¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒö¿Ñ§àÊÕ§·ÕèªÑ´à¨¹ÂÔ觢Öé¹ËÒ¡ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ EDS ¢³Ð·Õèà»Ô´à¾Å§ËÃ×ÍÇÔ´Õâͨҡ AVStation premium
¡ÒÃàÅ蹫մÕà¾Å§
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃàÅ蹫մÕà¾Å§
1. à»Ô´ AVStation premium áÅÐãÊèá¼è¹«Õ´Õà¾Å§ã¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´Õ
2. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Audio CD ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Play Audio CD using Samsung AVStation áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
38 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
3. á·Ã礷ÕèÍÂÙè㹫մÕà¾Å§¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ã¹à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì áÅÐà¤Ã×èͧ¨ÐàÅè¹á·Ãç¤ááâ´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
ËÒ¡ÁÕ«Õ´Õã¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´ÕÍÂÙèáÅéÇ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè ª×èÍÍÑźÑéÁ ã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì Audio CD ¢Í§ Library
áÅÐà¾ÔèÁá·Ãç¤ã¹à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§á·Ã礷Õèà¾ÔèÁŧã¹à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμì
¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§
ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿Åìà¾Å§ã¹ MUSIC Library ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§ä´éÍÂèÒ§§èÒ´ÒÂ
ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìá·Ãç¤à¾Å§ã¹ Library â»Ã´´Ù·Õè (¹. 40).
1. ä»·Õè MUSIC Station áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè All Music
2. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿Åìà¾Å§ ä¿Åì¹Õé¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹à¾ÅÂìÅÔÊμìáÅШÐà»Ô´¢Öé¹
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 39
àÅè¹á·Ãç¤à¾Å§·ÕèäÁèä´éÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè File > Open àÅ×Í¡ ä¿Åìà¾Å§·Õè¨ÐàÅè¹ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Open á·Ã礷ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨Ð¶Ù¡ÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library áÅШÐà»Ô´¢Öé¹
¡ÒÃÊÃéÒ§ My Playlist
My Playlist à»ç¹ÍÑźÑéÁÊèǹºØ¤¤Å·Õè¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¡çº ¨Ñ´¡Òà áÅÐà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§·Õèâ»Ã´»ÃÒ¹ä´é
ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÊÃéÒ§ My Playlist â»Ã´´Ù¤Óá¹Ð¹Óã¹ÇÔ¸Õãªé¢Í§ MUSIC
¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁä¿Åìà¾Å§ã¹ Library
MUSIC Library ¤×ÍäźÃÒÃÕ·Õèà¡çºä¿Åìà¾Å§·Õèãªéâ´Â MUSIC Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁä¿Åìà¾Å§·ÕèºÑ¹·Ö¡ã¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¢éÒÊÙè Library
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì â¿Åà´ÍÃì ËÃ×ͤé¹ËÒáÅÐà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹μÑÇÍÂèÒ§¢Í§¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁâ¿Åà´ÍÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Register a File (
) ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ Library áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Add by Folders
2. 2. àÅ×Í¡â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕä¿Åìà¾Å§ÍÂÙè áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK ä¿Åìà¾Å§·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹ Library
á·Ã礷Õèãªéã¹ AVStation ¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹ Library â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
40 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
PHOTO Station
àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation premium áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè PHOTO ·Õè Station Bar
z
x
c
,
b n
m
z àÁ¹ÙºÒÃì¢Í§ PHOTO
x Station Bar
c PHOTO Library
v Register a File
b á·çº Image Viewer
n á·çº Image Editor
m ÂéÒÂä»Âѧâ¿Åà´ÍÃìÃдѺº¹
, ´ÙμÑÇÍÂèÒ§/«ÙÁà¢éÒ
v
¡ÒôÙÀÒ¾
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒôÙÀÒ¾·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ PHOTO Library ¤ÃÑé§ÅÐÀÒ¾áÅдÙẺÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿ÅìÀҾ㹠Library â»Ã´´Ù·Õè (¹. 43)
1. ä»·Õè PHOTO Station áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè All Images
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õèâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕÀÒ¾ áÅÐÀÒ¾ã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer
ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer
ÀÒ¾
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 41
3. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèÀÒ¾ ÀÒ¾·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒëÙÁà¢éÒ
• ¡ÒôÙÀÒ¾·ÕèäÁèä´éÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè File > Open àÅ×Í¡ ä¿ÅìÀÒ¾·Õè¨Ð´Ù áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Open
ä¿ÅìÀÒ¾·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨ÐÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library áÅлÃÒ¡¯ã¹ ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer
• ¡ÒôÙÀҾẺàμçÁ¨ÍËÃ×Í´ÙẺÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Full Screen (
) ËÃ×Í»ØèÁ SlideShow (
) ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer
㹡ÒáÅѺÊÙèÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Esc> ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè˹éÒ¨Í
• ¡ÒôÙÊäÅ´ìâªÇ좳пѧà¾Å§
㹡ÒôÙÊäÅ´ìâªÇ좳зÕè¿Ñ§à¾Å§ ãËéà»Ô´à¾Å§¨Ò¡ MUSIC áÅÐà»Ô´ÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
• ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÀÒ¾à»ç¹¾×é¹ËÅѧ
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Set as Background ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer
ÀÒ¾·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨Ð¶Ù¡¡Ó˹´ãËéà»ç¹ÀÒ¾¾×é¹ËÅѧ¢Í§à´Ê¡ì·Í»
42 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃá¡éä¢ÀÒ¾
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕè¹ÃÙ»ÃèÒ§¢Í§ÀÒ¾ á¡éä¢ÀÒ¾ ËÃ×ÍãªéàÍ¿à¿¡μì¾ÔàÈɡѺÀÒ¾ μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¿ѧ¡ìªÑ¹¡ÒÃá¡éä¢ÀÒ¾
1. àÅ×Í¡ÀÒ¾·Õè¨Ðá¡éä¢ã¹ ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Viewer áÅÐàÅ×Í¡á·çº Image Editor ˹éÒ¨Í Image Editor ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
˹éÒ¨Í Image Editor »ÃСͺ´éÇ ÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Workspace áÅÐ á·çºà¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í 3 á·çº.
Image Workspace
«ÙÁà¢éÒ/«ÙÁÍÍ¡
á·çºà¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í
2. á¡éä¢ÀÒ¾â´Âãªéà¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í Shape, Edit áÅÐ Effect
à¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í Shape: à»ÅÕè¹ÃÙ»ÃèÒ§¢Í§ÀÒ¾â´Âãªé¡ÒÃμÑ´áÅСÒÃà»ÅÕè¹¢¹Ò´
à¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í Edit: ÇÒ´àÊé¹ à¾ÔèÁÃÙ»ÀÒ¾ËÃ×Í»é͹μÑÇÍÑ¡ÉÃ
à¤Ã×èͧÁ×Í Effect: ãªéàÍ¿à¿¡μìμèÒ§æ ¡ÑºÀÒ¾
3. àÁ×èÍÊÔé¹ÊØ´¡ÒÃá¡éä¢ÀÒ¾ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Save Edited Image (
) ãμéÇÔ¹â´Çì Image Editor ÀÒ¾·Õèá¡é䢨ж١ºÑ¹·Ö¡
¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁÀҾ㹠Library
PHOTO Library ¤×ÍäźÃÒÃÕ·Õèà¡çºä¿ÅìÀÒ¾·Õè¨Ðãªéâ´Â PHOTO Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì·ÕèºÑ¹·Ö¡äÇé㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìäÇéã¹ Library
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì â¿Åà´ÍÃì ËÃ×ͤé¹ËÒáÅÐà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹μÑÇÍÂèÒ§¢Í§¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁâ¿Åà´ÍÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Register a File (
) ãμé Library áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Add by Folders
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 43
2. àÅ×Í¡â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕä¿ÅìÀÒ¾ÍÂÙè áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK ä¿ÅìÀÒ¾·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹ Library
ä¿ÅìÀÒ¾·Õèãªéã¹ AVStation ¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁŧ㹠Library â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
MOVIE Station
àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation premium áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè MOVIE ã¹ Station Bar
z
x
c
v
b
n
z
x
c
v
b
n
m
,
.
/
àÁ¹ÙºÒÃì¢Í§ MOVIE
Station Bar
MOVIE Library
Register a File
ÇÔ¹â´Çì Video Play
»ØèÁ¤Çº¤ØÁ¡ÒÃàÅè¹
¡ÒäǺ¤ØÁÃдѺàÊÕ§
»ØèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ EDS (â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ¹. 38)
»ØèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ EDI
»ØèÁ Capture
m
,.
/
EDI (Enhanced Digital Image) ¤×ÍÍÐäÃ
EDI (Enhanced Digital Image) ¤×Íà·¤â¹âÅÂÕ»ÃѺ»Ãا¤Ø³ÀÒ¾¢Í§ÀÒ¾·Õè¾Ñ²¹Ò¢Öé¹â´Â Samsung Electronics
¤Ø³¨Ðà¾ÅÔ´à¾ÅÔ¹¡ÑºÀÒ¾·Õè¤ÁªÑ´ÂÔ觢Öé¹ àÁ×èÍãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ EDI ¢³ÐªÁ TV ËÃ×Íà»Ô´ÇÔ´ÕâÍâ´Âãªé AVStation premium
áμèà¤Ã×èͧÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ TV áÅСÒÃì´áÊ´§¼ÅºÒ§»ÃÐàÀ·ÍÒ¨ãªéäÁèä´é¡Ñº EDI
ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ EDS (Enhanced Digital Sound) â»Ã´´Ù·Õè˹éÒ ¹. 38
44 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ
㹡ÒÃàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ¨ÐμéͧÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ «Í¿·ìáÇÃìàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ(àªè¹ CyberLink PowerDVD)
â»Ã´μÔ´μÑ駫Ϳ·ìáÇÃìÊÓËÃѺàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ¡è͹
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation premium áÅÐãÊèá¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õã¹ä´Ã¿ì´ÕÇÕ´Õ
2. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì ‘What do you want Windows to do?’ ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Play DVD Video using Samsung AVStation áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ
OK
3. Ãкº¨ÐàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ
ËÒ¡ÁÕá¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õã¹ä´Ã¿ìÍÂÙèáÅéÇ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè ª×èÍ´ÕÇÕ´Õ ã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì DVD / VCD ¢Í§ Library
Ãкº¨Ðà»Ô´´ÕÇÕ´Õ¹Ñé¹
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 45
¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ MOVIE Library ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿Åìã¹ Library
â»Ã´´Ù·Õè (¹. 47)
1. ä»·Õè MOVIE Station áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè All Movies
2. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ Ãкº¨Ðà»Ô´ä¿Åì¹Ñé¹
• ¡ÒÃàÅè¹ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèäÁèä´éÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè File > Open àÅ×Í¡ ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·Õè¨ÐàÅè¹ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Open ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨Ð¶Ù¡ÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ Library
áÅШÐà»Ô´¢Öé¹
• ¡ÒÃàÅè¹ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍẺàμçÁ¨ÍÀÒ¾
1) ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè˹éҨͻѨ¨ØºÑ¹
2) à¤Ã×èͧ¨Ðà»Ô´ÇÔ´ÕâÍẺàμçÁ¨ÍÀÒ¾ ã¹âËÁ´¹Õé ãËéàÅ×è͹àÁÒÊìä»Âѧ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾à¾×èÍáÊ´§á¶º Play Control
㹡ÒáÅѺÊÙè˹éҨͻ¡μÔ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Esc> ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè˹éÒ¨Í
• ¡ÒèѺÀҾ˹éÒ¨ÍÇÔ´ÕâÍ
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Capture Current Screen (
) ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§ ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Play àÁ×èÍÀÒ¾·Õèμéͧ¡ÒûÃÒ¡¯ã¹¨Í áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
ÀÒ¾·Õè¨ÑºäÇé¨Ð¶Ù¡ºÑ¹·Ö¡äÇéã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì C:\Program Files\Samsung\AVStation Premium 3.7\Data\Captured
Images
¹Í¡¨Ò¡¹Õé ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´ÙÀÒ¾ä´é¨Ò¡â¿Åà´ÍÃì PHOTO Station > Captured Images
46 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁÇÔ´ÕâÍã¹ Library
MOVIE Library ¤×ÍäźÃÒÃÕ·Õèà¡çºä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·Õè¨Ðãªéâ´Â MOVIE Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèºÑ¹·Ö¡ã¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìäÇéã¹ Library
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì â¿Åà´ÍÃì ËÃ×ͤé¹ËÒáÅÐà¾ÔèÁä¿Åì μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹μÑÇÍÂèÒ§¢Í§¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁâ¿Åà´ÍÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Register a File (
) ãμé Library áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Add by Folders
2. àÅ×Í¡â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍÍÂÙè áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹ Library
ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·Õèãªéã¹ AVStation ¨Ð¶Ù¡à¾ÔèÁã¹ Library â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 47
¡ÒÃãªé AVStation now / AVStation premium Viewer
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁàËÅèÒ¹Õéà¾×èÍà»Ô´à¾Å§ ÀÒ¾¶èÒ ÇÔ´ÕâÍ áÅÐÀҾ¹μÃìã¹áººàμçÁ¨ÍÀÒ¾
áÅÐÊÒÁÒöà¾ÅÔ´à¾ÅÔ¹¡ÑºÁÑÅμÔÁÕà´Õ â´Âãªé AVStation now àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì»Ô´ÍÂÙè áÅÐãªé AVStation premium Viewer
àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà»Ô´
•
AVStation now áÅÐ AVStation premium Viewer à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁàÊÃÔÁ áÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕãËé㹺ҧ ÃØè¹
•
¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§ AVStation
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé AVStation now ੾ÒСóշÕè¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì»Ô´ÍÂÙèà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé AVStation now à¾×èÍà»Ô´ä¿Åì·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃì¡Ñº AVStation premium Library ºÑ¹·Ö¡äÇéã¹ My Computer
áÅкѹ·Ö¡ã¹ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´ (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ) (ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿Åìã¹ Library â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ¹. 40. ¹.
43. ¹. 47)
ËÒ¡¤Ø³¡Ó˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺà¢éÒÊÙèáͤà¤Ò·ì¼Ùéãªé Windows ËÃ×ÍËÒ¡â¿Åà´ÍÃìÁÕ¡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¢éÍÁÙÅ
¤Ø³¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöàÅè¹ä¿Åìã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì¹Ñ鹡Ѻ AVStation now ä´é
•
¢éͨӡѴ¢Í§ AVStation premium Viewer
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé AVStation premium Viewer à¾×èÍà»Ô´à©¾ÒÐä¿Åì·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃì¡Ñº AVStation premium Library
(ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿Åìã¹ Library â»Ã´´Ù·Õè <¹. 40. ¹. 43. ¹. 47)
•
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÃٻẺ˹éÒ¨ÍáÅСÒÃãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ·Ñé§Êͧ¹Ñ鹤ÅéÒ¡ѹ ¤ÙèÁ×͹Õé¨Ð͸ԺÒ¡Ò÷ӧҹáÅÐ˹éÒ¨Íâ´ÂÂÖ´ AVStation
now à»ç¹ËÅÑ¡
48 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
•
ÀҾ˹éÒ¨ÍÍÒ¨μèҧ仨ҡ·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯¨ÃÔ§ â´Â¢Ö鹡ѺàÇÍÃìªÑ¹¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
•
Ê¶Ò¹Õ TV ¨ÐÁÕãËé੾ÒÐã¹Ãкº·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ TV à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
àÃÔèÁμé¹/ÍÍ¡¨Ò¡ AVStation now
¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁμé¹
¡´»ØèÁ AVS (
) ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃ좳зÕèà¤Ã×èͧ»Ô´
¡ÒÃÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
àÅ×è͹àÁÒÊìä»·Õè´éÒ¹º¹ÊØ´¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Exit (
)
ËÃ×ÍÁԩйÑé¹ãËé¡´»ØèÁ à»Ô´ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁμé¹/ÍÍ¡¨Ò¡ AVStation premium Viewer
¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁμé¹
àÅ×Í¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > AVStation premium > AVStation premium Viewer ¨Ò¡ÀÒÂã¹ Windows
ËÃ×ÍÁԩйÑé¹ãËé¡´»ØèÁ AVS ( ) ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¨Ò¡ Windows
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 49
¡ÒÃÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ
àÅ×è͹àÁÒÊìä»·Õè´éÒ¹º¹ÊØ´¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Exit (
ÃٻẺ¨ÍÀÒ¾
Music
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§ËÃ×Í«Õ´Õà¾Å§ä´é
Photo
ãªéÊÓËÃѺ´ÙÀÒ¾¶èÒ¤ÃÑé§ÅÐÀÒ¾ ËÃ×Í´ÙẺÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
Movie
ãªéÊÓËÃѺà»Ô´ÇÔ´ÕâÍ á¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´ÕËÃ×ÍÇÕ«Õ´Õ
50 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
)
Settings (¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃàÅè¹à¾Å§ ÀÒ¾¶èÒ áÅÐÀҾ¹μÃìä´é
㹡ÒÃÂéÒÂä»·Õè˹éÒ¨ÍàÃÔèÁμé¹¢³Ðãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ AVS ( ) ËÃ×Í¡´¤ÕÂì <ESC>
ËÃ×ÍÁԩйÑé¹ ãËéÂéÒÂàÁÒÊìä»ÂѧÁØÁº¹«éÒé¢ͧ¨ÍÀÒ¾»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ AVStation (
)
MUSIC Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§ËÃ×Í«Õ´Õà¾Å§
¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃì¡Ñº MUSIC Library
(ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿Åì â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ¹. 40)
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation now áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Music
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè All Music áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿Åì㹪èͧ´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ
Ãкº¨Ðà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§¢Öé¹
z My Computer
z
x
v
c
»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒÐã¹ AVStation now
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¤é¹ËÒáÅÐà»Ô´ä¿Åì·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹ My
Computer ËÃ×Íã¹ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´
x All Music
c Playlist Window
v Music File
¡ÒÃàÅ蹫մÕà¾Å§
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation now áÅÐãÊèá¼è¹«Õ´Õà¾Å§ã¹ä´Ã¿ì«Õ´Õ
2. ã¹Ë¹éÒ¨ÍàÃÔèÁμé¹ AVStation now ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Music
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 51
3. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè Audio CD 㹪èͧ´éÒ¹«éÒ áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèÍÑźÑéÁËÃ×Íä¿Åìà¾Å§ã¹ªèͧ´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ
Ãкº¨Ðà»Ô´ä¿Åìà¾Å§·ÕèàÅ×Í¡
PHOTO Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒôÙÀÒ¾·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìã¹ PHOTO Library ¤ÃÑé§ÅÐÀÒ¾áÅдÙẺÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
(ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃìä¿ÅìÀҾ㹠Library â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ¹. 43)
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation now áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Photo
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè All Images áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿ÅìÀҾ㹪èͧ´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ
z My Computer
z
x
c
»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒÐã¹ AVStation now
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¤é¹ËÒáÅÐà»Ô´ä¿Åì·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹ My
Computer ËÃ×Íã¹ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´
x All Images
c Image File
52 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
3. ÀÒ¾·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¨Ð¶Ù¡«ÙÁà¢éÒ
¡ÒôÙÀҾẺàμçÁ¨ÍËÃ×Í´ÙẺÊäÅ´ìâªÇì
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ SlideShow ËÃ×Í Full Screen ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ÀÒ¾·Õè«ÙÁà¢éÒ
㹡ÒáÅѺÊÙèʶҹÐà´ÔÁã¹ SlideShow ËÃ×Í Full Screen ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Esc> ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè˹éÒ¨Í
ã¹ AVStation now ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Esc> ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Back
MOVIE Station
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ (ÀҾ¹μÃì) ËÃ×Íá¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ/ÇÕ«Õ´Õ
¡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ·ÕèÃÕ¨ÔÊàμÍÃì¡Ñº MOVIE Library (â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ¹. 47)
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation now áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Movie
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè All Movies áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ㹪èͧ´éÒ¹¢ÇÒ
¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì 53
Ãкº¨Ðà»Ô´ä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍ
z My Computer
z
x
»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒÐã¹ AVStation now
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¤é¹ËÒáÅÐà»Ô´ä¿Åì·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹ My
Computer ËÃ×Íã¹ÊÅçÍμÁÑÅμÔ¡ÒÃì´
c
¡ÒÃà»Ô´ÇÔ¹â´Çì Play Control
¡´Ê໫ºÒÃìËÃ×ÍàÅ×è͹àÁÒÊì ÇÔ¹â´Çì Play Control ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯·Õè´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§
¡ÒÃàÅè¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé AVStation now áÅÐãÊèá¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õã¹ä´Ã¿ì´ÕÇÕ´Õ
2. ã¹Ë¹éÒ¨ÍàÃÔèÁμé¹ AVStation now ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Movie
3. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè DVD/VCD áÅдѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèª×èÍ´ÕÇÕ´Õ Ãкº¨ÐàÅè¹á¼è¹´ÕÇÕ´Õ¹Ñé¹
54 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
x All Movies
c Movie File
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍâ´ÂãªéâÁà´çÁ (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡)
¡è͹àÃÔèÁ:
• àμÃÕÂÁÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ì·ÕèäÁèãªéẺ´Ô¨ÔμÍÅ
• μÔ´μèͼÙéãËéºÃÔ¡ÒÃÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ (ISP) à¾×èͤ͢Óá¹Ð¹Ó㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍáÅÐμÑ´¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͨҡÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
1. μèÍÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìà¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμâÁà´çÁ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
2. àª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó·Õèä´éÃѺ¨Ò¡ ISP
ËÒ¡¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμäÁè¶Ù¡μÑ´ÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¤Ø³μéͧàÊÕ¤èÒãªé¨èÒ¨ҡ¤èÒâ·Ãà¾ÔèÁ¢Öé¹
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 55
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹Ãкº LAN
1. μèÍÊÒ LAN à¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ LAN ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel
3. ¤ÅÔ¡ Network and Internet Connections ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Control Panel]
4. ¤ÅÔ¡ Network Connections ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Network and Internet Connections]
5. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Local Area ConnectionáÅéǤÅÔ¡ Properties
56 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
6. ã¹á·çº General ãËéàÅ×Í¡ "Internet Protocol(TCP/IP)" ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ Properties
7. ¡ÒÃãªé DHCP:
ã¹á·çº General ãËéàÅ×Í¡ "Obtain an IP address automatically" áÅÐ "Obtain DNS server address automatically" ¤ÅÔ¡ OK
¡ÒÃãªé IP μÒÂμÑÇ:
ã¹á·çº General ãËéàÅ×Í¡ "Use the following IP address" áÅéÇÃкؤèÒ㹿ÔÅ´ì IP address, Subnet mask, Default gateway,
Preferred DNS serve áÅÐ Alternative DNS server ¤ÅÔ¡ OK
¡ÒÃãªé DHCP áÅСÓ˹´ static IP ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹:
ã¹á·çº Alternate Configuration ¤ÅÔ¡ User configured áÅéÇ¡ÃÍ¡¢éÍÁÙÅŧ㹿ÔÅ´ì
¤ÅÔ¡ OK
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 57
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹Ãкº Wireless LAN (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡)
ÊÀÒÇСÒ÷ӧҹẺà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡äÃéÊÒ (Wireless LAN) ¤×Íà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒö֧¡Ñ¹¼èÒ¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìËÅÒÂæ à¤Ã×èͧ
·ÕèºéÒ¹ËÃ×ÍÍÍ¿¿ÔÈ¢¹Ò´àÅç¡â´ÂãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì wireless LAN
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹ wireless network ÃÐËÇèÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹μèÒ§æ ¢Í§à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´éàªè¹ ¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿Åì â¿Åà´ÍÃìËÃ×Í
à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃÊÃéÒ§à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Öé¹áÅéÇ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèäÁèä´éàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμÊÒÁÒöáªÃì
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍä´éâ´Âà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹¼èÒ¹à¤Ã×èͧ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ ÊÓËÃѺÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´ â»Ã´´Ù·Õè
”¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹” ·Õè˹éÒ 80
¤Ó͸ԺÒÂã¹Êèǹ¹Õé¨ÐÍéÒ§ÍÔ§ Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 3945ABG ËÃ×Í 3945BG
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ (μèͨҡ¹Õé¨ÐàÃÕ¡ÇèÒ¡ÒÃì´ 802.11ABG ËÃ×Í 802.11BG)
¡ÒÃì´ LAN äÃéÊÒÂà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ ÃØ蹢ͧ¡ÒÃì´ LAN äÃéÊÒ¨ТÖé¹ÍÂÙè¡Ñº¼ÅÔμÀѳ±ì·Õèà¡ÕèÂÇ¢éͧ
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ LAN äÃéÊÒ¨Ð͸ԺÒÂμÒÁ¡Ã³Õ¢Í§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèμÔ´μÑé§ Windows XP Service Pack 2
¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËéãªé¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ´Õ¿ÍÅμì¢Í§ Windows XP ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ LAN äÃéÊÒ ÊÓËÃѺ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèμÔ´μÑé§
Windows XP
㹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒâ´Âãªé«Í¿μìáÇÃì·ÕèÁÒ¨Ò¡¼Ùé¼ÅÔμ¡ÒÃì´ LAN äÃéÊÒ â»Ã´´Ù·Õè˹éÒ ¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒ¡Ѻ
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ LAN äÃéÊÒÂ' ”¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹” (¹. 68)
㹡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒ ¤Ø³μéͧà»Ô´¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ LAN äÃéÊÒ â´Â
ãªéÊÇÔμªìÃкº LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍäÇÃìàÅÊà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÊÒÁÒöáºè§ÍÍ¡à»ç¹Êͧ¡ÅØèÁãË−èæ
1) Access Point (AP)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ AP à¾×èÍãËéÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´é «Ö觨ÐÊÒÁÒö·Óä´é੾ÒÐàÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì AP áÅéÇà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
ÊÓËÃѺÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´ â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍä»Âѧ Access Point (AP)” ·Õè˹éÒ 59
Access Point (AP) ¤×ÍÍÐäÃ?
AP ¤×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍÃÐËÇèÒ§Ãкº LAN Ẻà´ÔÁáÅÐÃкº wireless LAN áÅÐμÔ´μè͡Ѻ wireless hub
ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡áººà´ÔÁ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìËÅÒÂæ à¤Ã×èͧ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ wireless LAN ¼èÒ¹ AP ä´é
58 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
2) ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì (ad hoc)
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍẺ¹ÕéàÃÕ¡ÍÕ¡ÍÂèÒ§ÇèÒà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡áºº peer-to-peer
ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡äÇÃìàÅʢͧ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃ
μÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì wireless LAN 2 à¤Ã×èͧËÃ×ÍÁÒ¡¡ÇèÒẺäÃéÊÒÂä´é ÊÓËÃѺÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´ â»Ã´´Ù·Õè
”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì (peer-to-peer ËÃ×Í ad hoc)” (¹. 60)
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍä»Âѧ Access Point (AP)
Êèǹ¹Õé¨Ð͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍä»Âѧ AP ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´éàÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ AP
ÊÓËÃѺÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¾ÔèÁàμÔÁàªè¹ network key (encryption key) â»Ã´Êͺ¶ÒÁ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкºà¹çμàÇÔÃ졢ͧ¤Ø³
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection (
) º¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ View Available Wireless Networks
2. àÅ×Í¡ AP (àªè¹ Test) à¾×èÍàª×èÍÁμèÍáÅéǤÅÔ¡ Connect
ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒ network key ÊÓËÃѺ AP 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì Enter Network Key ¢Öé¹
»é͹¤èÒ Network Key ŧã¹ÇÔ¹â´ÇìáÅéǤÅÔ¡»ØèÁ Connect
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 59
àÁ×èÍÂѧäÁèÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒ network key ãËé¡Ñº AP ·ÕèàÅ×Í¡ ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Link à¾×èÍáÊ´§¡Ãͺ¢éͤÇÒÁàμ×͹ áÅéǤÅÔ¡·Õè
Connect ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯¢éͤÇÒÁ Connected ã¹ AP ¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´é
¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺʶҹСÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
àÅ×è͹àÁÒÊì¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»äÇéà˹×Íäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection (
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯Ê¶Ò¹Ð¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ¢Öé¹
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì (peer-to-peer ËÃ×Í ad hoc)
ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡äÇÃìàÅʢͧ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃ
μÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì wireless LAN 2 à¤Ã×èͧËÃ×ÍÁÒ¡¡ÇèÒẺäÃéÊÒÂä´é ´éÇ¡ÒÃãªéÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒùÕé ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèäÁèä´éàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ
ÊÒÁÒöáªÃì¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍä´éâ´Â¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹¼èÒ¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ (â»Ã´´Ù
”¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹” ·Õè˹éÒ 80 )
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍä´éâ´Â¡Ò÷ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
• ¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. μÑ駤èÒà¹çμàÇÔÃ졤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìãËéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
• ¢Ñ¹é ·Õè 2. àª×èÍÁμèÍä»Âѧà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒ¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹æ
¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. μÑ駤èÒà¹çμàÇÔÃ졤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection (
60 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ View Available Wireless Networks
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ Change the order of Preferred Networks
3. ·Õèá·çº Wireless Network ¤ÅÔ¡ Advanced
4. ¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡àªç¤ºçÍ¡«ì 'Automatically connect to non-default network' ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡àªç¤ºçÍ¡«ì¹ÕéäÇé àÅ×Í¡ 'Computerto-computer (ad hoc) networks only' áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Close
5. ·Õèá·çº Wireless Network ¤ÅÔ¡ Add
6. »é͹ª×èÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ (àªè¹ samsung) áÅéÇ¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ 'The key is provided for me automatically' »é͹ encryption key
㹿ÔÅ´ì Network key áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡â´Â¼Ùéãªé·ÕèäÁèä´éÃѺ͹Ø−Òμ ¨Ö§¤ÇÃÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´ network key (encryption key)
network key »ÃСͺ´éÇÂÍÑ¡¢ÃÐ 5 ¶Ö§ 13 μÑÇ (àªè¹ magic) ËÃ×ÍÃËÑÊ°Ò¹ÊԺˡ 10 ËÃ×Í 26 μÑÇ (áÊ´§â´ÂμÑÇàÅ¢¨Ò¡
'0' ¶Ö§ '9' ËÃ×ÍÍÑ¡Éà 'a' ¶Ö§ 'f')
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 61
7. μÃǨ´ÙÇèÒª×èÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡·Õè¡Ó˹´ (àªè¹ samsung) ÍÂÙèã¹ÃÒ¡Òà ÕPreferred networksÕ áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ wireless network àÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ
¢Ñé¹·Õè 2. ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒáÅéÇ
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection (
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ View Available Wireless Networks
2. àÅ×Í¡ª×èÍ wireless network (àªè¹ samsung) ·ÕèÃкØäÇéã¹ ”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì (peerto-peer ËÃ×Í ad hoc)” ·Õè˹éÒ 60 áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Connect.
62 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
3. »é͹ cryptographic key 㹿ÔÅ´ì Network key áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Connect
ËÒ¡ÂѧäÁèÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´ network key äÇéã¹ ”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì (peer-topeer ËÃ×Í ad hoc)” ·Õè˹éÒ 60 ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Connect â´ÂäÁèμéͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì¢éÍÁÙÅÍÐäÃ
àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ wireless network Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§¤èÒ Connected ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡·ÕèàÅ×Í¡¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Network Connection
¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺʶҹСÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
àÅ×è͹àÁÒÊì¾Í¹ìàμÍÃìä»äÇéà˹×Íäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection (
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯Ê¶Ò¹Ð¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ¢Öé¹
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒÂâ´Âãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁμÑ駤èÒ LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ¨Ø´àª×èÍÁμèÍ â´Âãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡Ó˹´¤èÒ LAN äÃéÊÒ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡Ó˹´¤èÒ
LAN äÃéÊÒ¹Ñ鹨ÐÁÕÍÂÙèã¹ system software media ¼Ùéãªé¨ÐμéͧμÔ´μèÍâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡è͹
1. ãÊè system software media 㹫մÕä´Ã¿ìáÅÐμÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡Ó˹´¤èÒ LAN äÃéÊÒ (PROSet)
àÅ×Í¡ System Software Media > User Installation > Wireless LAN Driver ReadMe ¤ÅÔ¡ ReadMe
áÅÐμÔ´μÑé§μÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó
2. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ LAN äÃéÊÒ ( ) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
ËÃ×ÍÁԩйÑé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Start > All Programs > Intel PROSet Wireless > Intel PROSet Wireless
3. ã¹ Available Networks ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Refresh
4. àÅ×Í¡ª×èͧ͢¨Ø´àª×èÍÁμèÍ·Õè¨Ðãªé¨Ò¡ÅÔÊμì¢Í§à¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·Õèãªéä´é áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Connect
ËÒ¡à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÁè»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Refresh
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 63
5. »é͹¤ÕÂì WEP áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ÇÔ¹â´Çì Wireless Security Settings ÍÒ¨μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ¢ͧ AP
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Advanced à¾×èÍμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺÊÔ·¸Ôà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ ¡ÒÃà¢éÒÃËÑÊ¢éÍÁÙÅ
ËÒ¡μéͧ¡Ò÷ÃÒº¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
â»Ã´Êͺ¶ÒÁ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкºà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒÂ
â»Ã´´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¢Ñé¹ÊÙ§â´Â¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Advanced
Network authentication: μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺÊÔ·¸Ôà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ»ÃСͺ´éÇ Open System áÅÐ Shared Key àÁ×èÍàÅ×Í¡ Open
Systems ¨ÐäÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺÊÔ·¸Ô (áμèÂѧÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃà¢éÒÃËÑÊ) àÁ×èÍàÅ×Í¡ Shared Key ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé WEP
à¾×èÍ¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺÊÔ·¸Ô ¤èÒàÃÔèÁμ鹤×Í Open System
Data encryption (WEP): ÁÒμðҹ IEEE 802.11 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
ÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´ÃдѺ¡ÒÃà¢éÒÃËÑÊäÇéÊͧÃдѺ ¤ÕÂì 64 ºÔμ («Ö觺ҧ¤ÃÑé§àÃÕ¡ÇèÒ 40 ºÔμ) áÅФÕÂì 128 ºÔμ
Key index: àÅ×Í¡´Ñª¹Õ¢Í§¤ÕÂì¡ÒÃà¢éÒÃËÑʻѨ¨ØºÑ¹·Õèãªéâ´Â¨Ø´àª×èÍÁμèÍ â´ÂàÅ×Í¡¨Ò¡ 1 ¶Ö§ 4
Using an encryption key: ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Use pass phrase à¾×èÍãªé§Ò¹ áÅлé͹ÍÑ¡¢ÃзÕèà»ç¹μÑÇàÅ¢áÅÐμÑÇÍÑ¡Éà 5 μÑÇ (ÊÓËÃѺ
64 ºÔμ) ËÃ×Í 13 μÑÇ (ÊÓËÃѺ 128 ºÔμ) (ä´éá¡è 0-9, a-z ËÃ×Í A-Z)
6. ÇÔ¹â´Çì Done »ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè OK
àÁ×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍäÃéÊÒ¡Ѻ¨Ø´àª×èÍÁμèÍ äͤ͹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ (
64 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
) ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯·Õè´éҹ˹éҢͧâ»Ãä¿Åì·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍ
¡ÒÃãªé Samsung Network Manager
Samsung Network Manager à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒþѲ¹Òà¾×èÍãËé¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒöãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂä´éâ´Â§èÒÂ
Samsung Network Manager ÁդسÊÁºÑμԴѧμèÍ仹Õé
• ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂáÅÐà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìä´éâ´Â§èÒÂ
• ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂä´é·Ñ¹·Õ â´ÂäÁèμéͧ¡Ó˹´¤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂãËÁèÍÕ¡ àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃÂéÒ·ÕèμÑé§
´éÇ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ (IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ÏÅÏ) ÊÓËÃѺáμèÅзÕèμÑé§ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂä´é·Ñ¹·Õ
â´ÂäÁèμéͧ·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·ء¤ÃÑé§ äÁèÇèÒ¨ÐÍÂÙè·Õèã´
• ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹ä´éâ´Â§èÒÂ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹ä´éâ´Â¡Ó˹´¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìãËéÁÕÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¿« LAN ªØ´ (ÁÕÊÒÂáÅÐäÃéÊÒ ËÃ×Í LAN
ÁÕÊÒÂÊͧªØ´) à»ç¹à«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃèÇÁ ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμã¹à¤Ã×èͧä¤Åà͹μì
â´Âàª×èÍÁμèÍà¢éҡѺà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
• ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂʶҹТͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂʶҹТͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂàÁ×èÍà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ·ÕèäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ
¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
ËÑÇ¢é͹Õé¡ÅèÒǶ֧¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¢éҡѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμâ´ÂμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ ÃÇÁ¶Ö§¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁ
à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìã¹à¤Ã×Í¢èÒ´éÇÂ
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¨ÐμèéÒ§¡Ñ¹ ÊÓËÃѺà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ LAN ª¹Ô´ÁÕÊÒÂáÅЪ¹Ô´äÃéÊÒÂ
㹡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒ ¤Ø³¤ÇÃÁÕ AP ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒÂÍÂÙèã¡Åé
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
1. 㹡ÒÃãªé LAN ẺÁÕÊÒ ãËéàª×èÍÁμèÍÊÒ LAN à¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ LAN
㹡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËéàÅ×è͹ÊÇÔμªì LAN äÃéÊÒÂä»·ÕèμÓáË¹è§ ON ËÒ¡»Ô´¡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒÂäÇé
àÁ×èÍà»Ô´ LAN äÃéÊÒ ä¿ÊÑ−−Ò³¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ (
) ¨ÐÊÇèÒ§¢Öé¹
2. àÃÕ¡ãªé Samsung Network Manager
àÅ×Í¡ Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Network Manager > Samsung Network Manager
ËÃ×ʹѺàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ Samsung Network Manager ·Õèà´Ê¡ì·Í» ( )
3. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Add
4. àÅ×Í¡äͤ͹μÓá˹觢ͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ áÅлé͹ª×èͧ͢μÓá˹觴ѧ¡ÅèÒÇ (àªè¹ Home) ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 65
5. àÅ×Í¡ Internet direct connection áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
6. àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì LAN μÑ駤èÒ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Next
(¢Öé¹) àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì
(ŧ) μÑ駤èÒ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ
ËÁÒÂàËμØ àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì
àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ àÅ×Í¡ Wired LAN (ÁÕÊÒÂ) ËÃ×Í Wireless LAN (äÃéÊÒÂ)
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ
㹡ÒèѴÊÃà IP áÍ´à´ÃÊâ´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ (DHCP) ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Get IP Automatically
㹡ÒÃãªé IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ·Õ褧·Õè ãËé¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ Get IP Automatically áÅлé͹ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅ
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ â»Ã´¶ÒÁ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкº
7. Á×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì Printer Setting ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Finish
㹡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Add Printer â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Add Printer Wizard ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
μÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óº¹·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯Ë¹éÒ¨Í
àÁ×èÍà¾ÔèÁà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìáÅéÇ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Show printer àÅ×Í¡à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·Õèà¾ÔèÁãËÁè áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Finish
66 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ËÒ¡äÁèμéͧ¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËéàÅ×Í¡ No Default Printer áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Finish
ËÁÒÂàËμØ àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙÃ³ì ¢éͤÇÒÁ ‘Do you want to move to newly added location now?’
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ËÒ¡¤Ø³àÅ×Í¡ ‘Yes’ ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÊÓËÃѺμÓá˹觷Õèà¾ÔèÁ¨ÐÁÕ¼Åãªé§Ò¹
àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÊÓËÃѺμÓá˹觷Õèà¾ÔèÁÁÕ¼Åãªéè§Ò¹ ʶҹ·Õè«Öè§à¾ÔèÁ¢Öé¹
áÅТéÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͧ͢ʶҹ·Õè´Ñ§¡ÅèÒǨлÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì The detailed Information for
àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóì äͤ͹ÊÓËÃѺμÓá˹觷Õèà¾ÔèÁ¢Ö鹨ж١ÊÃéÒ§äÇéã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Saved Locations
¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ ËÃ×Íà¾ÔèÁμÓá˹è§à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂãËÁèä´é
àÁ¹Ù
¢éÍÁÙŢͧμÓá˹觻Ѩ¨ØºÑ¹
μÓá˹觷ÕèºÑ¹·Ö¡
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ AP ÊÓËÃѺ LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
㹡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËéàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¢éҡѺ AP ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹ ¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂä´é
áÁé㹡óշÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃÂéÒÂà¤Ã×èͧ ËÃ×Íà»ÅÕè¹μÓáË¹è§ ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤سÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ áÁéÇèÒ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ AP
¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒÂÍÂÙè¡çμÒÁ
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Wireless Network Connection ( ) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè View Available Wireless
Networks
2. àÅ×Í¡à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÃéÊÒ·ÕèÁÕ (àªè¹ SAMSUNG) áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Connect ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ AP ¢Í§ LAN
äÃéÊÒ·Õèãªéä´é â»Ã´μÔ´μèͼÙé´ÙáÅà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ¢ͧ¤Ø³
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 67
AP ·Õèãªéä´é
àª×èÍÁμèÍ(áÊ´§ÃÒ¡ÒôéÇÂàÊ鹪Õé)
3. ÇÔ¹â´ÇìÊÓËÃѺ»é͹¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒè (¤ÕÂì»éͧ¡Ñ¹) ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
- ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÇéáÅéÇÊÓËÃѺ AP ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËé»é͹¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂáÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Connect
ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ â»Ã´¶ÒÁ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкº
- ËÒ¡äÁèÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÇéÊÓËÃѺ AP ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Connect
â´ÂäÁèμéͧ»é͹¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
4. àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺAP ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ ¢éͤÇÒÁ Connected ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯·Õèäͤ͹ Wireless Network
ã¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì
¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂËÅѧ¨Ò¡ÂéÒÂμÓá˹è§
´éÇ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ (IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ÏÅÏ) ÊÓËÃѺáμèÅзÕèμÑé§ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂä´é·Ñ¹·Õ
â´ÂäÁèμéͧ·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·ء¤ÃÑé§ äÁèÇèÒ¨ÐÍÂÙè·Õèã´
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé Samsung Network Manager àÁ×èÍàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ
2. àÅ×Í¡äͤ͹·ÕèáÊ´§¶Ö§μÓá˹觷Õèμéͧ¡ÒèҡÇÔ¹â´Çì Saved Locations ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡·Õè Move
3. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÊÓËÃѺμÓá˹觷Õèà¾ÔèÁÁÕ¼Åãªéè§Ò¹ ʶҹ·Õè«Öè§à¾ÔèÁ¢Öé¹ áÅТéÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
¢Í§Ê¶Ò¹·Õè´Ñ§¡ÅèÒǨлÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì The detailed Information for
¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹
ËÑÇ¢é͹Õé¡ÅèÒǶ֧¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹
㹡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹ ¤Ø³μéͧ¡Ó˹´Ãкºà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìáÅÐä¤Åà͹μìÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹¡è͹ àÁ×èÍμÑ駤èÒàÊÃç¨áÅéÇ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìàμ繨ҡä¤Åà͹μìä´é ´éÇ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¢éҡѺà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
ËÁÒÂàËμØ à«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì: ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¿« LAN 2 Êèǹ à¾×èÍ·Ó˹éÒ·Õè㹡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹
ä¤Åà͹μì: ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ â´Âàª×èÍÁμèÍà¢éҡѺà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì â´ÂäÁèμéͧÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ
ÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμâ´Âμç
68 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
ËÁÒÂàËμؤسÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìà¢éҡѺä¤Åà͹μìä´é´Ñ§¹Õé ”àÅ×Í¡ Internet direct connection áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ
Next” (¹. 66)
à«ÔÃì¿ ÇÍÃì
ä¤Åà͹μì
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÀÒ¹͡
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¢Í§ä¤Åà͹μì
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 1
LAN ÁÕÊÒÂ
LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
àª×èÍÁμèÍä¤Åà͹μì·Õèãªé§Ò¹ÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 2
LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
LAN ÁÕÊÒÂ
à¢éҡѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèàËÁ×͹¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìÊÓËÃѺä¤Åà
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 3
LAN ÁÕÊÒÂ
LAN ÁÕÊÒÂ
͹μì·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹à«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 3 ¤Ø³μéͧàª×èÍÁμèÍ¡ÒÃì´ LAN äÇéÅèǧ˹éÒ
㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìáÅÐä¤Åà͹μì â´Âãªé LAN ª¹Ô´ÁÕÊÒ ãËéàª×èÍÁμèͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ´ÂãªéÊÒ LAN ¡è͹
㹡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËéàÅ×è͹ÊÇÔμªì LAN äÃéÊÒÂä»·ÕèμÓáË¹è§ ON ËÒ¡»Ô´¡ÒÃãªé LAN äÃéÊÒÂäÇé
àÁ×èÍà»Ô´ LAN äÃéÊÒ ä¿ÊÑ−−Ò³¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ LAN äÃéÊÒ ( ) ¨ÐÊÇèÒ§¢Öé¹
μÑÇÍÂèÒ§àªè¹ ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹ÊÓËÃѺ [¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 1] «Öè§àª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìáÅÐÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ¼èÒ¹ LAN ÁÕÊÒÂ
áÅÐàª×èÍÁμèÍà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃìáÅÐä¤Åà͹μì¼èÒ¹ LAN äÃéÊÒ ´Ñ§¤Ó͸ԺÒÂμèÍ仹Õé
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé Samsung Network Manager 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õè¨Ðãªéà»ç¹à«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Add
3. àÅ×Í¡äͤ͹μÓá˹觢ͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ áÅлé͹ª×èͧ͢μÓá˹觴ѧ¡ÅèÒÇ (àªè¹ Home) ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
4. àÅ×Í¡ Internet direct Connection for sharing áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
5. μÑ駤èÒÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÀÒ¹͡ ¡Ó˹´ÇèÒ¨Ðãªéä¿ÃìÇÍÅËÃ×ÍäÁè
áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÀÒ¹͡ (àªè¹ LAN ª¹Ô´ÁÕÊÒÂ) ¡Ó˹´ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ
Next
¡Ó˹´ÇèÒ¨Ðãªéä¿ÃìÇÍÅËÃ×ÍäÁè
àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì
μÑ駤èÒ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 69
- 㹡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒúءÃØ¡¨Ò¡ÀÒ¹͡ ¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËéãªéä¿ÃìÇÍÅ
- ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÅСÓ˹´ IP áÍ´à´ÃÊ â»Ã´´Ù¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢ͧ¢éÍ 6 ã¹ËÑÇ¢éÍ
”¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ” ·Õè˹éÒ 65
6. àÅ×Í¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻä¤Åà͹μì (àªè¹ LAN äÃéÊÒÂ) áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ã¹¡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹·Ò§ LAN äÃéÊÒÂ
- 㹿ÔÅ´ì Select Device ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Wireless
- 㹿ÔÅ´ì Wireless Connection Name (àªè¹ Samsung) ãËé»é͹ª×èÍà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
- 㹡ÒÃãªé¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ (¤ÕÂì»éͧ¡Ñ¹) ãËéàÅ×Í¡μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ ‘Use Password ,,,’ áÅлé͹¤ÕÂì»éͧ¡Ñ¹
â»Ã´¨´¨Ó¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤Ø³¨Ðμéͧ»é͹¤ÕÂì¹Õé«éÓ àÁ×èÍãªéä¤Åà͹μìà¾×èÍàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
7. ¢éÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҨлÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ Â×¹Âѹ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
8. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì Printer Setting ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Finish
ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì â»Ã´´Ùã¹ ”¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ” ·Õè˹éÒ 65
àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ Shared Server àÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ ãËéμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃáªÃìä¤Åà͹μì
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒä¤Åà͹μì
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé Samsung Network Manager 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õè¨Ðãªéà»ç¹ä¤Åà͹μì
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Add
3. àÅ×Í¡äͤ͹μÓá˹觢ͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ áÅлé͹ª×èͧ͢μÓá˹觴ѧ¡ÅèÒÇ ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
4. àÅ×Í¡ Internet Sharing áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
- 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ´éÇ LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Internet Sharing - Wireless
- 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ´éÇ LAN ª¹Ô´ÁÕÊÒ ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Internet Sharing - Wired
5. Â×¹ÂѹÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
- 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹ LAN äÃéÊÒ ãËé»é͹ wireless connection name (àªè¹ Samsung) ·Õè»é͹ã¹à«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì
ËÒ¡¤Ø³¡Ó˹´¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂäÇé (¤ÕÂì»éͧ¡Ñ¹) ÊÓËÃѺà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì ãËé»é͹¤ÕÂìà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
6. ¢éÍÁÙÅ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҨлÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ Â×¹Âѹ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next
70 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
7. àÁ×èÍ»ÃÒ¡¯ÇÔ¹â´Çì Printer Setting ¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Finish
ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì â»Ã´´Ùã¹ ”¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ” ·Õè˹éÒ 65
àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμä´é¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧä¤Åà͹μì·ÕèáªÃìäÇéä´é
- 㹡ÒÃà¢éÒãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧä¤Åà͹μì à¤Ã×èͧà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì¨Ðμéͧà»Ô´ÍÂÙè
- 㹡ÒÃãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ¨Ò¡ä¤Åà͹μì ãËéàÅ×Í¡äͤ͹¢Í§ä¤Åà͹μì¨Ò¡ÇÔ¹â´Çì Location List áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Move
- ËÒ¡¢Ò´¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ ¢³Ð·ÕèãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμã¹ä¤Åà͹μì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Ap Active ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù Wireless
à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍãËÁè
¡ÒÃÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂʶҹТͧà¤Ã×Í¢èèÒÂ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂʶҹТͧà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂàÁ×èÍà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ·ÕèäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ
1. àÃÕ¡ãªé Samsung Network Manager
2. àÅ×Í¡ Auto Diagnosis ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù Manage
3. ÇÔ¹â´Çì Network Connections ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Start à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂà¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂ
4. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóì ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèäÁè·Ó§Ò¹¨ÐÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂÍÑÈà¨ÃÕÂìáÊ´§äÇé ÊÓËÃѺʶҹТͧÍØ»¡Ã³ìâ´ÂÅÐàÍÕ´
â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ·Õè´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì
ÀÒ¾) ÇÔ¹â´Çì¼ÅÅѾ¸ì¡ÒÃÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂ
àª×èÍÁμèÍãËÁè áÅÐμÑ駤èÒÍØ»¡Ã³ìμÒÁ¼ÅÅѾ¸ì¢Í§¡ÒÃÇÔ¹Ô¨©ÑÂ
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 71
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡
ËÅѧ¨Ò¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä´éàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡áÅéÇ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéºÃÔ¡ÒÃμèÒ§æ ¢Í§à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´é àªè¹ ¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿Åì, â¿Åà´ÍÃìáÅÐ
à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì
ºÃÔ¡ÒÃμèÒ§æ ¢Í§à¹çμàÇÔÃ졨ÐÊÒÁÒöãªéä´éâ´Â¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìμèÒ§æ ·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍà¢éҡѺà¹çμàÇÔÃ졹Ñé¹â´Â¡ÒÃ
àª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹ÊÒÂËÃ×ÍẺäÃéÊÒ ÊÓËÃѺÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´ â»Ã´´Ù ”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹Ãкº LAN” ·Õè˹éÒ 56 áÅÐ
â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ”¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹Ãкº Wireless LAN (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡)” ·Õè˹éÒ 58
¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì
Êèǹ¹Õé¨Ð͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃáªÃìä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͶ֧¡Ñ¹ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡
¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿Åì ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÒ§æ μèÍ仹Õé:
• ¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. ¡Ó˹´¤èÒãËé¡Ñº¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃìμèÒ§æ ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
• ¢Ñ¹é ·Õè 2. à¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèáªÃìäÇé¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹
àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì ¼Ùé·Õèàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¹çμàÇÔÃ졹Ñ鹨ÐÊÒÁÒöà»Ô´áÅÐźä¿ÅìËÃ×Í
â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìäÇéä´é
¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿Åìã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ãËé·Ó੾ÒÐàÁ×èÍá¹èã¨ÇèÒà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
áÅÐäÁè¤ÇÃáªÃì¢éÍÁÙÅ·ÕèÊÓ¤Ñ−
72 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. ¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃì
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃáªÃìã¹ My Computer áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡Sharing and Security
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ 'IF you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here'
¨ÐÁÕ¼ÅμèÍ¡ÒáÓ˹´¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂàªè¹à´ÕÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªé 'Network Setup Wizard'
˹éҨ͹Õé¨ÐäÁè»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ Internet Sharing Network Wizard äÇéã¹ÊÀÒÇÇÐáÇ´ÅéÍÁ¡Ò÷ӧҹ
Ẻà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ÃÐËÇèÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
3. àÅ×Í¡ 'Just enable file sharing', áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
4. 㹿ÔÅ´ì 'Network sharing and security' ãËéàÅ×Í¡ 'Share this folder on the network' »é͹ª×èÍ¡ÒÃáªÃì áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
ÃÐÇѧ㹡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ 'Allow network users to change my files' à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¼ÙéãªéÍ×è¹æ ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃ졨ÐÊÒÁÒöá¡éä¢ä¿ÅìμèÒ§æ
ã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèáªÃìäÇéä´é
¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃìä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃìàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 73
¢Ñé¹·Õè 2. ¡ÒÃãªéä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃì
Êèǹ¹Õé͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìäÇé ËÒ¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³à»ç¹ÊÁÒªÔ¡
¢Í§àÇÔÃì¡¡ÃØê»à´ÕÂǡѹ¹Ñé¹
1. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè My Network Places ¢Í§à´Ê¡ì·Í»ã¹μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Other Places
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ 'View workgroup computers', áÅéǤÅÔ¡àÅ×Í¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ä¿Åì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìäÇé
㹡óշÕè¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÍÂÙèã¹àÇÔÃì¡¡ÃØê»Í×è¹:
1. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Other Places > Microsoft Windows Network
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ª×èÍàÇÔÃì¡¡ÃØê»·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃ
3. ¤ÅÔ¡àÅ×Í¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃà¾×èÍáÊ´§ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìäÇé
74 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì
Êèǹ¹Õé¨Ð͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃ㹡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͶ֧¡Ñ¹ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡
¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÒ§æ μèÍ仹Õé:
• ¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. ¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÂÙè¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì¹Ñé¹
• ¢Ñ¹é ·Õè 2. à¾ÔèÁáÅÐãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìäÇéã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹ã¹à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡
¢Ñé¹·Õè 1. ¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì
1. ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÂÙè¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Printers and Faxes
2. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃáªÃì áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Sharing
3. àÅ×Í¡ 'Share this printer' »é͹ª×èÍÊÓËÃѺà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèáªÃì áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
4. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Printers and Faxes ¤Ø³¨Ð¾ºäͤ͹¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìà»ÅÕè¹à»ç¹äͤ͹ẺÍ×è¹·ÕèÁÕÃÙ»Á×Í»ÃÒ¡¯ÍÂÙèá·¹
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 75
¢Ñé¹·Õè 2. ¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁáÅÐãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃì
1. ¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Printers and Faxes
2. ¤ÅÔ¡ Add a printer
3. ã¹ Add Printer Wizard ¤ÅÔ¡ Next
4. àÅ×Í¡ 'A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer' ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ Next
5. àÅ×Í¡ 'Browse for a printer' áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Next
6. àÅ×Í¡àÇÔÃì¡¡ÃØê»ËÃ×Íà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì àÅ×Í¡à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃãªé áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Next
ËÒ¡¤Ø³äÁ辺à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·Õèμéͧ¡Òà ãËéÅͧãËÁèËÅѧ¨Ò¡àÇé¹ÃÐÂÐÊÑ¡¤ÃÙè
7. ÍèÒ¹¤Óàμ×͹à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Yes à¾×èÍμÔ´μÑé§à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃì¹Ñé¹
8. àÅ×Í¡ Yes for 'Do you want to use this printer as a default printer?', áÅéǤÅÔ¡ Next
9. ¤ÅÔ¡ Finish
10. ËÅѧ¨Ò¡¡Ó˹´¤èÒ¡ÒÃáªÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèáªÃì¢Öé¹ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Printers and Faxes
μ͹¹Õé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¾ÔÁ¾ì§Ò¹â´Âãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃáªÃìä´éáÁéÇèÒà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³¨ÐäÁèä´éàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì
¹Ñé¹ÍÂÙèâ´Âμç
76 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth (ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÃÔÁ)
Bluetooth à»ç¹à·¤â¹âÅÂÕ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒÃẺäÃéÊÒ·ÕèªèÇÂãËéÊÒÁÒöãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÍÂÙèã¡Åéà¤Õ§ àªè¹ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì â·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè
à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´ ËÃ×ÍàÁÒÊì â´ÂäÁèμéͧÍÒÈÑ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ·Ò§ÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅ ¹Í¡¨Ò¡¹Õé Bluetooth ÂѧªèÇÂ㹡ÒÃÊ觼èÒ¹ä¿Åì¢éÍÁÙÅ
¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªéÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ ¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§à¤Ã×Í¢èÒÂÊèǹºØ¤¤Å áÅСÒÃãªé§Ò¹¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´ àÁÒÊì
à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ìÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth â´ÂäÁèμéͧμèÍÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ÊÒÁÒöãªéä´é੾ÒÐÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÃͧÃѺ Bluetooth à·èÒ¹Ñé¹ (àªè¹ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì,
â·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè, PDA, à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì à»ç¹μé¹) áÅСÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¹ÕéÍÒ¨¶Ù¡¨Ó¡Ñ´μÒÁâ»Ãä¿Åì¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì
Bluetooth à»ç¹¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹àÊÃÔÁ áÅÐÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕãËé㹺ҧÃØè¹
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§ Bluetooth
• • ¡ÒÃÊ觼èÒ¹ä¿Åì¢éÍÁÙÅ (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹ä¿ÅìÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth 2 à¤Ã×èͧ
áÅÐÊÒÁÒöáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹ä¿Åì¡Ñºà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì, â·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè ËÃ×Í PDA Í×è¹æ
• • ¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧÍ×è¹ ´éÇ¿ѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ¢³Ð·Õèà¢éÒãªé LAN ÃкºäÃéÊÒÂã¹âËÁ´ Ad-Hoc
ËÃ×Íàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ¨Ò¡ AP ËÃ×ͨҡà«ÔÃì¿àÇÍÃì·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ
• • ¡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×Í¢èÒ¼èÒ¹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͧ͢â·ÃÈѾ·ì (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ¼èÒ¹â·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
• • ¡Òëԧâ¤Ã乫ì¢éÍÁÙÅ (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö«Ô§â¤Ã乫ì¢éÍÁÙÅ PIMS (¢éÍÁÙÅÍÕàÁÅìáÍ´à´ÃÊã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Outlook) ¡Ñºâ·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè, PDA, â¹éμºØ¤
ÏÅÏ ·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
• • ¡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹¹ÒÁºÑμÃÍÔàÅç¡·Ã͹ԡÊì (Vcard) (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹¹ÒÁºÑμÃÍÔàÅç¡·Ã͹ԡÊì¡Ñºâ·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè, PDA, â¹éμºØ¤ ÏÅÏ ·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
• • àÍÒμì¾ØμàÊÕ§ (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¿Ñ§àÊÕ§·ÕèÁÒ¨Ò¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¼èÒ¹·Ò§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth ËÃ×ͿѧàÊÕ§¨Ò¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth
¼èÒ¹·Ò§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
• • ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ HID (
)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´, àÁÒÊì, ¨ÍÂÊμÔê¡ ÏÅÏ ·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth â»Ã´´Ù·ÕèÇÔ¸ÕãªéÍ͹äŹìÊÓËÃѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 77
μÑ駤èÒ«Í¿·ìáÇÃì Bluetooth
«Í¿·ìáÇÃì Bluetooth ÁÕμÔ´μÑé§ÍÂÙè㹺ҧÃØè¹ ã¹¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ¤Ø³μéͧμÑ駤èÒ«Í¿·ìáÇÃì Bluetooth ¡è͹
â´Â¡Ó˹´¤èÒ«Í¿·ìáÇÃì´Ñ§μèÍ仹Õé àÁ×èÍãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹¹Õéà»ç¹¤ÃÑé§áá
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèäͤ͹ Bluetooth (
¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
) ·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì´éÒ¹¢ÇÒÅèÒ§ â´ÂãªéàÁÒÊì (ËÃ×ͷѪᾴ) áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Start Using Bluetooth
2. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Next à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
ã¹¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ ãËé»é͹ª×èÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õè¨ÐáÊ´§ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Bluetooth Manager »é͹ ª×èÍ ã¹ªèͧ Computer
Name áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Laptop 㹪èͧ Computer Type
¹Í¡¨Ò¡¹Õé Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§¢Ñé¹μ͹ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ºÃÔ¡Ò÷Õè¨Ðä´éÃѺ¨Ò¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth ÊÓËÃѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth
Í×è¹æ ã¹¢Ñé¹μ͹¹Õé â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¨ÐμÃǨËÒºÃÔ¡Ò÷ÕèÁÕãËéâ´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ áÅÐáÊ´§¢Öé¹μÒÁ·ÕèàÅ×Í¡
¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËé¤Ø³ãªé¤èÒ·Õèà»ç¹¤èÒ´Õ¿ÍÅμìâ´ÂäÁèá¡éä¢
ËÒ¡¤Ø³à»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èҢͧºÃÔ¡Òà Ãкº¨ÐμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì·Õè¨Óà»ç¹ÊÓËÃѺºÃÔ¡Ò÷ÕèàÅ×Í¡à¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ
ã¹¢Ñé¹μ͹¹Õé Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§¢éͤÇÒÁàμ×͹ áÅÐá¨é§ãËé·ÃÒºÇèÒäÁèÁÕâÅâ¡é Microsoft
áμèà¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤Óàμ×͹¹Õé¨ÐäÁèÁÕ¼ÅμèÍ¡Ò÷ӧҹ ãËé´Óà¹Ô¹¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§μèÍä»
78 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
3. ËÒ¡¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙÃ³ì ¢Ñé¹μ͹¶Ñ´ä»¨Ðà»ç¹¡Òäé¹ËÒÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth ·ÕèÍÂÙèã¡Åé
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤Ø³äÁè¨Óà»ç¹μéͧ¤é¹ËÒã¹¢³Ð·ÕèμÑ駤èÒ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Skip áÅÐÊÔé¹ÊØ´¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
4. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóì àÁ¹Ùäͤ͹ Bluetooth ¢Í§¾×é¹·Õè¡ÒÃá¨é§¨Ðà»ÅÕè¹ä»μÒÁ·ÕèáÊ´§ã¹ÀÒ¾
¡ÒÃãªé Bluetooth
¤Ó͸ԺÒÂà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹ä¿ÅìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth áÅÐÇÔ¸ÕãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹æ ·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
ÇÔ¸Õãªé Bluetooth
ÇÔ¸Õãªé Bluetooth ¨ÐáÊ´§ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè My Bluetooth Settings ¨Ò¡ Desktop áÅС´·Õè»ØèÁ F1 (Help)
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 79
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Start > Help and Support > Networking and the Web > Networking > Wireless networking > Bluetooth
devices (wireless) à¾×èÍ´Ù Windows Help
¡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹ä¿ÅìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth
¤Ó͸ԺÒÂà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹ä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth
1. ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃÊè§ä¿Åì (àÃÕ¡ÇèÒ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì A) ãËé¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õè äͤ͹ Bluetooth(
ã¹¾×é¹·ÕèáÊ´§Ê¶Ò¹Ð áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Quick Connection > File Transmission > Search for Device
)
2. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Select Device ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ (àÃÕ¡ÇèÒ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì B)
3. ËÒ¡ÇÔ¹â´ÇìáÊ´§¢éÍÁÙÅ Bluetooth PIN code requested »ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹·Õè·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢ÇÒ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·ÕèÇÔ¹â´Çì¹Ñé¹ áÅлé͹
Bluetooth PIN code ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
80 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
Bluetooth PIN Code à»ç¹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹·ÕèãªéÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth Êͧà¤Ã×èͧ
¼Ùéãªéà¾Õ§»é͹ÃËÑÊ PIN ·Õèμç¡Ñ¹(àªè¹ μÑÇàÅ¢àËÁ×͹¡Ñ¹) ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth ·Ñé§Êͧà¤Ã×èͧ
à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
4. 4. ËÅÑ¡¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹ÊÑ¡¤ÃÙè Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì Bluetooth PIN Code required 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì B
ãËé»é͹ÃËÑÊ·Õè¤Ø³ÃкØã¹¢Ñé¹μ͹·Õè 3 ¢éÒ§μé¹
5. 5. ËÒ¡ÃкºáÊ´§ÇÔ¹â´Çì FTP File Access Privilege Request 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì B ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·ÕèÇÔ¹â´Çì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ
áμè¶éÒáÊ´§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Select Access Permission ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
6. 6. ÇÔ¹â´ÇìáÊ´§¡ÒÃÊ觼èÒ¹ä¿Åì¢éÍÁÙŨлÃÒ¡¯ã¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì A ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÅÒ¡ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì à¾×èÍÊè§ä»ÂѧÇÔ¹â´Çì¹Õé
¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹Ãкº¨ÐÊ觢éÍÁÙŢͧä¿ÅìáÅÐâ¿Åà´ÍÃì¹Ñé¹â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
7. 7. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃÊ觢éÍÁÙÅàÊÃç¨àÃÕºÃéÍÂáÅéÇ ãËé»Ô´ÇÔ¹â´Çì File Transmission
Ãкº¨ÐºÑ¹·Ö¡ä¿Åì·Õèä´éÃѺã¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì C:\Documents and Settings\[user name]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 81
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´ ¨ÍÂÊμÔê¡ áÅÐâ·ÃÈѾ·ì
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì HID ·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth (¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´, àÁÒÊì, ¨ÍÂÊμÔê¡ ÏÅÏ)
ËÃ×Íâ·ÃÈѾ·ì㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
Bluetooth PIN Code à»ç¹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹·ÕèãªéÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth Êͧà¤Ã×èͧ
¼Ùéãªéà¾Õ§»é͹ÃËÑÊ PIN ·Õèμç¡Ñ¹ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèÁÕ Bluetooth ·Ñé§Êͧà¤Ã×èͧ à¾×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
1. à»Ô´¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¾×èÍàª×èÍÁμèÍ (àÁÒÊì, ¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´, ¨ÍÂÊμÔê¡ ËÃ×Íâ·ÃÈѾ·ì)
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìºÒ§»ÃÐàÀ·¨ÐÁÕ»ØèÁà¾×èÍà»Ô´¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹¢éÍÁÙŨҡ¤ÙèÁ×Íãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ
2. ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õè äͤ͹ My Bluetooth Settings (
) º¹à´Ê¡ì·Í»
3. ËÒ¡ÇÔ¹â´Çì My Bluetooth Settings »ÃÒ¡¯ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè View Devices within Coverage
ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õè¨Ðàª×èÍÁμèÍ»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ (àªè¹ àÁÒÊì)
ËÒ¡ÍØ»¡Ã³ì´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇäÁè»ÃÒ¡¯ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè View Devices within Coverage ¶éÒÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ÂѧäÁè»ÃÒ¡¯
ËÅѧ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù¹Õéà»ÅÕè¹à»ç¹ Search Devices within Coverage ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Search Devices within Coverage
à¾×èÍáÊ´§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì
4. ËÒ¡ÇÔ¹â´ÇìÍÔ¹¾Øμ Bluetooth PIN Code »ÃÒ¡¯ ãËé»é͹ÃËÑÊ PIN μÒÁ¤ÙèÁ×ͧ͢ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹ â´Â»¡μÔÃËÑÊ PIN
¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì HID ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ã¹¤ÙèÁ×Í¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì
5. ËÅѧ¨Ò¡·Õè»é͹ÃËÑÊ PIN ¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìä´é·Ñ¹·Õ
¤ÕÂìºÍÃì´áÅÐàÁÒÊì·ÕèÁտѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ¨Ðãªé§Ò¹ä´é੾ÒÐã¹ Windows áμèäÁèÊÒÁÒöãªéã¹âËÁ´ MS-DOS
ËÃ×ÍâËÁ´¾Ñ¡¡Ò÷ӧҹ
82 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃËÂØ´¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth
¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õè äͤ͹ Bluetooth (
) º¹·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃìáÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Stop the Bluetooth device.
㹡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth ËÅѧ¨Ò¡·ÕèËÂØ´¡Ò÷ӧҹáÅéÇ ãËéàÅ×Í¡ Start Bluetooth device ´éÒ¹º¹
¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó㹡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
• ÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth μéͧÍÂÙèÀÒÂã¹ÃÐÂÐ 3 àÁμÃ
• â»Ã´ãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìã¹¾×é¹·Õèà»Ô´âÅè§ «Öè§äÁèÁÕ¡ÓᾧËÃ×ÍÊÔ觡մ¢ÇÒ§ à¾×èÍãËé¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôÕÂÔ觢Öé¹
• ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍâ·ÃÈѾ·ì ¡Òëԧâ¤Ã乫ì¢éÍÁÙÅ ¡ÒÃáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹¹ÒÁºÑμÃÍÔàÅç¡·Ã͹ԡÊì ¡ÒÃÊè§/ÃѺâ·ÃÊÒÃ
¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹·Õèà¡ÕèÂǡѺàÊÕ§ áÅпѧ¡ìªÑ¹¢Í§¾ÍÃìμ͹ءÃÁ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍä´é¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth
à¾Õ§à¤Ã×èͧà´ÕÂÇ
• 㹡ÒÃãªé¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèͧ͢à¤Ã×Í¢èÒ ËÃ×Ϳѧ¡ìªÑ¹¡ÒÃÊ觼èÒ¹ä¿Åì¢éÍÁÙÅ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth
ä´éËÅÒÂà¤Ã×èͧ áμè¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìËÅÒÂμÑÇ ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¤ÇÒÁàÃçÇ㹡ÒÃÊ觢éÍÁÙÅŴŧ
ËÃ×Í·ÓãËé¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍäÁèàʶÕÂà ´Ñ§¹Ñé¹¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËéàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕÅÐà¤Ã×èͧ
• ¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ¢Í§ PDA, â·ÃÈѾ·ìà¤Å×è͹·Õè, àÁÒÊì ËÃ×ͤÕÂìºÍÃì´ÍÒ¨¶Ù¡»Ô´ÍÂÙè
㹡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìàËÅèÒ¹Õéà¾×èÍàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§ Samsung ·ÕèÃͧÃѺ Bluetooth
¤Ø³μéͧμÃǨÊͺÇèҿѧ¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͹Ñé¹à»Ô´ÍÂÙèËÃ×ÍäÁè
• ÊÓËÃѺ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃà»Ô´¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Bluetooth â»Ã´´Ù¨Ò¡¤ÙèÁ×Í¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹
• ºÃÔ¡Ò÷ÕÍè Ø»¡Ã³ì Bluetooth ÁÕãËé¹Ñé¹ÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁ¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμԢͧÍØ»¡Ã³ì ËÒ¡μéͧ¡Ò÷ÃÒººÃÔ¡Ò÷ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ì
Bluetooth ÁÕãËé â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹¨Ò¡¤ÙèÁ×Íãªé§Ò¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¹Ñé¹
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 83
¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô (μÑÇàÅ×Í¡)
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé¾ÍÃìμÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàôà¾×èÍáÅ¡à»ÅÕè¹¢éÍÁÙšѺ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì à¤Ã×èͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì ¡ÅéͧáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìª¹Ô´Í×è¹æ
·ÕèÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô
㹡ÒÃãªé¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Ñé§Êͧª¹Ô´¨ÐμéͧÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô
ÍØ»¡Ã³ì¨Ðμéͧ¨Ñ´ÇÒ§ãËéμç¡Ñ¹ à¾×èÍãËéà¤Ã×èͧÃѺÊè§ÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàôÍÂÙèã¹ÃÐÂÐ˹Öè§àÁμà áÅÐμéͧäÁèÁÕÊÔ觡մ¢ÇÒ§
àÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô¡Ñº¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍ×è¹
1. à»Ô´¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅШѴÇÒ§ãËéÊèǹ·ÕèÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàôËѹà¢éÒËҡѹ
2. àÁ×èÍàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹à·ÍÃìà¹çμ ¨ÐÁÕàÊÕ§ÊÑ−−Ò³ áÅÐäͤ͹ Transmit file to another computer (
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Ö鹺¹à´Ê¡ì·Í» ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöÊ觢éÍÁÙżèÒ¹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàôä´é
¡ÒÃÊ觢éÍÁÙżèÒ¹¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô
μèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¤Ó͸ԺÒ¢Ñé¹μ͹㹡ÒÃÊè§ä¿ÅìÃÐËÇèÒ§¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÊͧà¤Ã×èͧ
1. àÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô
2. äͤ͹ Transmit file to another computer (
) »ÃÒ¡¯º¹à´Ê¡ì·Í» ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹
3. àÅ×Í¡ä¿ÅìËÃ×Íâ¿Åà´ÍÃì·Õè¨ÐÊè§ áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Send
4. ã¹Ë¹éҨͧ͢¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍÕ¡à¤Ã×èͧ ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Wireless Connection] ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Yes
5. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒÃÊè§ä¿ÅìàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Close à¾×èͻԴÇÔ¹â´Çì [Wireless Connection]
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
㹡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹â¿Åà´ÍÃì·Õè¨ÐÃѺä¿Åì ËÃ×Íà¾×èÍÊè§ä¿ÅìÀÒ¾¨Ò¡¡Åéͧ´Ô¨ÔμÑÅä»Âѧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ãËé¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Start >
Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Wireless Connect áÅÐà»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
àÁ×èÍäÁèÊÒÁÒöàÃÔèÁμ鹡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÍÔ¹¿ÃÒàô:
1. μÃǨÊͺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ BIOS
1) à»Ô´¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅС´¤ÕÂì F2 à¾×èÍà¢éÒÊÙè¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ BIOS
2) àÅ×Í¡ I/O Device Configuration ã¹àÁ¹Ù Advanced áÅС´¤ÕÂì Enter
3) àÅ×Í¡ IRDA Device áÅС´¤ÕÂì F5 ËÃ×Í F6 à¾×èÍ¡Ó˹´¤èÒà»ç¹ Enabled
4) ºÑ¹·Ö¡¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒáÅÐÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ
84 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
)
2. μÃǨÊͺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҢͧ Windows
1) ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System > á·çº Hardware > Device Manger
2) ´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèÃÒ¡Òà ‘SMC IrCC – Fast Infrared Port’ ´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§ÃÒ¡Òà ‘IrDA Device’
3) 㹿ÔÅ´ì Properties ã¹á·çº Advanced àÅ×Í¡ ‘Infrared’ áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ ‘HP’ 㹿ÔÅ´ì Value
4) ¤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ OK
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμè͡ѺÍÔ¹àμÍÃìà¹çμ 85
¡ÒûÃѺáμè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
¡ÒÃãªé¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкº
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкº (BIOS) ªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡ÎÒÃì´áÇÃì¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅÐ
¡Ó˹´¤èÒ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂáÅÐμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒûÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹ ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ·Õè¤Ø³àÅ×Í¡¨Ð¶Ù¡ºÑ¹·Ö¡Å§ã¹
˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó CMOS ·Õèä´éÃѺ¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕè ·Õè·Ó˹éÒ·ÕèºÑ¹·Ö¡¢éÍÁÙÅäÇéä´éáÁé¨Ð»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»áÅéÇ
¡çμÒÁ àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ à¤Ã×èͧ¨Ðä´éÃѺ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒâ´Â¤èÒμèÒ§æ ·Õ辺ã¹Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó¹Õé
Ãѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup ËÒ¡¤Ø³ä´é¢éͤÇÒÁá¨é§ãËéÃѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨μéͧÃѹ System Setup ´éÇ â´Â੾ÒФÃÑé§áá
·Õè¤Ø³ãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¡ÒáÓ˹´ÇѹáÅÐàÇÅÒ ¡ÒÃãªé¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂáÅФسÊÁºÑμÔ¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹ ËÃ×Í¡ÒûÃѺ
à»ÅÕ蹤èÒÍ×è¹æ ËÃ×ͤسÊÁºÑμÔÍ×è¹æ
¢éͤÇÃÃÐÇѧà¡ÕèÂǡѺ BIOS:
ËÒ¡¤Ø³äÁèÁÕ¤ÇÒÁÃÙéà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ BIOS áÅÐäÁè·ÃÒºÇèÒ¤èÒ¾ÒÃÒÁÔàμÍÃìμèÒ§æ ¤×ÍÍÐäà ãËé¢Í¤ÇÒÁªèÇÂàËÅ×ͨҡ
¼Ùé·ÕèÁÕ¤ÇÒÁÃÙéà¡ÕèÂǡѺàÃ×èͧàËÅèÒ¹Õé ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧÍÒ¨·ÓãËéÃкº·Ó§Ò¹ä´éäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ ËÃ×Í "Crash" ä´é
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup àÇÍÃìªÑ¹¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨äÁèÁÕ¿ÔÅ´ì·Ñé§ËÁ´·ÕèáÊ´§äÇé¹ÕéËÃ×ÍÍÒ¨ÁÕ¿ÔÅ´ìÍ×è¹æ à¾ÔèÁàμÔÁä´é
ª×èÍ¿ÔÅ´ìáÅÐÅӴѺ¡ÒûÃÒ¡¯ÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁàÇÍÃìªÑ¹¢Í§ BIOS (basic input/output system) ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
86 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
àÃÔèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкº (System Setup)
¡ÒÃàÃÔèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкº ãËéà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅéÇ¡´»ØèÁ <F2> ¤éÒ§äÇ騹»ÃÒ¡¯Ë¹éÒ¨Í System Setup ¢Öé¹
Table 2. àÁ¹ÙμèÒ§æ ¢Í§ System Setup
àÁ¹Ù
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹
Main
á¡é䢤èÒ¾×é¹°Ò¹¢Í§Ãкº
Advanced
á¡é䢤سÊÁºÑμÔ·Õè«Ñº«é͹¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
Security
à»Ô´ãªé¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ¡ÒÃÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑ ÃÇÁ·Ñé§ÃËÑʼèÒ¹
ºÙμ
¡Ó˹´ÅӴѺ¡ÒúÙμ¢Í§ÍػóìμèÒ§æ áÅСÓ˹´¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ㹡ÒúÙμ
Exit
¡Ó˹´ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup
㹡ÒÃà»Ô´àÁ¹Ù·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃãªé ãËéãªé»ØèÁÅÙ¡ÈëéÒÂËÃ×Í¢ÇÒà¾×èÍàÅ×Í¡ª×èÍàÁ¹Ù
Table 3. »ØèÁ¹ÒÇÔࡪѹ¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup
»ØèÁ¹ÒÇÔࡪѹ
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹
<F1>
áÊ´§ÇÔ¹â´ÇìÇÔ¸Õãªé·ÑèÇä»
<Esc>
ÍÍ¡¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹
<
> ËÃ×Í <
>
àÅ×è͹à¤ÍÃìà«ÍÃì¢Öé¹áÅÐŧÃÐËÇèÒ§¿ÔÅ´ì
<
> ËÃ×Í <
>
àÅ×Í¡àÁ¹ÙÍ×è¹æ ¡Òá´»ØèÁ <Esc> ·ÕèàÁ¹ÙËÅÑ¡ ¨Ð·ÓãËé¤Ø³ÍÍ¡ÁÒ·ÕèàÁ¹Ù Exit
<F5>
àÅ×è͹¡ÅѺä»ÂѧμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ÊÓËÃѺ¿ÔÅ´ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃäÎäÅμì
<F6>
àÅ×è͹ä»ÂѧμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¶Ñ´ä»ÊÓËÃѺ¿ÔÅ´ì·ÕèÁÕ¡ÒÃäÎäÅμì
<F9>
¡Ó˹´¾ÒÃÒÁÔàμÍÃìμèÒ§æ ÊÓËÃѺàÁ¹Ù»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹ãËéà»ç¹¤èÒ´Õ¿ÍÅμì
<F10>
ºÑ¹·Ö¡¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§áÅÐÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁμÑ駤èÒÃкº
<Enter>
ãªé¤ÓÊÑè§ËÃ×Íà»Ô´àÁ¹ÙÂèÍÂ
¡ÒûÃѺáμè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ 87
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ÅӴѺ¡ÒúÙμ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅ×Í¡ÅӴѺ¡ÒúÙμä´éÇèÒ¨ÐãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìã´¡è͹ËÅѧ àªè¹ ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì «Õ´ÕÃÍÁ ÏÅÏ
μÑÇÍÂèÒ§μèÍ仹Õé͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒáÓ˹´ ¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡ãËé¡ÑºÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìááÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒúÙμ
â´Â·Õèà´ÔÁ¡Ó˹´ãËé«Õ´ÕÃÍÁà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáá·ÕèãªéºÙμâ´Â¤èÒ´Õ¿ÍÅμì
1. àÅ×Í¡àÁ¹Ù Boot ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup
2. ¡´»ØèÁ <Enter> ·ÕèÃÒ¡Òà Boot Device Priority
3. ãªé»ØèÁ <
> à¾×èÍàÅ×è͹ä»ÂѧÃÒ¡Òà Hard Drive áÅéÇ¡´ <F6> ¨¹¡ÃзÑ觢Öé¹ÁÒÍÂÙè´éÒ¹º¹
4. ¡´»ØèÁ <F10> à¾×èͺѹ·Ö¡¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ áÅÐÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöºÙμà¤Ã×èͧä´éâ´ÂãªéÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìμÑÇáá㹡ÒúÙμä´éáÅéÇ
88 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒÃËÑʼèÒ¹
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§ Supervisor
´éÇ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èÒÃËÑʼèÒ¹ ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¨Ó¡Ñ´ÊÔ·¸Ô¡ÒÃà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹ÃкºãËéãªéä´é੾ÒмÙé·ÕèÁÕÊÔ·¸Ôà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
ËéÒÁÅ×ÁËÃ×Í·ÓÃËÑʼèÒ¹ËÒ ËÒ¡¤Ø³Å×ÁÃËÑʼèÒ¹ â»Ã´μÔ´μèÍÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡Òâͧ Samsung
1. àÅ×Í¡àÁ¹Ù Security ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup ¡ÒÃà¢éÒÊÙèâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup â»Ã´´Ù·Õè ”àÃÔèÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃкº (System
Setup)” ·Õè˹éÒ 87
2. ã¹ÃÒ¡Òà Set Supervisor Password ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Enter>
3. »é͹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ ¡´»ØèÁ <Enter> »é͹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ãËÁèÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§à¾×èÍÂ×¹Âѹ áÅéÇ¡´ <Enter> ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
4. àÁ×èÍÁÕ¢éͤÇÒÁÂ×¹Âѹ¡ÒáÓ˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Setup Notice] ãËé¡´ <Enter>
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§ User
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´¤èÒÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§ÂÙÊà«ÍÃìä´éà¾×èÍãËé¼ÙéãªéÍ×è¹æ ÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªéÃкºä´é
¡è͹¡Ó˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ¼Ùéãªé μéͧ·Ó¡ÒáÓ˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкºàÊÕ¡è͹
¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒöà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧä´éâ´ÂãªéÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§μ¹àͧ áμè¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöà¢éÒãªé§Ò¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ System Setup ä´é
¡ÒáàÅÔ¡¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкº¨ÐËÁÒ¶֧¡ÒáàÅÔ¡¡ÒÃãªéÃËÑʼèÒ¹¢Í§¼Ùéãªéä»´éÇÂ
ã¹ÃÒ¡Òà Set User Password ¡´»ØèÁ <Enter> áÅéÇ·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹·Õè 3-4 ¢Í§ËÑÇ¢éÍ "¡ÒáÓ˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ Supervisor"
¡ÒûÃѺáμè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ 89
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÃËÑʼèҹ㹡ÒúÙμ
¡è͹¡Ó˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒúÙμ μéͧ·Ó¡ÒáÓ˹´ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкºàÊÕ¡è͹
¡Ó˹´ãËé¤èÒμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Password on boot à»ç¹ [Enabled]
¨Ò¡¹Õéä» ¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöºÙμà¤Ã×èͧä´éËÒ¡äÁèãÊèÃËÑʼèÒ¹·Õè¶Ù¡μéͧ
¡ÒáàÅÔ¡¡ÒÃãªéÃËÑʼèÒ¹
1. ä»·ÕèÃËÑʼèÒ¹·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃź áÅéÇ¡´ <Enter> (àªè¹ ÃËÑʼèÒ¹ÊÓËÃѺ¼Ùé´ÙáÅÃкº)
2. »é͹ÃËÑʼèÒ¹à´ÔÁ·Õè¡Ó˹´äÇé áÅéÇ¡´ <Enter>
3. äÁèμéͧ¾ÔÁ¾ì¢éÍÁÙÅã´æ ŧ㹿ÔÅ´ì 'Enter New Password' áÅÐ 'Confirm New Password' áÅéÇ¡´»ØèÁ <Enter>
à¾×èÍ¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃãªéÃËÑʼèÒ¹¹Ñé¹
90 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´áÅÐÃдѺÊÕ
¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´¢Í§Ë¹éÒ¨Í ¤×ͨӹǹ¾Ô¡à«Å·ÕèáÊ´§º¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í ¡ÒÃãªé¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´ÊÙ§¨Ð·ÓãËé˹éҨͷÑé§ËÁ´¡ÇéÒ§¢Öé¹
áÁéÇèÒáμèÅÐÃÒ¡ÒèдÙÁÕ¢¹Ò´àÅç¡Å§¡çμÒÁ ¤Ø³ÀÒ¾¢Í§ÊÕ ¡Ó˹´â´Â¨Ó¹Ç¹ºÔμ·Õèãªéà¾×èÍáÊ´§áμèÅоԡà«Åº¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í
¤Ø³ÀÒ¾ÊÕ·ÕèÊÙ§¢Ö鹨ÐáÊ´§¨Ó¹Ç¹ÊÕä´éÁÒ¡¢Ö鹺¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í
1. àÅ×Í¡ Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Change the screen resolution
2. á¡é䢤èÒã¹á·çº Settings ¢Í§ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì [Display Properties]
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÃÕ¡´ÙªÔ»à«çμ¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡ä´é
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕ蹤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´¢Í§
˹éÒ¨Í ãËé»ÃѺᶺàÅ×è͹ä»Âѧ
¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁ
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕ蹨ӹǹÊÕ·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯
º¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í ãËéàÅ×Í¡¤Ø³ÀÒ¾¢Í§ÊÕ
·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁ
¢éÍÁÙÅ¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡ªÔ»à«çμ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´ÙªÔ»à«çμ¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡·ÕèμÔ´μÑé§ä´éã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Display Properties
- NVIDIA Geforce Go 7300/7400/7600
- Intel 945GM Graphics (DVMT)
3. ËÅѧ¨Ò¡¡Ó˹´¤èÒμèÒ§æ áÅéÇ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Apply
¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´áÅФسÀÒ¾ÊÕμèÍ仹Õéà»ç¹¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ·Õèá¹Ð¹ÓÊÓËÃѺ¨Í LCD ¢Í§Ãкº
XGA: ¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´˹éÒ¨Í: 1024 x 768, ÃдѺÊÕ: Very high (32bit)
SXGA+: ¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´˹éÒ¨Í: 1400 x 1050, ÃдѺÊÕ: Very high (32bit)
¡ÒûÃѺáμè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ 91
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡
¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡ àªè¹ ¨ÍáÊ´§¼Å, â»ÃਡàμÍÃì, â·Ã·Ñȹì ÏÅÏ ªèÇÂãËé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´ÙÀÒ¾º¹¨Íä´éº¹
ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹ËÃ×ÍáÊ´§¼Å¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹·Ñé§Êͧ¨Íä´é ¹Í¡¨Ò¡¹Õé ¤Ø³ÂѧÊÒÁÒöáÊ´§Ë¹éÒ¨Í㹨ÍÊͧ¨ÍμèÍà¹×èͧ¡Ñ¹ à¾×èÍ
à¾ÔèÁ¾×é¹·Õè㹡ÒÃáÊ´§¼Åä´éÍÕ¡´éÇ ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡ÁÕ»ÃÐ⪹ìâ´Â੾ÒÐàÁ×èͤس·Ó¡ÒùÓàÊ¹Í ËÃ×ͪÁ
ÀҾ¹μÃì·Ò§â·Ã·Ñȹì
¡ÒÃÊÅѺÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Åâ´ÂãªéªçÍμ¤Ñ·
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöáÊ´§¼Å·Ò§¨Í LCD ËÃ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡ ËÃ×ÍÍÒ¨áÊ´§¼Å·Ñ駺¹¨Í LCD áÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡
¾ÃéÍÁæ ¡Ñ¹
1. μèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡ (àªè¹ ¨ÍáÊ´§¼ÅËÃ×Íâ»ÃਡàμÍÃì) à¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍâ·Ã·Ñȹì
ãËéμèÍà¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ TV output ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
2. ËÒ¡¤Ø³¡´¤ÕÂì <Fn>+<F4/ > ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹Ë¹Ö觤ÃÑé§ Ë¹éÒ¨Í Samsung Display Manager
¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹à¾×èÍãËé¤Ø³àÅ×Í¡¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´¢Í§Ë¹éÒ¨Í
àÁ×èͤس¡´¤ÕÂì <F4/
> ÃèÇÁ¡Ñº Fn ¨Ðà»ç¹¡ÒÃàÅ×è͹ä»ÂѧÃÒ¡ÒÃ¶Ñ´ä» ãËéàÅ×Í¡âËÁ´·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃ
μÑÇÍÂèÒ§) àÅ×Í¡ LCD+CRT
LCD: ¨ÍÀÒ¾¢Í§â¹éμºØê¤
CRT: ¨ÍÀÒ¾ÀÒ¹͡
LCD+CRT: ¨ÍÀÒ¾¢Í§â¹éμºØê¤ + ¨ÍÀÒ¾ÀÒ¹͡
TV: ¨Í TV (àª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ¾ÍÃìμ TV OUT)
ã¹Ãкº MS-DOS ÀÒ¾¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ã¹ LCD > CRT μÒÁÅӴѺ áμè¨ÐäÁèÃͧÃѺ¡ÒÃáÊ´§¼Åã¹ TV/DVI ã¹ MS-DOS
âËÁ´àμçÁ˹éҨͧ͢ Windows ¤Ø³¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Åâ´Âãªé»ØèÁÅÑ´ä´é
92 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªé Dual View à¾×èÍ´Ù¨ÍÀҾẺ¢ÂÒÂ
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¢ÂÒÂ˹éÒ¨Íà»ç¹Êͧ˹éÒ¨Íä´éáÅзӧҹä´éÊдǡà¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¡ÒÃÁÕ¾×é¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹·Õèᡨҡ¡Ñ¹
ã¹âËÁ´ Dual View ¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöàÅ×Í¡¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´¢Í§Ë¹éÒ¨ÍáÅФسÀÒ¾¢Í§ÊÕÊÓËÃѺáμèÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å
àÊÁ×͹¡ÑºÁÕ¡ÒÃì´áÊ´§¼ÅÊͧ¡ÒÃì´
1. μèÍÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅÀÒ¹͡ (àªè¹ ¨ÍáÊ´§¼ÅËÃ×Íâ»ÃਡàμÍÃì) à¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ 㹡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍâ·Ã·Ñȹì
ãËéμèÍà¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμ TV output ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
2. ¡´»ØèÁ¢ÇҢͧ·Ñªá¾´º¹à´Ê¡ì·Í» ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Properties áÅéǤÅÔ¡·Õèá·çº Settings
3. ¤ÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾ '2' àÅ×Í¡àªç¤ºçÍ¡«ì 'Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor' ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ Apply
4. àÁ×èÍ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¡ÙàêѹàÊÃç¨ÊÁºÙóìáÅéÇ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ Identify ·Õè´éÒ¹«éÒ¢ͧ Troubleshoot ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅËÅÑ¡
(¨Í LCD) áÊ´§á·¹´éÇ '1', áÅШÍáÊ´§¼Å·ÕèÊͧáÊ´§à»ç¹ '2' ¢³Ð¹Õé¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´Ù˹éÒ¨Íä´é¨Ò¡·Ñé§Êͧ¨Í
1 : ¨ÍËÅÑ¡ (Primary)
2 : ¨Í·ÕèÊͧ (Secondary)
àÁ×èͤسãªé Dual View á¹Ð¹ÓãËé¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡ LCD à»ç¹ 'Primary'
¡ÒûÃѺáμè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ 93
ËÒ¡¨Í·ÕèÊͧ (secondary display) áÊ´§¼Å·Õè 640x480 ¾Ô¡à«Å 256 ÊÕ à»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒà»ç¹¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´
áÅШӹǹÊÕ·Õèμéͧ¡ÒÃã¹ä´ÍÐÅçÍ¡ºçÍ¡«ì[Display Properties]
àÁ×èÍäÁèä´éμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃáÊ´§¼Å¤ÙèäÇéÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ â»Ã´´Ù·Õè Q&A (¹. 112)
¡ÒûԴâËÁ´ Dual View
¤ÅÔ¡·Õèäͤ͹ monitor '2' ¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡àªç¤ºçÍ¡«ì 'Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor' ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ Apply
¡ÒÃÂéÒÂÇÔ¹â´ÇìÃÐËÇèÒ§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Åã¹âËÁ´ Dual View
¤ÅÔ¡·ÕèäμàμÔźÒÃì¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çìã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼ÅËÅÑ¡ (1, ¨Í LCD) áÅéÇÅÒ¡ä»ÂѧÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å·ÕèÊͧ (2) ÇÔ¹â´Çì
¨Ð¶Ù¡ÂéÒÂä»ÂѧÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å·ÕèÊͧ
94 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº
¡ÒÃãªéμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹ (Power Management)
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÁÕμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Power Management ·ÕèÊÒÁÒöªèÇÂãËéãªé»ÃШØä¿¿éÒ¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕèä´é¹Ò¹¢Öé¹ áÅÐà¾ÔèÁÍÒÂØ
¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Power-management ¨ÐÅ´¤ÇÁàÃçÇ㹡Ò÷ӧҹËÃ×ͻԴ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìμèÒ§æ ¢Í§
ÃкºàÁ×èÍäÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
Power management ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀҾ㹡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÃкºÅ´Å§ ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³¨ÐÃѹàÃçÇ·ÕèÊØ´ àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
ÊÒÂä¿à¢éҡѺáËÅ觨èÒÂä¿ «Ö觨ÐäÁèÁÕ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ power management
ã¹Êèǹ¶Ñ´ä» ¨Ð¡ÅèÒǶ֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áºº¾×é¹°Ò¹áÅÐẺ«Ñº«é͹
ÃٻẺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹¾×é¹°Ò¹ (Basic Power Management Schemes)
Êèǹ¹Õé͸ԺÒ¶֧ÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹¾×é¹°Ò¹àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Ó§Ò¹â´Âãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕèËÃ×Íãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡ä¿ AC
Standby vs. Hibernation
Hibernation ¤×ÍʶҹзÕè¢éÍÁÙÅã¹Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó¶Ù¡¨Ñ´à¡çºÅ§ã¹ä¿Åì¾ÔàÈÉã¹ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì áÅÐ Standby
¨Ðà»ç¹¡ÒÃãªé¾×é¹·ÕèàÅ硹éÍÂà¾×èÍà¡çººÑ¹·Ö¡¢éÍÁÙÅ ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢éÍÁÙÅÊÙ−ËÒÂä´éàÁ×èÍÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´ Standby
´Ñ§¹Ñé¹á¹Ð¹ÓãËé¤Ø³ºÑ¹·Ö¡§Ò¹·Ñé§ËÁ´¡è͹à¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´ Standby
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ì:
ËéÒÁà»ÅÕè¹¾Õ«Õ¡ÒÃì´¢³Ð·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´ standby ËÃ×Í hibernate
¡ÒÃà¢éÒÊÙèÇÔ¹â´Çì power management ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
1. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance
2. ¤ÅÔ¡äͤ͹
à¾×èÍáÊ´§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Power Options Properties
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 95
3. ¤ÅÔ¡á·çº Power Schemes à¾×èÍáÊ´§μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹¾×é¹°Ò¹
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ Power Setting ¶Ù¡¡Ó˹´à»ç¹ âËÁ´ BatteryMgr-Normal Mode BatteryMgr-Normal Mode
Â×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè àÁ×èÍãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕè áÅÐãªé¤Ø³ÊÁºÑμÔ Intel Speedstep
ÍÂèÒ§àμçÁ»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡âËÁ´¹Õé¨Ðãªé»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¢Í§¤ÇÒÁàÃçÇ㹡ÒûÃÐÁÇżŢͧÃкº
à¾×èÍãËéãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹μèÓÊØ´ ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨¾ºÇèÒ¡Ò÷ӧҹàÁ×èÍãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè¨ÐªéÒ¡ÇèÒàÁ×èÍãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡ä¿¿éÒ¡ÃÐáÊÊÅѺ
㹡ÒÃãªéâËÁ´ BatteryMgr-Normal ã¹Ãкº Windows â»Ã´μÔ´μÑé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Battery Manager
â´ÂãªéÊ×èÍà¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅ System Software
4. àÅ×Í¡àÇÅÒ·Õè¤Ø³μéͧ¡ÒÃãËé¡Ò÷ӧҹáμèÅÐÍÂèÒ§à¡Ô´¢Öé¹ã¹âËÁ´ Battery áÅÐ AC power
•
•
•
•
»Ô´Ë¹éÒ¨Í
»Ô´¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì
à¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´Êáμ¹´ìºÒÂ
à¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´ hibernates
¡ÒûԴ¨ÍÁ͹ÔàμÍÃìáÅÐÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì¨ÐÅ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕè ´Ñ§¹Ñé¹àÁ×èÍÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´ãªé§Ò¹áºμàμÍÃÕèà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
ãËéàÅ×Í¡àÇÅÒ·ÕèÊÑé¹·ÕèÊØ´
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´μÒÃҧ㹡Òà shutdown, à¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´ Hibernation ËÃ×Í Standby ä´éâ´Â¤ÅÔ¡·Õè System > Computer
Scheduling ¢Í§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ EasyBox (”¡ÒÃãªé EasyBox” ·Õè˹éÒ 33)
ËÒ¡¤Ø³à»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Battery Manager ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èҢͧÇÔ¹â´Çì 'Power Options
Properties' ¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ (”¡ÒÃãªé Battery Manager” (¹. 102))
96 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
âËÁ´ Hibernate (Power Management ËÃ×ÍÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃẺ¡Ó˹´àͧ)
àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃãªéâËÁ´ hibernation ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³¨Ð»Ô´ä» áÅÐàÁ×èͤسà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ ·Ø¡æ ÍÂèÒ§¨Ð¡ÅѺÁÒÍÂÙèã¹Ê¶Ò¾
à´ÔÁ·Õèãªé§Ò¹ÃÇÁ·Ñé§â»Ãá¡ÃÁμèÒ§æ áÅÐàÍ¡ÊÒÃμèÒ§æ ·Õè¤Ø³ÂѧäÁèä´éºÑ¹·Ö¡ËÃ×ͻԴ ·Ø¡ÍÂèÒ§ã¹Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó¨Ð¶Ù¡ºÑ¹·Ö¡
äÇéã¹ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì â´Â˹éÒ¨ÍáÅÐÎÒÃì´´ÔÊì¨Ð¶Ù¡»Ô´¡Ò÷ӧҹä»
ËÒ¡¤Ø³μÔ´μÑé§ Windows ãËÁè:
¤Ø³¤ÇÃãªéâËÁ´ hibernate ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ã¹μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¾Åѧ§Ò¹ â´Â¡ÒÃà»Ô´ÇÔ¹â´Çì Power Options Properties áÅéǤÅÔ¡
·Õèá·çº Hibernate ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡ "Enable Hibernation"
á·çº Hibernate
¡ÒÃËÂØ´·Ó§Ò¹ºèÍÂæ:
ËÒ¡¤Ø³ÁÕ¡Ò÷ӧҹáÅéÇËÂØ´à»ç¹ÃÐÂÐ ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨àÅ×Í¡ãËé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¢éÒÊÙèâËÁ´ hibernation ÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
ËÅѧ¨Ò¡àÇÅÒ¼èÒ¹ä»ÃÐÂÐ˹Öè§μÒÁμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¢Í§¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹
âËÁ´ Standby (Power Management ËÃ×ÍÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃẺ¡Ó˹´àͧ)
Standby ÁÑ¡¨Ðãªéà¾×èÍ¡ÒûÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹ã¹¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ¹éμºØ¤ê «Ö觨ÐÁÕ»ÃÐ⪹ì㹡ÒáÅѺÁÒ·Ó§Ò¹ä´éÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
â´ÂäÁèμéͧÃͺÙμà¤Ã×èͧãËÁè âËÁ´ Standby ¨Ð»Ô´¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§¨ÍáÅÐÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì à¾×èÍãËéÃкºÅ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹Å§
àÁ×èͤس¡ÅѺÁÒãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ¨ÐÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹μèÍä´éã¹ÊÀÒÇÐà´ÔÁ á¹Ð¹ÓÇèÒËéÒÁà¢éÒâËÁ´ standby â´Âãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹
áºμàμÍÃÕè¹éÍ¡ÇèÒ 20%
5. ¤ÅÔ¡ OK à¾×èÍ¡Ó˹´μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áÅлԴÇÔ¹â´Çìä»
Rest Key:
¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁ¼ÊÁ <Fn+Esc/ > ¨ÐäÁèÁÕ¼Å㹡ÒÃãªéâËÁ´ Standby ËÃ×Í Hibernate
àÁ×èͤس¡ÓÅѧãªé§Ò¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁÁÑÅμÔÁÕà´Õ ËÃ×ÍÁÕÍØ»¡Ã³ì USB àª×èÍÁμèÍáÅСÓÅѧãªé§Ò¹ÍÂÙè
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 97
ÃٻẺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áºº«Ñº«é͹ (Advance Power Management Schemes)
Êèǹ¹Õé͸ԺÒÂà¡ÕèÂǡѺÃٻẺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áºº«Ñº«é͹ ÁÕ»ØèÁÊͧ»ØèÁ·Õè¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªéà¾×èÍ»ÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹
¡ÒÃà¢éÒÊÙèÇÔ¹â´Çì power management ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
1. ¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance
2. ¤ÅÔ¡äͤ͹
à¾×èÍáÊ´§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Power Options Properties
3. ¤ÅÔ¡á·çº Advanced à¾×èÍáÊ´§μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áºº«Ñº«é͹
á·çº Advanced
»ØèÁ Power & Sleep
Programming Windows
4. àÅ×Í¡âËÁ´ (Do nothing/Ask me what to do/Standby/Hibernate/Shut down) ãËé¡Ñº»ØèÁ Power áÅÐ/ËÃ×Í Rest <Esc/
> àÅ×Í¡¡Ò÷ӧҹ (Do nothing/Standby/Hibernate) ·ÕèÊÑÁ¾Ñ¹¸ì¡Ñº¡ÒûԴ½Ò¤Ãͺà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
»ØèÁ "Rest" ¡Ó˹´ãËé¡Ñº»ØèÁ <Fn+Esc/ > â»Ã´´Ù ”ÃٻẺ¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹¾×é¹°Ò¹ (Basic Power
Management Schemes)” ·Õè˹éÒ 95 à¾×èÍãËéà¢éÒ㨡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§âËÁ´ Standby áÅÐ Hibernate
5. ¤ÅÔ¡ OK à¾×èÍ¡Ó˹´μÑÇàÅ×Í¡¡ÒèѴ¡ÒþÅѧ§Ò¹áÅлԴÇÔ¹â´Çìä»
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö¡ÅѺä»ÂѧâËÁ´¡Ò÷ӧҹ»¡μÔä´éËÅѧ¨Ò¡ä´éãªé»ØèÁ "Power Management" â´Â¡Òá´áÅлÅèÍ»ØèÁ Power
98 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
â»Ã´´Ù¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓμèÍ仹ÕéàÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃÃѹ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ´Âãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹¨Ò¡áºμàμÍÃÕèâ´ÂäÁèä´éμèÍÊÒÂä¿ AC
¢éͤÇÃÃÐÇѧ
•
•
•
•
ãªé੾ÒзÕèªÒÃ쨷ÕèÃкØ㹤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
ËéÒÁÁÔãËéáºμàμÍÃÕèä´éÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÃé͹ ÇÒ§ã¡Åé¡Ñºä¿ËÃ×Íãªéã¹ÍسËÀÙÁÔ·ÕèÊÙ§¡ÇèÒ 60 ͧÈÒ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéμÔ´ä¿
ËéÒÁ·ÓãËéä¿¿éÒÅѴǧ¨ÃÃÐËÇèÒ§¢ÑéǢͧáºμàμÍÃÕè ËÃ×Ͷʹ»ÃСͺáºμàμÍÃÕè
â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹áÅл¯ÔºÑμÔμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Ó·Õè¾ÔÁ¾ìäÇ麹áºμàμÍÃÕè áÅФÓá¹Ð¹Óà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ㹤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡è͹·Õè¨ÐãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹¤Óá¹Ð¹Óà¡ÕèÂǡѺáºμàμÍÃÕè¡è͹ãªé§Ò¹
â»Ã´´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§Ãкº (¹. 136) 㹤ÙèÁ×͹ÕéáÅзӧҹáÅШѴà¡çºáºμàμÍÃÕèäÇé·ÕèÍسËÀÙÁÔËéͧ
¡ÒöʹáÅÐãÊèáºμàμÍÃÕè
1. »Ô´à¤Ã×èͧáÅлԴ¨Í LCD
2. ˧ÒÂà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Öé¹â´ÂÇÒ§º¹¼ÔÇàÃÕº
3. ´Ö§ÊÅÑ¡ÂÖ´áºμàμÍÃÕè·Ñé§ÊͧÍÍ¡´éÒ¹¹Í¡ (
) áÅéǹÓáºμàμÍÃÕèÍÍ¡
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 99
4. ¡ÒÃãÊèáºμàμÍÃÕèÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ ãËéÊÍ´áºμàμÍÃÕèŧã¹à¤Ã×èͧ´Ñ§¹Õé ÊÅÑ¡ÂÖ´áºμàμÍÃÕè¨ÐàÅ×è͹à¢éÒ áÅÐÂÖ´áºμàμÍÃÕèäÇéâ´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺ»ÃШآͧáºμàμÍÃÕè
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö´Ù»ÃШآͧáºμàμÍÃÕèä´éâ´Â·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé
¡ÒÃãªé»ØèÁªçÍμ¤Ñ·à¾×èÍàÃÕ¡´Ù
ËÒ¡¡´¤ÕÂì <Fn>+<F2/ > ÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹ Ãкº¨ÐáÊ´§ÃдѺ¾Åѧ§Ò¹·ÕèàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙèã¹áºμàμÍÃÕèªÑèÇ¢³Ð˹Öè§
â´Â¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒÐàÁ×èÍμÔ´μÑé§ Samsung Display Manager äÇé㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¡ÒÃàÃÕ¡´ÙáºμàμÍÃÕè
¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ PUSH ·ÕèáºμàμÍÃÕè ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯»ÃШØáºμàμÍÃÕè·ÕèàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙè (%)
»ØèÁ Push
100 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃàÃÕ¡´Ù¼èÒ¹ Control Panel
àÅ×Í¡á·çº Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Option > Power Measure
¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöàÃÕ¡´ÙáËÅ觨èÒÂ俻Ѩ¨ØºÑ¹áÅлÃШØáºμàμÍÃÕè·ÕèàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙè
ʶҹТͧà¾ÒàÇÍÃì«Ñ¾¾ÅÒÂ
»ÃШآͧáºμàμÍÃÕè·ÕèàËÅ×Í
¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
áºμàμÍÃÕè¤×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèàÊ×èÍÁÊÀÒ¾ä´é ´Ñ§¹Ñé¹àÁ×èͤسãªéä»à»ç¹àÇÅÒ¹Ò¹ ¤ÇÒÁ¨Ø/ÍÒÂآͧáºμàμÍÃÕè¨ÐŴŧ
ËÒ¡áºμàμÍÃÕèŴŧ¨¹àËÅ×ÍäÁè¶Ö§¤ÃÖ觢ͧàÇÅÒàÃÔèÁμé¹ àÃÒá¹Ð¹ÓãËé¤Ø³«×éÍáºμàμÍÃÕèãËÁè
¤Óàμ×͹à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¤Ø³¨Ðä´éÂÔ¹àÊÕ§àμ×͹àÁ×èÍÁÕ»ÃШØáºμàμÍÃÕèàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙèμèÓ¡ÇèÒ 10% μèÍÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅËÃ×ͻԴà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
áÅÐμÔ´μÑé§áºμàμÍÃÕèãËÁè·ÕèÁÕ»ÃШØàμçÁ
àÁ×èÍ»ÃШØáºμàμÍÃÕèàËÅ×ÍÍÂÙè¹éÍ¡ÇèÒ 3% ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¨ÐºÑ¹·Ö¡§Ò¹»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹áÅлԴà¤Ã×èÍ§ä» «Öè§ÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»
μÒÁ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒã¹á·çº Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Alarms
Â×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè
¡ÒÃÅ´¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD
¡ÒÃÅ´¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§ LCD â´Â¡´»ØèÁ <Fn>+< > ÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹º¹á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì ËÃ×Í»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§ã¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Battery
Manager ¨ÐªèÇÂÂ×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¡ÒÃÅ´¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§ LCD ŧ˹Öè§ÃдѺ¨ÐÂ×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹áºμàμÍÃÕèä´é 3~5% (10~20 ¹Ò·Õ) (àÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¢Öé¹ÍÂÙè¡ÑºÃØ蹢ͧà¤Ã×èͧ´éÇÂ)
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 101
¡ÒÃãªé Battery Manager
Battery Manager à»ç¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ¨Ñ´¡ÒáÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹·ÕèªèÇÂãËéÊÒÁÒöãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹ä´éÍÂèÒ§ÁÕ»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕè¹âËÁ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹â´Â§èÒ´Ò â´ÂàÅ×Í¡âËÁ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹·ÕèàËÁÒÐÊÁ áÅÐÂ×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃ
·Ó§Ò¹¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè´éÇ¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒμÑÇàÅ×Í¡μèÒ§æ
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè Start > All Programs > Samsung > Samsung Battery Manager > Samsung Battery Manager
àÅ×Í¡ Power Mode
Power Saving Effects
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕè¹ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕÂ
´¡ÒáÓ˹´¤Í¹¿Ô¡ä´é੾ÒÐ
ã¹ Custom Mode à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
• Maximum Battery Saving Mode : âËÁ´¹ÕéàËÁÒÐÊÓËÃѺÊÀÒÇзÕèμéͧ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕèà»ç¹ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¹Ò¹·ÕèÊØ´
«Öè§ÍҨŴ »ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀҾ㹡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§ÃкºÅ§
• Normal Mode : âËÁ´¹ÕéàËÁÒÐÊÓËÃѺ¡Ò÷ӧҹμÒÁ»¡μÔ ·Ñ駻ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¢Í§Ãкº áÅÐÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¨ÐÍÂÙèã¹ÃдѺÊÙ§ÊØ´
• Maximum Performance Mode : âËÁ´¹ÕéàËÁÒÐÊÓËÃѺÊÀÒÇзÕèμéͧ¡ÒûÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾¢Í§ÃкºÊÙ§ÊØ´
´Ñ§¹Ñé¹àÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ÂèÍÁ¨ÐÊÑé¹Å§´éÇÂ
• Custom Mode : ã¹âËÁ´¹Õé ¼ÙéãªéÊÒÁÒö¡Ó˹´ÃÒÂÅÐàÍÕ´¤Í¹¿Ô¡μèÒ§æ ä´éàͧà¾×èÍÅ´¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒö»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨ÍáÊ´§¼Å LCD àÇÅÒÊáμ¹´ìºÒ¢ͧÃкº ¤Ø³ÀÒ¾Êբͧ˹éÒ¨Í
áÅФèҢͧâËÁ´¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡
¼ÅÅѾ¸ì¡ÒûÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹
áÊ´§ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕèÊÓËÃѺáμèÅÐâËÁ´¡ÒÃãªé¾Åѧ§Ò¹ ÂÔ觡ÒûÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹ÁÕ»ÃÐÊÔ·¸ÔÀÒ¾
ÁÒ¡à·èÒã´ ¡ÃÒ¿¡ç¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯ÂÒÇ¢Öé¹à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
àÁ×èÍàÅè¹à¡ÁËÃ×Íãªéá;¾ÅÔपѹÁÑÅμÔÁÕà´ÕÂ
à¡ÁËÃ×Íá;¾ÅÔपѹÁÑÅμÔÁÕà´Õ¨зӧҹäÁèÃÒºÃ×蹹ѡàÁ×èÍÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´ Maximum Battery Saving Mode
á¹Ð¹ÓãËéãªéâËÁ´¹ÕéàÁ×èÍμèÍÍÐá´»àμÍÃìä¿¿éÒ¡ÃÐáÊÊÅѺ ËÃ×Íã¹âËÁ´ Normal ¢Öé¹ä»
102 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
»Ô´ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèäÁè¨Óà»ç¹
¡ÒûԴÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèäÁè¨Óà»ç¹¨ÐªèÇÂÂ×´ÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ¡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè
àÅ×Í¡ Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System > á·çº Hardware áÅФÅÔ¡·Õè Device
Manager ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·ÕèÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèäÁèä´éãªé áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ 'Disable' (àªè¹ wireless LAN, 1394 à»ç¹μé¹)
¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺáºμàμÍÃÕè
ËÒ¡¤Ø³ªÒÃì¨áÅÐãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè«éÓæ ã¹àÇÅÒÊÑé¹æ àÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃãªéáºμàμÍÃÕè¨ÐŴŧμÒÁÊèǹμèÒ§¢Í§¡ÒêÒÃì¨áºμàμÍÃÕè¨ÃÔ§
áÅСÒÃáÊ´§»ÃШØä¿¿éÒ·ÕèàËÅ×Í ã¹¡Ã³Õ¹Õé »ÃШØ俢ͧáºμàμÍÃÕèáÅСÒÃáÊ´§»ÃШØä¿¿éÒ·ÕèàËÅ×ͨÐàËÁ×͹¡Ñ¹ â´Âãªé»ÃШØä¿
¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕ訹ËÁ´ â´Âãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Battery Calibration ¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹪ÒÃì¨áºμàμÍÃÕèÍÕ¡¤ÃÑéè§
1. ¶Í´ÊÒÂä¿ AC ÍÍ¡ËÅѧ¨Ò¡»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ
2. ºÙμà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅéÇ¡´»ØèÁ <F2> à¾×èÍà¢éÒÊÙè¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ BIOS
3. ãªé»ØèÁÅÙ¡Èà äÎäÅμì·Õè Smart Battery Calibration ã¹àÁ¹Ù Boot
¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Battery Calibration ¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹ áÅкѧ¤ÑºãËéÁÕ¡ÒäÒ»ÃШآͧáºμàμÍÃÕè
¡Ò÷ӧҹ¹Õé¨ÐãªéàÇÅÒ 3~5 ªÑèÇâÁ§ â´Â¢Öé¹ÍÂÙè¡Ñº¤ÇÒÁ¨Ø¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè áÅлÃШØä¿¿éÒ·ÕèàËÅ×Í
4. ËÅѧ¨Ò¡¡Ãкǹ¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺàÊÃç¨áÅéÇ ãËéªÒÃ쨻ÃШØãËÁèÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 103
¡ÒÃÍÑ»à¡Ã´Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¤Ã×èͧ¹ÕéÁÕ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó 256 àÁ¡Ðäºμì˹Öè§á¶ÇËÃ×ÍÁÒ¡¡ÇèÒ ËÃ×ÍâÁ´ÙÅ 512 àÁ¡Ðäºμì (ËÃ×ÍÁÒ¡¡ÇèÒ) â´ÂÁÕ«çͤà¡çμ
ÊÓËÃѺâÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓÊͧ«çͤà¡çμ ´Ñ§¹Ñ鹤س¨Ö§ÊÒÁÒöà»ÅÕè¹˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓËÃ×ÍμÔ´μÑé§âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óà¾ÔèÁä´é
¡ÒöʹâÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó
¡è͹·Õè¨Ð¶Í´/à»ÅÕè¹âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó ãËé»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìàÊÕ¡è͹ ËéÒÁà»ÅÕè¹âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó
¢³Ð·ÕèÃкºÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´ Standby/Hibernate
àÁ×èÍãªé˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óã¹áª¹à¹Å¤Ùè ãËéãªé˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó·Õèà»ç¹áººà´ÕÂǡѹ (¤ÇÒÁ¨Øà·èҡѹáÅÐÁÒ¨Ò¡¼Ùé¼ÅÔμà´ÕÂǡѹ)
1. ãªé䢤ǧà»Ô´ªèͧãÊèâÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
Ê¡ÃÙ
2. ´Ñ¹á·çºÂÖ´âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓÍÍ¡à¾×èÍãËéâÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó´Õ´μÑÇ¢Öé¹ÁÒ ¤èÍÂæ ´Ö§âÁ´ÙÅÍÍ¡àºÒæ â´Â·ÓÁØÁ»ÃÐÁÒ³ 30°
104 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃà¾ÔèÁâÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó
1. ¹Ó¢Ò¢Í§âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓãËÁèÁÒÇҧŧ㹪èͧáÅéÇàÅ×è͹à¢éÒä»ã¹ÊÅçÍμâ´Â·ÓÁØÁ 30°
μÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒ´éÒ¹ºÒ¡¢Í§âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óμç¡Ñº¢Í§«çͤà¡çμ
2. ´Ñ¹âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óŧ¨¹¡ÃзÑ觤ÅÔ¡à¢éÒ·Õè ËÒ¡âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓäÁèà¢éÒ·ÕèʹԷ ¤èÍÂæ ´Ñ¹Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óŧ
¢³Ð·Õè¡´á·çº¢Í§âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓÍÍ¡´éÒ¹¹Í¡
3. »Ô´áÅÐÂÖ´ªèͧãÊè˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Óâ´Âãªé䢤ǧ¢Ñ¹ãËéá¹è¹
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 105
¡ÒÃãªé¾ÍÃìμÅçͤà¾×èÍÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
ÍØ»¡Ã?ìÅçͤà¾×èÍÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀѤ×ÍÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèãªéà¾×èÍ ‘ÂÖ´’ à¤Ã×èͧàÁ×èÍãªé§Ò¹ã¹·ÕèÊÒ¸ÒóРÍØ»¡Ã³ìÅçͤμéͧ«×éÍà¾ÔèÁμèÒ§ËÒ¡
ÃÙ»ÃèÒ§áÅТ¹Ò´¢Í§¡ÒÃãªéÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁ¼Ùé¼ÅÔμ â»Ã´´Ù¤ÙèÁ×Í·ÕèãËéÁÒ¾ÃéÍÁ¡ÑºÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¾×èÍ´ÙÇÔ¸Õ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹
1. μèÍÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅÅçͤà¾×èÍÂÖ´à¤Ã×èͧ
2. ¢³Ð·ÕèÂÖ´¡éÒ¹¤Ñ¹Åçͤ¾ÍÃìμà¾×èÍÃÑ¡ÉÒ¤ÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂä»´éÒ¹«éÒ ãËéμèÍÊÒÂà¤àºÔÅà¢éҡѺ¾ÍÃìμÅçͤà¾×èͤÇÒÁ»ÅÍ´ÀÑÂ
·Ñ駹ÕéäÁèÃѺ»ÃСѹ¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒ·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Ö鹡Ѻà¤Ã×èͧ·Õèà¡Ô´¨Ò¡¡ÒÃÅçͤ/ÍØ»¡Ã³ìÅçͤ
106 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
à¤Åç´ÅѺ㹡ÒÃãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓμèÍ仹ÕéªèÇ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒ·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Ö鹡Ѻ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ä´é
ÍÂèÒ¾ÂÒÂÒÁá¡Ðà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ ¡ÒÃá¡Ðà¤Ã×èͧ¨Ð·ÓãËé¡ÒÃÃѺ»ÃСѹÊÔé¹ÊØ´
¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹ËÃ×ÍμÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìã¹à¤Ã×èͧ μéͧ·Óâ´ÂÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡Ò÷Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃáμè§μÑé§à·èÒ¹Ñé¹
•
•
•
•
·ÓμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹ÓáÅФÓàμ×͹㹤ÙèÁ×Í¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
¨Í LCD ÁÕ¼ÔǺͺºÒ§ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁàÊÕÂËÒÂä´é§èÒ à¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡ÒÃàÊÕÂËÒ ãËéËÅÑ¡àÅÕ觡ÒÃÊÑÁ¼ÑÊ˹éÒ¨Í
ãªé੾ÒÐÍÐá´»àμÍÃì AC , ÍÐá´»àμÍÃìÊÓËÃѺãªéã¹Ã¶, ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨ÓáÅÐÍØ»¡Ã³ìÍ×è¹æ ·Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃÃѺÃͧà·èÒ¹Ñé¹
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìâ¹éμºØê¤ÁÕ¢¹Ò´àÅç¡áÅÐÁÕ¡ÒÃäËÅàÇÕ¹¢Í§ÍÒ¡ÒÈ·Õè¨Ó¡Ñ´ ¨Ö§ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¡ÒÃâÍàÇÍÃìÎÕ·
ä´éÁÒ¡¡ÇèÒà¤Ã×èͧà´Ê¡ì·Í» ¾Ñ´ÅÁã¹à¤Ã×èͧÍÒ¨·Ó§Ò¹ä´éàÁ×èͨÓà»ç¹à¾×èÍÅ´¤ÇÒÁÃé͹ μÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèҾѴÅÁ
ÃкÒ¤ÇÒÁÃé͹´éÒ¹«éÒ¢ͧà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìäÁè¶Ù¡»Ô´¡Ñé¹¢³Ð·Õèãªéà¤Ã×èͧ ãËéμÃǨÊͺªèͧÃкÒÂÍÒ¡ÒÈ
áÅйӽØè¹ËÃ×ÍÊÔè§ÍØ´μѹÍÍ¡ºéÒ§
• ËÅÕ¡àÅÕ觡ÒÃãªéËÃ×Í¡ÒÃà¡çºà¤Ã×èͧäÇéã¹·Õè·ÕèÁÕÍÒ¡ÒÈÃé͹ËÃ×ÍàÂ繨Ѵ àªè¹ã¹Ã¶ã¹Çѹ·ÕèÁÕÍÒ¡ÒÈÃé͹ÁÒ¡ à¡çº
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìãËéËèÒ§¨Ò¡ÎÕ·àμÍÃìáÅСÒÃⴹᴴâ´Âμç ¡ÒÃÊÑÁ¼ÑʤÇÒÁÃé͹â´ÂμçÍÒ¨·ÓãËéÍØ»¡Ã³ì
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìàÊÕÂËÒÂä´é ËÒ¡¤Ø³·Ôé§à¤Ã×èͧäÇéã¹·ÕèÃé͹¨Ñ´ ãËé·Ôé§à¤Ã×èͧäÇéãËéàÂç¹Å§ã¹ÍسËÀÙÁÔËéͧ (â´Âà»Ô´½Ò LCD ÍÍ¡)
¡è͹ãªéà¤Ã×èͧ
• ËéÒÁà»Ô´½Ò»Ô´âÁ´ÙÅ˹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó ËÃ×;ÂÒÂÒÁμÔ´μÑé§Ë¹èǤÇÒÁ¨Ó¢³Ð·Õèà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ
• ¨Ñ´¾×é¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹ãËé´Õà¾×èÍ»éͧ¡Ñ¹¡Òâٴ¢Õ´ ¹Ñè§ãËéËÅѧμçáÅÐṺ¡Ñºà¡éÒÍÕé »ÃѺà¡éÒÍÕéËÃ×Íâμêзӧҹà¾×èÍãËéᢹ
áÅТéÍÁ×ÍÍÂÙèã¹μÓá˹觷Õè¼è͹¤ÅÒ áÅТ¹Ò¹ä»¡Ñº¾×é¹ ËÅÕ¡àÅÕ觡ÒúԴ¢éÍÁ×Í¢³Ð·Ó§Ò¹ ᢹ¢Í§¤Ø³¤ÇÃÇÒ§
à˹×Íá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìẺʺÒÂæ â»Ã´´Ù˹ѧÊ×Íà¡ÕèÂǡѺËÅÑ¡ÊÃÕÃÐÈÒÊμÃìà¾×èÍ´Ù¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒèѴ¾×é¹·Õè·Ó§Ò¹
• ËÂØ´¾Ñ¡à»ç¹ÃÐÂШҡ¡ÒÃãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà¾×è;ѡÊÒÂμÒáÅмè͹¤ÅÒ¡ÅéÒÁà¹×éÍ
• ÍÂèÒÅ×ÁºÑ¹·Ö¡ä¿Åì¢éÍÁÙÅáÅÐáºç¤ÍÑ»ÊÓà¹Ò¢Í§ä¿ÅìäÇé
• ËéÒÁ¹ÓÇÔ·ÂØÊ×èÍÊÒÃà¢éÒã¡ÅéÍØ»¡Ã³ìà¡Ô¹¡ÇèÒ 1 àÁμÃ
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ÇÔ·ÂØÊ×èÍÊÒÃÁÕ¡ÒÃÊè§ÊÑ−−Ò³·ÕèáçÁÒ¡ áÅÐÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì·Ó§Ò¹¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´
¡ÒÃà´Ô¹·Ò§â´Â¹Óà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»´éÇÂ
¡ÒÃà´Ô¹·Ò§â´Âà¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹
ËÒ¡¤Ø³à´Ô¹·Ò§â´Âà¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹ ãËé·ÓμÒÁà¤Åç´ÅѺμèÍ仹Õé:
• ¹Ó¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìä»´éÇÂâ´ÂãÊèä»ã¹¡ÃÐà»ëÒÊÓËÃѺãÊèâ¹éμºØê¤ ËéÒÁãÊè¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÃÇÁ¡ÑºàÊ×éͼéÒËÃ×ÍÊÔè§Í×è¹æ
• ãËé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅдÔÊ¡ì¼èÒ¹à¤Ã×èͧàÍç¡«ìàÃÂìä´é ËéÒÁ¶×Í´ÔÊ¡ì¼èÒ¹à¤Ã×èͧμÃǨ¨ÑºâÅËÐ «Öè§ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¢éÍÁÙÅÊÙ−ËÒÂä´é
• àμÃÕÂÁ»Ô´à¤Ã×Íè §¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÃÐËÇèÒ§·Õèà¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹¢Öé¹áÅÐŧ
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃÃкº 107
â»Ã´»¯ÔºÑμÔμÒÁ¤Óá¹Ð¹Óã¹¾×é¹·Õè à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªéÍØ»¡Ã³ìäÃéÊÒ (LAN äÃéÊÒÂ, Bluetooth ÏÅÏ)
ã¹¾×é¹·Õè«Ö觨ӡѴ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒôéÇÂÃкºäÃéÊÒ (àªè¹ ã¹à¤Ã×èͧºÔ¹ âç¾ÂÒºÒÅ ÏÅÏ)
¡ÒèѴ¡ÒÃàÁ×èͧ͢àËÅÇË¡ãÊè
ËéÒÁãËé¢Í§àËÅÇã´æ ˡôà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ ÇÔ¸Õ¡Ò÷Õè´Õ·ÕèÊش㹡Òûéͧ¡Ñ¹¢Í§àËÅÇˡô¤×Í¡ÒÃËÅÕ¡àÅÕ觡Òô×èÁ
ËÃ×Í·Ò¹ÍÒËÒÃã¡Åéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ËÒ¡¤Ø³·Ó¢Í§àËÅÇˡôà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ ãËé»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ ¶Í´»ÅÑê¡ÍÍ¡·Ñ¹·Õ
áÅéÇ·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
• ËÒ¡¢Í§àËÅÇˡôá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì ãËé«Ñº¢Í§àËÅÇ·Õèá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìãËéä´éÁÒ¡·ÕèÊØ´à·èÒ·Õè¨Ð·Óä´é ÃÐÇѧÍÂèÒãËé¢Í§àËÅÇˡô¨Í
LCD »ÅèÍÂãËéà¤Ã×èͧáËé§ËÅÒÂæ Çѹ¡è͹¨Ð·´ÅͧãªéÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
• ËÒ¡¤Ø³·Ó¢Í§àËÅÇˡôá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìÀÒ¹͡ËÃ×Í»ØèÁ¡´ ãËé»Å´ÊÒÂÍÍ¡áÅéǫѺãËéä´éÁÒ¡·ÕèÊØ´à·èÒ·Õè¨Ð·Óä´é
»ÅèÍÂãËéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìáËé§ã¹ÍسËÀÙÁÔËéͧ·Ñé§Çѹ¡è͹¨Ð·´Åͧãªé§Ò¹
¢Í§ËÇÒ¹ÍÒ¨ÁÕ¤ÃÒºà˹ÕÂÇ·ÕèÍÒ¨·ÓãËéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ìμÔ´áÁéÇèҤس¨Ð¾ÂÒÂÒÁ«ÑºáÅéÇ¡çμÒÁ
• ËÒ¡¤Ø³·Ó¢Í§àËÅÇˡô¨Í LCD ãËéÃÕº·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´·Ñ¹·Õ â´Âãªé¼éÒ¹ØèÁ·ÕèÊÐÍÒ´¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹ãªéáÍÅ¡ÍÎÍÅìà¨×ͨҧ
ËÃ×͹éÓÂÒàªç´·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´ LCD â´Â੾ÒÐ ËéÒÁãªé¹éÓ ¹éÓÂÒàªç´¡ÃШ¡ ÍЫÕâμ¹ ¹éÓÂÒÍâÃÁÒμÔ¡ ËÃ×ͼéÒáËé§ËÂÒº
㹡ÒÃàªç´·Ó¤ÇÒÁÊÐÍÒ´à´ç´¢Ò´
¢Í§àËÅǺҧª¹Ô´ÍÒ¨·ÓãËé¨Í LCD àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é ËÒ¡¨ÍáÊ´§¼ÅàÊÕÂËÒ ãËéμÔ´μèÍÈÙ¹ÂìºÃÔ¡Ò÷Õèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃáμè§μÑé§
à¾×èÍà»ÅÕè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìãËÁè
¡ÒÃà¡çº¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìäÇéà»ç¹àÇÅÒ¹Ò¹
ËÒ¡¤Ø³¨ÐäÁèä´éãªéà¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìà»ç¹àÇÅÒ¹Ò¹ (˹Öè§à´×͹ËÃ×͹ҹ¡ÇèÒ¹Ñé¹) ¤Ø³¤ÇûÅèÍÂãËé»ÃШØä¿¿éÒã¹áºμàμÍÃÕèËÁ´
¡è͹¨Ð¶Í´áºμàμÍÃÕèÍÍ¡¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì «Ö觨ЪèÇÂÂ×´ÍÒÂØ㹡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹¢Í§áºμàμÍÃÕè
108 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ
·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õ騹¡ÃзÑè§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ÊÒÁÒöãªé§Ò¹ä´éμÒÁ»¡μÔ ËÒ¡·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹·Ñé§ËÁ´áÅéÇ
ÂѧäÁèÊÒÁÒöá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒä´é ãËéμÔ´μèÍμÑÇá·¹¨Ó˹èÒ¢ͧ¤Ø³à¾×èÍÃѺ¤ÇÒÁªèÇÂàËÅ×Í
¤Ó¶ÒÁáÅФÓμͺ
â»Ã´´Ù ”¤Ó¶ÒÁáÅФÓμͺ” ·Õè˹éÒ 110 ÊÓËÃѺ¤ÇÒÁªèÇÂàËÅ×Í㹡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ㹡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìãËéÊÒÁÒö·Ó§Ò¹ä´éμÒÁ»¡μÔ
μÃǨÊͺ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍμèÒ§æ
μÃǨÊͺÊÒÂà¾ÒàÇÍÃìáÅÐÊÒÂà¤àºÔŢͧÍØ»¡Ã³ìμè;èǧ·Ñé§ËÁ´ÇèÒä´éàÊÕºà¢éÒ«çͤà¡çμá¹è¹´ÕáÅéÇ
áÅФسä´éà»Ô´à¾ÒàÇÍÃì«Ñ¾¾ÅÒÂáÅéÇ
â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Norton AntiVirus
Ãѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ Norton AntiVirus à¾×èÍμÃǨ´ÙãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒäÁèÁÕäÇÃÑÊã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
¡ÒÃÃѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ Norton AntiVirus ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > All Programs > Norton AntiVirus > Norton AntiVirus 2005
ÇÔ¸ÕãªéáÅСÒÃʹѺʹع¢Í§ Windows
Ãѹ Help and Support ¢Í§ Windows à¾×èͤé¹ËÒ»Ñ−ËÒ·ÕèÍÒ¨ÁÕ¼ÅμèÍ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³
¡ÒÃÃѹ Help and Support ¢Í§ Windows ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé:
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Help and Support
¤Ó¶ÒÁ·Õ辺ºèÍÂ
¡ÒÃàÃÕ¡´Ù FAQ ã¹à¤Ã×èͧ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¢Í§¤Ø³ â»Ã´ä»·ÕèàÇçºä«μì www.samsung.com
¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑ駫ͿμìáÇÃìãËÁè
ËÒ¡ÁÕàËμØ¡Òóì·Õèà¤Ã×èͧËÂØ´¡Ò÷ӧҹ仡зѹËѹ ä¿Åìã¹ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ì Ãкº»¯ÔºÑμÔ¡Òà Windows áÅÐ/ËÃ×Íä´ÃàÇÍÃìºÒ§Êèǹ
ÍÒ¨àÊÕÂËÒÂä´é ËÒ¡à»ç¹¡Ã³Õ´Ñ§¡ÅèÒǹÕé ãËéãªéá¼è¹«Õ´Õ System Recovery CD à¾×èÍμÔ´μÑé§ OS áÅÐÊ×èÍà¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅ System Software à¾×èÍ
μÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§ÍØ»¡Ã³ì·ÕèàÊÕÂËÒÂ
¤Óàμ×͹à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃãªé System Recovery
¡è͹·Õè¨ÐÊÑè§μÔ´μÑé§Ãкº»¯ÔºÑμÔ¡Òà Windows ãËÁè ãËéá¹èã¨ÇèÒä´éáºç¤ÍÑ»¢éÍÁÙÅ·Ñé§ËÁ´ã¹ÎÒÃì´´ÔÊ¡ìáÅéÇ
Samsung äÁè¢ÍÃѺ¼Ô´ªÍºËÒ¡à¡Ô´¡ÒÃÊÙ−ËÒ¢ͧ¢éÍÁÙÅ
¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ 109
¤Ó¶ÒÁáÅФÓμͺ
Êèǹ¹Õé»ÃСͺ´éÇ¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ»Ñ−ËÒμèÒ§æ ·ÕèÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹ä´é ÇÔ¸Õá¡éä¢áÅТéÍÁÙÅÍéÒ§ÍÔ§Í×è¹æ ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹à¤Ã×èͧ
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ Windows
Q1
à¤Ã×èͧäÁè shutdown
A
àÁ×èÍà¤Ã×èͧäÁè shutdown μÒÁ»¡μÔ ãËé¡´»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì¤éÒ§äÇ騹¡ÃзÑè§à¤Ã×èͧ»Ô´ä» ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´âËÁ´ Power-Saving
ãËé¡Ñº»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì ãËé¡´»ØèÁ¤éÒ§äÇé¹Ò¹¡ÇèÒ 4 ÇÔ¹Ò·Õà¾×èͻԴà¤Ã×èͧ ËÅѧ¨Ò¡à»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧËÅѧ»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ´éÇÂÇÔ¸Õ¡Òôѧ¡ÅèÒÇ
¨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃàÃÕ¡ãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ Scandisk à¾×èÍμÃǨÊͺ¡ÒÃà¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁ¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´ã¹Ãкº
Q2
à¤Ã×èͧáΧ¤ìÃÐËÇèÒ§¡ÒÃãªéâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ
A1
à¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁ¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´¡Ñºâ»Ãá¡ÃÁ·Õè¡ÓÅѧãªé§Ò¹ ãËé¡´»ØèÁ <Ctrl>, <Alt> áÅÐ <Delete> ¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹ áÅéǤÅÔ¡§Ò¹¹Ñé¹
ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Windows Task Manager]
A2
à¡Ô´¤ÇÒÁ¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´¡ÑºÃкº»¯ÔºÑμÔ¡Òà Windows ºÙμà¤Ã×èͧâ´Âãªé»ØèÁà¾ÒàÇÍÃì
à¡ÕèÂǡѺ¨ÍáÊ´§¼Å
110 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
Q1
¨Í LCD ÊÇèÒ§ËÃ×ÍÁ×´à¡Ô¹ä»
A
»ÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÊÇèÒ§¢Í§¨Í LCD ãªé»ØèÁ <Fn>+<
>, <Fn>+<
>
Q2
Ê¡Ãչ૿àÇÍÃìú¡Ç¹¡ÒÃÃѺªÁä¿ÅìÇÔ´ÕâÍËÃ×Í¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹â»Ãá¡ÃÁ Media Player
A
¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡ Tools > Options > Player > Allow screen saver during playback in the Media Player
Q3
ã¹âËÁ´ DOS ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹à»ç¹âËÁ´ DOS ẺàμçÁ¨Í â´Â¡Òá´»ØèÁ <ALT>+<Enter> áÊ´§ÀÒ¾äÁèμèÍà¹×èͧÍÂÙè¤ÃÙè˹Öè§
A
âËÁ´ DOS ʹѺʹعÍÑ¡¢ÃÐẺ 2 äºμì àªè¹ÀÒÉÒà¡ÒËÅÕáÅÐ−Õè»Øè¹·ÕèÃѹã¹âËÁ´¡ÃÒ¿Ô¡äÁèãªèã¹à·ç¡«ìâËÁ´ 㹡óչÕé
ÀÒ¾·Õè¢Ò´ËÒÂÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¨Ò¡¡ÒÃáÊ´§¼ÅÃÐËÇèÒ§¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹âËÁ´ÇÔ´ÕâÍ
Q4
㹡óÕμèÍ仹Õé ¨Í¡ÃоÃÔºËÃ×ÍáÊ´§ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹ÍÂÙèªèǧÊÑé¹æ (੾ÒÐÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃì´áÊ´§¼Å nVidia):
(¤ÅÔ¡·Õèá·çº Graphics Related à»ÅÕ蹤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´ à»ÅÕè¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å ¶Í´ÍÐá´»àμÍÃì AC àÃÔèÁÃкºãËÁè
à»ÅÕè¹ÃдѺ PowerMizer)
A
«Öè§ÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹¢³Ð·Õèä´ÃàÇÍÃìÇÔ´ÕâÍ¡ÓÅѧμÃǨÊͺ¡ÒÃÍØ»¡Ã³ì·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍäÇé
ÃÐËÇèÒ§¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺ ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å·Õèàª×èÍÁμèÍäÇéÍÒ¨ÁÕ¡ÒáÃоÃÔºËÃ×Íà¡Ô´ÊÑ−−ҳú¡Ç¹¢Öé¹ä´é
Q5
¢³Ð·ÕèμèÍâ»ÃਡàμÍÃì áÅéÇà»ÅÕ蹡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒãËéáÊ´§·Ñ駺¹¨Í LCD áÅÐâ»ÃਡàμÍÃìâ´Â¡Òá´»ØèÁ <Fn>+<F4/
¡ÒÃáÊ´§¼ÅäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ
A
¡´»ØèÁ <Fn>+<F4 /
>
> ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
ËÒ¡Âѧ¤§ÁÕ»Ñ−ËÒà´ÔÁÍÂÙè áÊ´§ÇèÒâ»ÃਤàμÍÃìäÁèÊÒÁÒöÃͧÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´·Õè¡Ó˹´ä´é ãËéÅ´¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´ŧà»ç¹
1024 ×768
Q6
¨ÍáÊ´§¼Å¢Í§ DVD ËÃ×Íä¿Åì MPEG ¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯à©¾ÒÐã¹ LCD (੾ÒÐÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃì´áÊ´§¼Å nVidia)
A
ÇÔ´ÕâͨÐáÊ´§ã¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Åà¾Õ§˹Ö觪¹Ô´ àÁ×èÍàÅ×Í¡ LCD áÅÐ CRT äÇé¾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹
1. ¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õèà´Ê¡ì·Í» áÅÐàÅ×Í¡ Properties ¨Ò¡àÁ¹Ù·Õè»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
2. ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì [Display Properties] ãËéàÅ×Í¡á·çº Settings > Advanced > GeForce Go xxxx
3. àÅ×Í¡ Full Screen Video menu> Full Screen Video Control áÅСÓ˹´ Full Screen Device à»ç¹ ‘Auxiliary Display’
¨Ò¡¹Ñ鹤ÅÔ¡·Õè»ØèÁ Apply ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹ ¤Ø³¨ÐÊÒÁÒöªÁÇÔ´Õâͨҡ·Ñé§ LCD áÅÐ CRT
Q7
ËÅѧ¨Ò¡àª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ TV ºÒ§â»Ãá¡ÃÁ àªè¹ Debug, Mem ÏÅÏ ¨ÐäÁè·Ó§Ò¹ã¹âËÁ´ MS-DOS ẺàμçÁ˹éÒ¨Í
A
¶éÒãªé TV à»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å â»Ãá¡ÃÁºÒ§ÍÂèÒ§ àªè¹ Debug, Mem ÏÅÏ ÍÒ¨äÁè·Ó§Ò¹ÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧã¹âËÁ´ MS-DOS
ẺàμçÁ˹éÒ¨Í ãËéÃѹâ»Ãá¡ÃÁã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì MS-DOS
Q8
·ÒÊ¡ìºÒÃì·Õè´éÒ¹ÅèÒ§¢Í§¨ÍÀÒ¾äÁè»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ àÁ×èÍãªéâ»ÃਤàμÍÃìà»ç¹ÍØ»¡Ã³ìáÊ´§¼Å
A
àËμØ¡Òóì¹ÕéÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹ä´é áÁéÇèÒ SXGA+ LCD ¨ÐÃͧÃѺ¤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´ã¹âËÁ´ 1400 x 1050
â»ÃਤàμÍÃìÍÒ¨äÁèÃͧÃѺâËÁ´¹Õé 㹡óչÕé ãËéà»ÅÕ蹤ÇÒÁÅÐàÍÕ´à»ç¹ 1024x768 (á¹Ð¹Ó) 㹤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì
Q9
¡ÒÃÊÅѺ¾ÃÍÁμì¤ÓÊÑ觢ͧ MS-DOS à»ç¹âËÁ´àμçÁ˹éÒ¨Í ËÃ×Íà»ç¹âËÁ´ Windows â´Â¡´»ØèÁ <Alt>+<Enter>
¨ÐäÁè·Ó§Ò¹ÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ
A
¡Òá´»ØèÁ <Alt>+<Enter> â´Âãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì USB ÍÒ¨·ÓãËéÃкºÃѺÃÙé¡Òûé͹¢éÍÁÙÅà»ç¹¡Òá´ËÅÒ»ØèÁ
â´Â¢Öé¹ÍÂÙè¡ÑºÃÐÂÐàÇÅÒ㹡ÒÃÃѺÃÙé¡Òá´»ØèÁ¢Í§á»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì 㹡óÕàªè¹¹Õé áÊ´§ÇèÒ¾ÃÍÁμì¤ÓÊÑ觢ͧ MS-DOS
ÁÕ¡ÒÃÊÅѺà»ç¹áººàμçÁ¨ÍáÅÐẺ Windows «éÓæ ¡Ñ¹ËÅÒ¤ÃÑé§ â»Ã´¡´»ØèÁ <Alt>+<Enter> ãËéàÃçÇÂÔ觢Öé¹ ËÃ×Í¡´»ØèÁ
<Alt>+<Enter> â´Âãªéá»é¹¾ÔÁ¾ì¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ
Q10 àÁ×èÍàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ TV μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Turn off monitor power ¨ÐäÁè·Ó§Ò¹
A
àÁ×èÍàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ TV ËÅѧ¨Ò¡àÃÔèÁÃкº¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìáÅéÇ μÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Turn off monitor power ¨ÐäÁè·Ó§Ò¹
ËÒ¡μéͧ¡ÒÃãËéμÑÇàÅ×Í¡¹Õé×·Ó§Ò¹ ¢Íá¹Ð¹ÓãËéàª×èÍÁμè͡Ѻ TV áÅéǨ֧à»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ
Q11
äͤ͹·Ò§ÅÑ´äÁè»ÃÒ¡¯º¹Ë¹éÒ¨Í
A
äͤ͹·Ò§ÅÑ´¨Ð»ÃÒ¡¯àÁ×èÍÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ Magic Keyboard áÅÐ Samsung Display Manager
¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ 111
Q12
äÁèÊÒÁÒöμÑ駤èÒ Dual View ãËé·Ó§Ò¹ÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ (੾ÒÐ Intel Graphics)
A
»Ñ−ËÒ¹ÕéÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹àÁ×èÍàÅ×Í¡âËÁ´ Clone ÊÓËÃѺ¨ÍÀÒ¾ÀÒ¹͡
¡´¤ÕÂì Fn+F4 ÃèÇÁ¡Ñ¹à¾×èÍàÅ×Í¡ LCD áÅоÂÒÂÒÁμÑ駤èÒ Dual View ÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§
Q13
¨ÍÀÒ¾ÁÕ¡ÒÃËÁع áμèäÁèÊÒÁÒö¡ÅѺÊÙèμÓá˹è§à´ÔÁä´é
A
»Ñ−ËÒ¹ÕéÍÒ¨à¡Ô´¢Öé¹àÁ×èͤسãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ËÁع˹éÒ¨Í ËÃ×Í¡´¤ÕÂì¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´àÁ×èÍãªé¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì ÊÓËÃѺ Intel Graphics ãËé¡´»ØèÁ
Ctrl+Alt+¤ÕÂìÅÙ¡Èà ( ↑ : ËÁع 0 ͧÈÒ, → : ËÁع 270 ͧÈÒ, ↓ : ËÁع 180 ͧÈÒ, ← : ËÁع 90 ͧÈÒ)
à¾×èÍ¡ÅѺÊÙè·ÔÈ·Ò§à´ÔÁ ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃì´áÊ´§¼ÅÍ×è¹æ ãËéãªéâËÁ´¡ÒÃËÁع˹éҨͧ͢àÁ¹Ù Advanced
·ÕèÁÕ㹡ÒÃì´áÊ´§¼Å¢Í§¼Ùé¼ÅÔμ¹Ñé¹
à¡ÕèÂǡѺàÊÕ§
Q1
¢éÍÁÙÅà¡ÕèÂǡѺ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§/ź¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§
A
㹡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ËÃ×Íź¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ÊÓËÃѺ¤ÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃì¹Õé â»Ã´ÍèÒ¹¤Ó͸ԺÒÂμèÍ仹Õé
• ͧ¤ì»ÃСͺ¢Í§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§
ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§»ÃСͺ´éÇÂÃÒ¡ÒÃÊÒÁÃÒ¡ÒÃμèÍ仹Õé «Ö觨ÐÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔã¹ÃÐËÇèÒ§¡Ãкǹ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§
– High Definition Audio - KB888111: Microsoft UAA Bus Driver for High Definition Audio
– SoundMAX: SoundMAX Integrated Digital HD Audio
– WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver: SRS
• ÇÔ¸Õź¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§
㹡ÒÃź¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ â»Ã´Åº¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§μÒÁÅӴѺμèÍ仹Õé
ËÒ¡¤Ø³Åº¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§â´ÂäÁèà»ç¹ä»μÒÁÅӴѺμèÍ仹Õé ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ÍÒ¨äÁèä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃźÍÂèÒ§àËÁÒÐÊÁ ËÃ×ÍÁԩйÑé¹
¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ãËÁèÍÒ¨ÅéÁàËÅÇ
1. àÅ×Í¡ Start > Control Panel > Add/Remove Program
2. ź WOW XT and TSXT Filter Driver
3. ź SoundMAX áÅÐàÃÔèÁÃкºãËÁè
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ËéÒÁ źÃÒ¡Òà High Definition Audio à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¡ÒÃźÃÒ¡ÒùÕé
¨Ðà»ç¹¡ÒÃźä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§âÁà´çÁ´éÇ ËÒ¡¤Ø³ä´éźÃÒ¡ÒùÕéáÅéÇ ãËéμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§âÁà´çÁãËÁè
• ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ãËÁè
112 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
ËÒ¡ÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ÍÂÙèáÅéÇ ãËéź¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹¢éÒ§μé¹
ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§¨ÐÃÇÁÍÂÙèã¹Ê×èÍà¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅ System Software
1. ãÊèÊ×èÍà¡çº¢éÍÁÙÅ System Software ã¹ä´Ã¿ì CD-ROM
2. àÅ×Í¡ Standard Installation ËÃ×Í Custom Installation ¨Ò¡¹Ñé¹àÅ×Í¡ Sound Driver
ͧ¤ì»ÃСͺ¢Í§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§·Ñé§ 3 Êèǹ¨Ðä´éÃѺ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§â´ÂÍÑμâ¹ÁÑμÔ
• ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ËÅѧ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ Windows XP ãËÁè
ËÒ¡¤Ø³μÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ ËÅѧ¨Ò¡μÔ´μÑé§ Windows XP ãËÁè ÇÔ¹â´Çì Add Hardware Wizard (Modem Device)
ÍÒ¨»ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹ÃÐËÇèÒ§¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìàÊÕ§ «Öè§à¡Ô´¢Öé¹à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡ High Definition Audio - KB888111
Hotfix «Öè§ÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ã¹Ãкº¹Ñé¹ ÁÕ¡ÒÃà»ÅÕè¹á»Å§¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ à¾×èÍãËé¤é¹ËÒ·Ñé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìàÊÕ§áÅÐâÁà´çÁ
ËÒ¡¤Ø³μÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìâÁà´çÁ ¢éͤÇÒÁ¹Õé¨ÐäÁè»ÃÒ¡¯ ¶éÒ¨Óà»ç¹ ãËéμÔ´μÑé§ÍØ»¡Ã³ìâÁà´çÁ仾ÃéÍÁ¡Ñ¹
ËÁÒÂàËμØ ¨Ó¹Ç¹¢Í§ High Definition Audio - KB888111 Hotfix ÍÒ¨μèÒ§ÍÍ¡ä» ËÒ¡¤Ø³ä´éμÔ´μÑé§ Hotfix
¨Ò¡àÇçºä«μì¢Í§ Microsoft
à¡ÕèÂǡѺâÁà´çÁ
Q1
©Ñ¹äÁèä´éÂÔ¹àÊÕ§âÁà´çÁ
A1
μÃǨÊͺ´ÙÇèÒÁÕ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÊÒÂâ·ÃÈѾ·ìà¢éҡѺâÁà´çÁÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ
A2
μÃǨ´ÙÇèÒÁÕ¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§âÁà´çÁÍÂèÒ§¶Ù¡μéͧ
1.
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System
2.
àÅ×Í¡á·çº Hardware > Device Manager > Modems ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì System Properties áÅéÇμÃǨ´ÙÇèÒÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂàμ×͹
ÊÕàËÅ×ͧ·Õèäͤ͹¢Í§âÁà´çÁ·Õèä´éμÔ´μÑé§äÇé ËÒ¡ÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂàμ×͹´Ñ§¡ÅèÒÇ ãËéźä´ÃàÇÍÃì¢Í§âÁà´çÁ áÅéÇμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì
ãËÁèÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡à¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂàμ×͹ÊÕàËÅ×ͧáÊ´§¶Ö§¡ÒÃμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃì·ÕèäÁèÊÁºÙóì
3.
ËÒ¡äÁèÁÕà¤Ã×èͧËÁÒÂàμ×͹ÊÕàËÅ×ͧ ãËé´ÑºàºÔŤÅÔ¡·ÕèâÁà´çÁ·Õèä´éμÔ´μÑé§äÇé áÅéǤÅÔ¡·Õèá·çº Diagnostics > Query Modem
ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Modem Properties à¾×èÍμÃǨÊͺ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§âÁà´çÁ
¡ÒÃäÁèÁÕ¢éͤÇÒÁ·Ñé§ã¹á·çº Command áÅÐ Response ã¹á·çº Diagnostics ËÁÒ¶֧¡Ò÷ÕèâÁà´çÁäÁèÊÒÁÒö
·Ó§Ò¹ä´éμÒÁ»¡μÔ
ãËéμÃǨÊͺ¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§âÁà´çÁÍÕ¡¤ÃÑé§ËÅѧ¨Ò¡ºÙμà¤Ã×èͧËÃ×ÍμÔ´μÑé§ä´ÃàÇÍÃìãËÁè
(¤Ø³μéͧÍÍ¡¨Ò¡â»Ãá¡ÃÁ·Ñé§ËÁ´â´ÂãªéâÁà´çÁ㹡ÒÃÇÔà¤ÃÒÐËìâÁà´çÁẺ«Ñº«é͹)
Q2
©Ñ¹äÁèÊÒÁÒöâ·ÃÍÍ¡ä´éâ´ÂãªéÊÒÂμèÍ
A
â´Â·ÑèÇä» ÊÑ−−Ò³â·ÃÈѾ·ì·Õè¼èÒ¹μÙé PBX ËÃ×ÍÃкºÊÇÔ·ªìâ·ÃÈѾ·ì´Ô¨ÔμÍŨÐäÁèμèÍà¹×èͧ äÁèàËÁ×͹¡ÑºÊÒ·ÕèμèÍâ´Âμç
´Ñ§¹Ñé¹ âÁà´çÁÍÒ¨¨ÐäÁèÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèÍä´éà¹×èͧ¨Ò¡âÁà´çÁä´éÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³·Õè¼Ô´¾ÅÒ´¨Ò¡μÙé PBX ËÃ×ÍÃкºÊÇÔ·ªìâ·ÃÈѾ·ì
´Ô¨ÔμÍÅàªè¹ ä´éÃѺÊÑ−−Ò³ÊÒÂäÁèÇèÒ§
¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ 113
㹡óչÕé ãËé·ÓμÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹μèÍ仹Õé
- ¡ÒÃãªé¤ÓÊÑè§ AT
·Õè¾ÃÍÁμì¤ÓÊÑè§ ãËéãªé¤ÓÊÑè§ ATX3
ËÃ×ÍãËé»é͹¤ÓÊÑè§ ATX3 ¡è͹·Ó¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ
»Ñ−ËÒ¹ÕéÍÒ¨á¡éä´éâ´Â¡ÒâéÒÁ¢Ñé¹μ͹¡ÒÃμÃǨÊͺÊÑ−−Ò³â·ÃÈѾ·ì
- ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§âÁà´çÁ¼èÒ¹·Ò§ Control Panel
1.
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections
2.
ãμéËÑÇ¢éÍ See Also ¤ÅÔ¡ Phone and Modem Options
3.
ã¹á·çº Modems ãËéàÅ×Í¡âÁà´çÁ·Õèä´éμÔ´μÑé§äÇé áÅéǤÅÔ¡·Õè Properties
4.
ã¹á·çº Modem ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Modem Properties ãËé¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃàÅ×Í¡àªç¤ºçÍ¡«ì 'Wait for dial tone before dialing'
5.
ËÅѧ¨Ò¡¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡áÅéÇ ãËé¤ÅÔ¡ OK
Q3
©Ñ¹¨ÐãªéâÁà´çÁä´éÍÂèÒ§äÃàÁ×è͹Óà¤Ã×èͧä»ãªéã¹μèÒ§»ÃÐà·È?
A1
μÃǨ´ÙÇèÒä´éÁÕ¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡âÁà´çÁ¶Ù¡μéͧμÒÁÃٻẺ¢Í§»ÃÐà·È¹Ñé¹æ
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¤èÒμèÒ§æ ÊÓËÃѺ¡ÒÃÊ×èÍÊÒÃÍÒ¨áμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁáμèÅлÃÐà·È ¤Ø³ÍÒ¨äÁèÊÒÁÒöàª×èÍÁμèͼèÒ¹·Ò§âÁà´çÁ
ä´éà¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¡ÒáÓ˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡¢Í§âÁà´çÁäÁè¶Ù¡μéͧ
1.
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections
2.
ãμéËÑÇ¢éÍ See Also ¤ÅÔ¡ Phone and Modem Options
3.
ã¹á·çº Dialing Rules ¤ÅÔ¡ Edit
4.
ã¹á·çº General ã¹ÇÔ¹â´Çì Edit Location ãËéàÅ×Í¡»ÃÐà·È»Ñ¨¨ØºÑ¹¨Ò¡ÃÒ¡ÒÃμÑÇàÅ×Í¡ Country/region ÃкØÃËÑʾ×é¹·Õè
áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
A2
à¹×èͧ¨Ò¡¢¹Ò´¢Í§»ÅÑê¡â·ÃÈѾ·ìÍÒ¨¨Ðáμ¡μèÒ§¡Ñ¹ä»μÒÁáμèÅлÃÐà·È ¤Ø³μéͧ«×éÍáÅÐãªé»ÅÑê¡â·ÃÈѾ·ìãËé¶Ù¡μéͧ
μÒÁáμèÅлÃÐà·È
Q4
©Ñ¹¨ÐÃѺῡ«ìä´éÍÂèÒ§äâ³Ð·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´»ÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹ (Rest mode)?
A
㹡ÒÃÃѺῡ«ìã¹âËÁ´Êáμ¹´ìºÒ ¤Ø³μéͧμÑ駤èҴѧμèÍ仹Õé
1.
μéͧà»Ô´ãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ automatic fax reception ÊÓËÃѺâ»Ãá¡ÃÁá¿¡«ì (ÊÓËÃѺ¢éÍÁÙÅà¾ÔèÁàμÔÁ â»Ã´´Ù¨Ò¡¤ÙèÁ×ͧ͢
â»Ãá¡ÃÁá¿¡«ì)
2.
¤ÅÔ¡ Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections
3.
ãμéËÑÇ¢éÍ See Also ¤ÅÔ¡ Phone and Modem Options
4.
ã¹á·çº Modems ãËéàÅ×Í¡âÁà´çÁ·Õèä´éμÔ´μÑé§äÇé áÅéǤÅÔ¡·Õè Properties
5.
ã¹á·çº Power Management ¢Í§ÇÔ¹â´Çì Modem Properties ãËéàÅ×Í¡ÃÒ¡Òà "With this device, exit the computer from
stand-by mode" áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK
¡ÒÃμÑ駤èÒ¢éÒ§μ鹪èÇÂãËéâÁà´çÁà»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧáÅéÇÃѺῡ«ìä´éàÁ×èÍÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´»ÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹
114 ¤ÙèÁ×ͼÙéãªé
à¡ÕèÂǡѺÃкº LAN
Q1
<¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ Wake On LAN>
A
<Wake On LAN> ¤×Ϳѧ¡ìªÑ¹·Õèà»Ô´¡Ò÷ӧҹ¢Í§à¤Ã×èͧ·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´»ÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹ àÁ×èÍÁÕÊÑ−−Ò³ (àªè¹ ping ËÃ×Í
magic packet) ¨Ò¡à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ (Ãкº LAN ẺãªéÊÒÂ)
¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ <Wake On LAN>:
1.
àÅ×Í¡ My Network Places > View network connections ¨Ò¡à´Ê¡ì·Í»
2.
¤ÅÔ¡»ØèÁ¢ÇҢͧ·Ñªá¾´à˹×Í Local Area Connection áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ Properties
3.
¤ÅÔ¡ Configure áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡á·çº Power Management àÅ×Í¡ ’Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby’
áÅéǤÅÔ¡ OK ºÙμà¤Ã×èͧ
- ËÒ¡à¤Ã×èͧ·ÕèÍÂÙèã¹âËÁ´»ÃÐËÂÑ´¾Åѧ§Ò¹à»Ô´·Ó§Ò¹àÁ×èÍäÁèÁÕÊÑ−−Ò³ã´æ ãËéãªéà¤Ã×èͧËÅѧ¡àÅÔ¡¡ÒÃãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ <Wake
On LAN>
- ËÒ¡¤Ø³»Ô´à¤Ã×èͧ¢³Ð·Õè»Ô´¡ÒÃãªé§Ò¹ <Wake On LAN> ÊÑ−−Ò³ LAN LED ¨ÐÂѧ¤§ÊÇèÒ§
- ¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍÊÒ LAN ¢³Ð·Õèãªé wireless LAN ÍÒ¨äÁèÊÒÁÒöãªé¿Ñ§¡ìªÑ¹ <Wake On LAN> ä´é ¡Ó˹´¤èҤ͹¿Ô¡
wireless LAN ãËéà»ç¹o ÕDisableÕ to use <Wake On LAN> function
1.
¤ÅÔ¡·Õè My Network Place> View network connections º¹à´Ê¡ì·Í»
2.
¤ÅÔ¡¢ÇÒ·Õè Wireless Network Connection áÅéÇàÅ×Í¡ Disable
Q2
àÁ×èͩѹàª×èÍÁμèÍÊÒ LAN Ẻ 100Mbps áÅФÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍÍ¡¨Ò¡âËÁ´ standby/hibernate »ÃÒ¡¯¢éͤÇÒÁá¨é§àμ×͹
¡ÒÃàª×èÍÁμèÍ 10Mbps wired LAN »ÃÒ¡¯¢Öé¹
A
àÁ×èͤÍÁ¾ÔÇàμÍÃìÍÍ¡¨Ò¡âËÁ´ standby/hibernate ¡Òä׹¤èÒà´ÔÁ¢Í§à¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ãªéàÇÅÒ»ÃÐÁÒ³ 3 ÇÔ¹Ò·Õ àÁ×èÍà¹çμàÇÔÃì¡ä´éÃѺ
¤èÒà´ÔÁ¤×¹ÁÒáÅéÇ ¨Ð·Ó§Ò¹·Õè¤ÇÒÁàÃçÇ 100Mbps
¡ÒÃá¡é䢻Ñ−ËÒ 115
à¡ÕèÂÇ¡&Ntild